manualshive.com logo in svg

IDEC MICRO/I HG4G-CJT22 F-B Series, User Manual, Page: 926 / 1665

Share
Download
IDEC MICRO/I HG4G-CJT22 F-B Series User Manual Download Page 926

6 Multi-Command

12-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

■

Goto Screen

*1 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*2 Advanced mode only

Screen Number:

If 

Action Mode

 is set to 

Switch to Base Screen

, specify the Base Screen number to switch to 

(from 1 to 3000). If 

Action Mode

 is set to 

Open Popup Screen

 or 

Close Popup Screen

, 

specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if 

Action Mode

 is set to 

Switch to Base Screen

, 

Open Popup

Screen

, or 

Close Popup Screen

.

Use Reference Device Address

*2

: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify 

the screen number using the value of the specified device 
address.

Click 

 to display the Tag Editor. For the device address 

configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device 
Address Settings” on page 2-68.
This setting is enabled only if 

Action Mode

 is set to 

Open 

Popup Screen

 or 

Close Popup Screen

.

Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.

X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as 
the origin.
This setting is enabled only if 

Action Mode

 is set to 

Open Popup Screen

, 

Open Device 

Monitor Screen

, 

Open Password Screen

, 

Open Adjust Brightness Screen

, or 

Open File 

Screen for Movie Files

*1

.

Use Reference Device Address

*2

: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify 

the coordinates using the value of the specified device address.

Click 

 to display the Tag Editor. For the device address 

configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device 
Address Settings” on page 2-68.
This setting is enabled only if 

Action Mode

 is set to 

Open 

Popup Screen

.

Summary of Contents for MICRO/I HG4G-CJT22 F-B Series

Page 1: ...B 1701 11 User s Manual ...

Page 2: ... keys for an emergency circuit or an interlocking circuit If the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T HG1G 1P fails equipment connected to the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T HG1G 1P will no longer be protected and serious injury to operators and equipment damage may be caused For the emergency stop switch and the enabling switch on the HG1P note the following points Connect the emergency stop sw...

Page 3: ...cified tightening torque When exporting the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T HG1G 1P to Europe use an EN60127 IEC60127 approved fuse on the power line outside the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T HG1G 1P When exporting the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T HG1G 1P to Europe use an EU approved circuit protector Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5...

Page 4: ...s WindO I and MICRO I are registered trademarks of IDEC CORPORATION in JAPAN Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated All other company names and product names used in this manual or the WindO I NV4 application are trademarks of their res...

Page 5: ...re Read the following materials as necessary for your particular application References Content WindO I NV4 User s Manual This document Describes the hardware specifications of the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T HG1G 1P WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual PDF Describes the connection procedures and available device addresses for various communication including the Device Link Communicatio...

Page 6: ... can lead to serious injury or damage Information relating to requests or material to reference in the use of a function Useful information relating to a function Indicates the chapter and page of related reference information OK Screen buttons are indicated by bold text or by using the actual graphic icon SHIFT Keyboard keys are indicated by the keyboard inscription in capital letters or enclosed...

Page 7: ... the setting of the screen and without a program DM Link Communication A communication method that reads to or writes from the MICRO I device address from a computer or microcomputer board User Communication A communication method which performs communication with external devices such as barcode readers and inverters External Device Communication Generic term used to refer to Device Link Communic...

Page 8: ... USB flash drive NV Metafile A graphic data file that integrates drawings created on the WindO I NV4 edit screen Window Screens that are loaded on to the Base Screen including Popup Screen and Device Monitor Internal Device The generic term for internal device addressing on the MICRO I such as internal relays registers etc Keep Device The generic term for internal device not initialized at the sta...

Page 9: ... Operations 1 WindO I NV4 Specifications 2 1 1 1 Available Data 2 1 1 2 Available Text 2 6 1 3 Available Number of Colors 2 20 1 4 Available Image Files 2 20 1 5 Available Sound Files 2 37 1 6 Available Movie Files 2 37 2 Starting and Exiting WindO I NV4 2 38 2 1 Starting WindO I NV4 2 38 2 2 Exiting WindO I NV4 2 40 3 Configuration Functions 2 41 3 1 Application Menu Command List 2 42 3 2 Quick A...

Page 10: ...mmunication 3 87 6 1 Overview 3 87 6 2 Supported Protocols and Communication Driver 3 87 6 3 HMI Link Register LLR Assignment 3 88 6 4 Sub Host Communication Configuration Procedure 3 89 6 5 Error Information 3 92 7 BACnet Communication 3 94 7 1 Overview 3 94 7 2 BACnet Specifications 3 95 7 3 About BACnet 3 96 7 4 Function 3 98 7 5 BACnet IP Operation 3 104 7 6 BACnet IP Settings Procedure 3 105 ...

Page 11: ... Restrictions 4 79 4 2 Maximum Number of External Device Addresses 4 79 Chapter 5 Screen 1 Screen Overview 5 1 1 1 Screen Types 5 1 1 2 Screen Size 5 1 2 Creating and Manipulating WindO I NV4 Screens 5 2 2 1 Creating Screens 5 2 2 2 Opening Screens 5 3 2 3 Closing Screens 5 5 2 4 Duplicating Screens 5 7 2 5 Deleting Screens 5 9 2 6 Reusing Screens 5 11 2 7 Batch Editing of Multiple Screen Settings...

Page 12: ...yline 7 3 1 3 Polygon 7 5 1 4 Rectangle 7 8 1 5 Circle Ellipse 7 11 1 6 Arc 7 14 1 7 Pie 7 16 1 8 Equilateral Polygons 7 19 1 9 Fill 7 22 2 Picture 7 24 2 1 Picture Configuration Procedure 7 24 2 2 Properties of Picture Dialog Box 7 25 3 Text 7 26 3 1 Text Configuration Procedure 7 26 3 2 Properties of Text Dialog Box 7 27 Chapter 8 Buttons 1 Bit Button 8 1 1 1 How the Bit Button is Used 8 1 1 2 B...

Page 13: ...on Configuration Procedure 8 110 6 3 Properties of Multi Button Dialog Box 8 111 7 Keypad 8 139 7 1 How the Keypad is Used 8 139 7 2 Keypad Configuration Procedure 8 140 7 3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box 8 141 8 Selector Switch 8 143 8 1 How the Selector Switch is Used 8 143 8 2 Selector Switch Configuration Procedure 8 144 8 3 Properties of Selector Switch Dialog Box 8 145 9 Potentiometer 8 160...

Page 14: ...play Configuration Procedure 10 83 4 3 Properties of Video Display Dialog Box 10 84 4 4 File Screen 10 92 5 Message Display 10 96 5 1 How the Message Display is Used 10 96 5 2 Message Display Configuration Procedure 10 98 5 3 Properties of Message Display Dialog Box 10 99 5 4 String Data Storage Method 10 116 6 Message Switching Display 10 117 6 1 How the Message Switching Display is Used 10 117 6...

Page 15: ...64 4 3 Properties of Meter Dialog Box 11 65 Chapter 12 Commands 1 Bit Write Command 12 1 1 1 How the Bit Write Command is Used 12 1 1 2 Bit Write Command Configuration Procedure 12 3 1 3 Properties of Bit Write Command Dialog Box 12 4 2 Word Write Command 12 9 2 1 How the Word Write Command is Used 12 9 2 2 Word Write Command Configuration Procedure 12 11 2 3 Properties of Word Write Command Dialo...

Page 16: ...1 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box 13 13 4 Using Data and Detected Alarms 13 31 4 1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display 13 31 4 2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm 13 33 4 3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred 13 37 4 4 Saving the Data as a CSV File 13 39 Chapter 14 Data Log Function 1 Overview ...

Page 17: ...t Dialog Box 16 4 Chapter 17 Preventive Maintenance Function 1 Overview 17 1 1 1 How the Preventive Maintenance Function is Used 17 1 1 2 Counting the Operation Time and Operation Count 17 2 1 3 Thresholds 17 3 2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure 17 4 2 1 Counting Operation Time and Operation Count 17 4 3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box 17 6 3 1 Preventive Maintena...

Page 18: ...ut the Script Function 20 1 1 1 Overview of the Script Function 20 1 1 2 Types and Trigger Conditions of the Script 20 2 1 3 Data Type of the Script 20 3 1 4 Script Error 20 4 2 Editing and Management of the Script 20 5 2 1 Script Registration Procedure 20 5 2 2 Script Manager 20 7 2 3 Script Editor 20 12 3 Global Script 20 16 3 1 Setting procedures for Global Script 20 16 3 2 Global Script Settin...

Page 19: ...3 Multimedia Settings Dialog Box 22 12 3 1 Multimedia Settings Dialog Box 22 12 4 Checking the Status of the Function 22 16 5 Restrictions 22 17 Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function 1 Overview 23 1 1 1 User Accounts 23 1 1 2 Protecting Data 23 3 1 3 Protecting Displays and Operations 23 8 2 Security Function Configuration Procedure 23 11 2 1 Creating and Editing User Accounts 23 11 2...

Page 20: ...MICRO I 24 29 6 System Information 24 30 6 1 Displaying System Information 24 30 6 2 Target Information Dialog Box 24 32 Chapter 25 Monitor Function 1 Monitoring with WindO I NV4 25 1 1 1 How the Monitor Function in WindO I NV4 is Used 25 1 1 2 Debugging in WindO I NV4 25 4 1 3 Display the Value of Device Address in Popup 25 18 1 4 Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions 25 18 1 5 Switchi...

Page 21: ...tion 28 1 1 3 Minimum System Requirements 28 2 1 4 Settings and Connection Method 28 2 1 5 System Web Page 28 5 1 6 Custom Web Page 28 14 2 FTP Server Function 28 18 2 1 What Can Be Done with the FTP Server Function 28 18 2 2 System Composition 28 18 2 3 Hierarchy of the FTP Server 28 19 2 4 Supported Commands and Transfer modes 28 19 2 5 Verified FTP Client 28 19 2 6 Settings and Connection Metho...

Page 22: ... 5 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands to Transfer PLC Programs 29 19 2 6 Using File Manager on the MICRO I to Transfer PLC Programs 29 21 2 7 Precautions 29 29 3 File Copy Function 29 30 3 1 What Can Be Done with the File Copy Function 29 30 3 2 File Copy Operating Procedures 29 31 3 3 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands to Copy Files 29 32 3 4 Using File Manager on th...

Page 23: ...orun Function Security 31 36 3 USB Popup Screen Function 31 37 3 1 Automatically Displaying a Popup Screen when a USB Flash Drive is Inserted 31 37 Chapter 32 Printer 1 Functions and Connections 32 1 1 1 Functions Available with the Printer 32 1 1 2 Connecting a Printer to MICRO I 32 1 1 3 Supported Printers 32 1 2 Setting and Monitoring the Printer 32 2 2 1 Setting the Printer 32 2 2 2 Monitoring...

Page 24: ...s 35 8 1 7 Installation 35 13 1 8 Wiring 35 16 1 9 USB Cable Lock Pin Attachment 35 17 1 10 Maintenance and Inspection 35 18 2 HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 35 22 2 1 Packing content 35 22 2 2 Type No 35 22 2 3 Part Names 35 23 2 4 External Interfaces 35 25 2 5 Specifications 35 27 2 6 Dimensions 35 29 2 7 Installation 35 33 2 8 Wiring 35 35 2 9 USB Cable Lock Pin Attachment 35 36 2 10 Maintenance and Inspectio...

Page 25: ...ucts 35 77 6 1 Warranty Period 35 77 6 2 Extent of warranty 35 77 6 3 Start 35 77 6 4 Indemnification 35 77 6 5 Extent of service 35 77 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting 1 Error Messages 36 1 1 1 Errors Displayed on the Screen 36 1 1 2 Low Battery Voltage 36 4 2 Handling Problems 36 5 2 1 When You Cannot Download Project Data 36 5 2 2 If the backlight is OFF and the buzzer sounds 36 5 2 3 Touch Panel Doe...

Page 26: ...Preface 25 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 27: ... read write from to external device s and does not burden the operator with issues relating to communications software 1 1 System Composition for the RUN operation The MICRO I can be operated in the following system configuration Devices that can be connected vary depending on your MICRO I model Refer to the specifications of the model for the details Chapter 1 System Composition 1 System Composit...

Page 28: ...ect you have created can be downloaded to the MICRO I by directly connecting it to the computer or the project data can be downloaded to external memory device and then it can be copied from external memory device to the MICRO I equipped with the memory card interface or the USB interface Upload Copy Copy 130 Download Install External Memory Device MICRO I Computer WindO I NV4 USB flash drive SD m...

Page 29: ... settings and creating screens The set of data made up of settings and created screens is called a project Using WindO I NV4 you create a project and then download it to the MICRO I to build the interface necessary for operation 2 About the WindO I NV4 Download Upload Download Upload Download Upload WindO I NV4 MICRO I External Memory Device USB flash drive SD memory card ...

Page 30: ...Display screen number address number 0 to FFFFh Monitor Mode Monitor Mode is used for monitoring values of device addresses using WindO I NV4 In this mode the words Monitor Mode flashes at the bottom left of the MICRO I screen On the WindO I NV4 Online tab in the Monitor group click Start Monitor Offline Mode MICRO I stops communicating with the external devices It takes you to a Main Menu with ma...

Page 31: ...ce 4 Downloading the project 3 Saving the project 5 Debug 7 RUN refer to Chapter 2 2 1 Starting WindO I NV4 on page 2 38 Creating a new project refer to Chapter 4 1 1 Creating New Project Data on page 4 1 Creating new screens refer to Chapter 5 2 1 Creating Screens on page 5 2 refer to Chapter 24 2 Downloading on page 24 12 refer to Chapter 25 Monitor Function on page 25 1 refer to Chapter 36 Trou...

Page 32: ... project data while confirming actual actions 6 Troubleshooting If there is a module or communication related problem with the MICRO I or a problem with the screen an appropriate message is displayed at the top of the screen In addition error information is saved to a special data register By referring to this information and repeatedly correcting the project downloading and debugging the project ...

Page 33: ...038 to 1 18x10 38 0 1 18x10 38 to 3 4x1038 Bit 0 1 String S String data It handles from the beginning to the NULL 00h character as a character string Data type Data handling UBIN16 W Data is handled as an unsigned 16 bit integer BIN16 I Data is handled as an signed 16 bit integer If the sign bit bit 15 is 1 the value is two s complement UBIN32 D Handled as an unsigned 32 bit integer with the start...

Page 34: ...r word Upper word Sign 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th s e exponent bit 30 to 23 bit 31 bit 23 f significand bit 22 to 0 Represents after the decimal of 1 xxx 127 Sign bit 0 positive 1 negative bit 22 bit 0 bit 30 s e f 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 The internal representation of Float32 F is described here but the data for Float32 F floating point real number...

Page 35: ...in LDR1 Storing 4321 Hex in LDR0 F765 Hex in LDR1 BCD8 EB The sign is 1 Hex so the binary coded decimal value of the positive number 2345678 Hex handled as 2345678 Dec The sign is F Hex so the binary coded decimal value of the negative number 7654321 Hex handled as 7654321 Dec Data type Storing 0000 Hex in LDR0 BFA0 Hex in LDR1 Float32 F bit bit 15 0 0FFF Hex LDR0 0000111111111111 bit bit 15 0 FFF...

Page 36: ...communicate data in device addresses in one word units so when the upper word and lower word are sent in separate packets the value may have already changed when the data for both words is received which may cause an unexpected result M 4d Stored value LDR50 Upper byte I 49 Lower byte C 43 LDR51 Upper byte R 52 Lower byte O 4f LDR52 Upper byte I 49 Lower byte LDR53 Upper byteLower byte 00h No chan...

Page 37: ... LDR103 Parts you can indirectly read and indirectly write Device address set as read source Device address with actually read value Device address for Indirect value 200 LDR11 300 LDR12 100 LDR10 500 LDR14 4 D21 500 LDR200 4 words Indirect value Read LDR13 400 200 LDR101 300 LDR102 100 LDR100 1000 LDR103 3 D20 1000 LDR20 3 words Indirect value Device address set as write source Device address wit...

Page 38: ...ext Group on page 19 1 Font Description Fonts installed in the MICRO I Fonts to be pre loaded on the MICRO I Japanese European Chinese Korean Taiwanese Central European Baltic and Cyrillic fonts can be installed on the MICRO I The installed fonts installed can be changed as needed using WindO I NV4 which helps save and efficiently operate the user capacity Windows Font All fonts used on the comput...

Page 39: ...vel 1 kanji set Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged JIS level 1 kanji set Refer to High quality Fonts on page 2 10 Japanese large font second standard JIS level 2 kanji set Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged JIS level 2 kanji set Refer to High quality Fonts on page 2 10 Chinese GB2312 Chinese Korean KSC5601 Korean Taiwanese BIG5 Taiwanese European lar...

Page 40: ...device data code for the Message Display 3 Windows font can be used only when the Use Text Manager is selected Parts Description MICRO I installed Font 1 Windows Font Buttons Bit Button YES YES Word Button YES YES Goto Screen Button YES YES Print Button YES YES Key Button YES YES Keypad YES YES Selector Switch YES YES 3 Lamps Pilot Lamp YES YES Multi State Lamp YES YES Data Displays Numerical Inpu...

Page 41: ...el 2 kanji set 423KB Chinese GB2312 237KB Korean KSC5601 108KB Taiwanese BIG5 421KB European large font ISO 8859 1 Latin1 101KB Central European ANSI1250 5 25KB Baltic ANSI1257 5 25KB Cyrillic ANSI1251 5 25KB The download size of font data is adjusted in multiples of 64KB The download size of font data is 64KB when the font size is 0KB or 64KB and smaller Font Size Japanese large font first standa...

Page 42: ...d high quality fonts and select Use large font on the System tab in the Project Setting dialog box the MICRO I can replace some of the optional fonts with the high quality fonts Scaled text with a background color is replaced and displayed with these fonts for a more attractive look High quality European Font Display Size 8x16 W H 0 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W H 1 7 8 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 43: ... I NV4 User s Manual 2 11 1 WindO I NV4 Specifications 2 WindO I NV4 Features Basic Operations High quality Japanese Font Display Size 8x16 W H 0 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W H 1 7 8 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 44: ...4 5 6 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W H 1 7 8 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When the high quality fonts have not been downloaded into the operator interface the Standard fonts are used even if Use large font is selected When the Character Input part display font size is 8x16 high quality fonts are not displayed even if Use large font is selected ...

Page 45: ... dialog box for Drawing Objects Parts or on the Text Manager 2 Set each item and click the OK button Font Select the font to use Font style Select italic bold or other style Size Select the size of the text Sample Shows a preview using the specified font Script Select the character set code The right end of the text may have missing dots if Font style is set to Italic You can remedy this by adding...

Page 46: ...log box Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Print Button Key Button Pilot Lamp Multi State Lamp Registration Text tab Selector Switch Message Display General tab Message Switching Display Message tab Bar Chart Line Chart Label tab Using the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager disables these settings in the Properties dialog box Align Text Multiple lines of texrot are shown align...

Page 47: ...ns depending on the part This table shows where to find this property Applicable draw object Text Applicable parts Buttons Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Print Button Key Button Keypad Lamps Pilot Lamp Multi State Lamp Part Location Text Properties of Text dialog box Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Print Button Key Button Pilot Lamp Multi State Lamp Registration Text tab Keypa...

Page 48: ...imal 6 The lower four bits of the code are hexadecimal 1 Therefore the character code for a is as follows Upper 4 bits of the code hexadecimal Lower 4 bits of the code hexadecimal Upper 4 bits Lower 4 bits a 6 1 For other fonts and two byte characters refer to the table of the relevant code system Japanese two byte characters JIS first standard second standard Chinese GB2312 Taiwanese BIG5 Korean ...

Page 49: ...WindO I NV4 User s Manual 2 17 1 WindO I NV4 Specifications 2 WindO I NV4 Features Basic Operations European Font ISO 8859 1 Central European Font ANSI 1250 ...

Page 50: ...1 WindO I NV4 Specifications 2 18 WindO I NV4 User s Manual Baltic Font ANSI 1257 Cyrillic Font ANSI 1251 ...

Page 51: ...I NV4 User s Manual 2 19 1 WindO I NV4 Specifications 2 WindO I NV4 Features Basic Operations Japanese Font JIS X0201 Control Codes Refer to the following table when using control codes in User Communications ...

Page 52: ...lors HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T 1 HG1G 1P Picture Manager 65536 colors Drawing objects and Properties sheet 256 colors HG2G 5T 2 Picture Manager Monochrome 16 shades Drawing objects and Properties sheet Monochrome 16 shades File format Description JPEG Supports JPEG files that conform to the JPEG standard ISO IEC 10918 1 ITU T Recommendation T 81 that adopt baseline DCT coding The JFIF ext...

Page 53: ...rawings Saving image files 1 Click Import in Picture Manager The Open dialog box is displayed 2 Specify the image file and then click Open When managing pictures by category create a new category and select it To create a category click Configure and then click New Category on the Category dialog box For details refer to Category Dialog Box on page 2 31 Click Options to Apply Dithering or Color Ex...

Page 54: ...splayed Click Yes to overwrite the image After overwriting the image is saved in the list of the selected category and the previous image is deleted from the list Example The picture Picture00 is saved in the category Pic_Lib If the picture Picture00 bmp is saved to the category NewBook1 the new image Picture00 is saved to NewBook1 and the image named Picture00 that was previously in Pic_Lib is de...

Page 55: ... pictures in the category selected from Symbols is displayed When managing pictures by category create a new category and select it To create a category click Configure and then click New Category on the Category dialog box For details refer to Category Dialog Box on page 2 31 Categories tab Symbol Options By using the settings in Symbol Options you can modify fill color and background color and t...

Page 56: ...ze of the picture displayed in Preview can be changed 1 Right click the picture displayed in Preview then click Set Preview Size The Set Preview Size dialog box is displayed 2 Specify the width and the height and click OK Preview shows the picture with the specified size For details refer to Set Preview Size Dialog Box on page 2 35 You can also display the Picture Name Settings dialog box by doubl...

Page 57: ... screen are saved as pictures in NMF NV Metafile format in Picture Manager 1 Select and right click the drawing object then click Copy to Picture Manager The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed If a picture contains transparency or Transparent Color is selected as to for the imported picture the transparency range is displayed in magenta R 255 G 4 B 255 Grouped drawing objects can be save...

Page 58: ...bject is saved in Picture Manager You cannot use the following characters in the picture name Options Configures the image processing in Options For details refer to Picture Name Setting Dialog Box on page 2 36 If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency the transparency range is displayed in magenta R 255 G 4 B 255 ...

Page 59: ...re as an image file 1 Select a picture to export and then click Export The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed 2 Select the folder to save and then click OK To select multiple pictures press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items To save as an image file in NMF NV Metafile format select and right click the drawing object drawn on the editing screen then click Export as NV ...

Page 60: ...eck boxes for the pictures registered to the picture list Save Picture Files in External Memory Device Saves the image files for the pictures selected with the check boxes to external memory device Click this button to display the Select Drive dialog box Category The name of the category is displayed Selects a category to save to when saving pictures When selecting a picture select the category in...

Page 61: ...n your project data For details refer to Symbol Factory on page 2 32 Select Closes Picture Manager and sets the picture selected in the picture list Close Closes Picture Manager Image An image of the picture is displayed If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency the transparency range is displayed in magenta R 255 G 4 B 255 Picture Nam...

Page 62: ... Exchange Selects this check box to convert the color of the picture From Specifies color before conversion Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box Specify the color and then click OK to Selects the color after conversion color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Transparent Color can also be select...

Page 63: ...eates a new category in the Category List The default category name is NewBookn n Number Delete Category Deletes a category from the Category List Rename Category Changes the name of the category selected in the Category List The maximum number is 256 characters Category List The name of the category is displayed Category List You cannot use the following characters in the category name ...

Page 64: ...ved in Picture Manager Categories tab Opens a tab for a category name selected from Categories and shows a list of pictures Selects a picture saved in Picture Manager Preview Display a picture selected from Categories tab according to Symbol Options setting Symbol Options Modify the fill and background color and flip or rotate shapes For details refer to Symbol Options on page 2 33 Categories tab ...

Page 65: ...d The image is filled uniformly in the color selected in Fill Color Hollow All color is deleted Fill Color Selects the color used for Shaded or Solid modes Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box Select a color from the Color Palette This option can only be set when Shaded or Solid are selected as the Fill Color Mode Defaults Returns all settings in Fill Color to their default S...

Page 66: ...er or exporting an image using Export from the right click menu Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box Select a color from the Color Palette Defaults Returns the background color configured to the picture to default When exporting an image in the following formats by clicking Export from the right click menu this setting is not applied GIF PNG SVG VML WMF XAML Retain above Sett...

Page 67: ... pictures If this check box is not selected applies to the picture selected in Categories tab Defaults Returns the size configured to the picture to default Help Displays the Symbol Factory Help Width Height Setting Method I want to set both the height and the width Change the width and the height of a picture individually Enters the width and the height of the picture I want to set just the width...

Page 68: ...re beautifully when they are saved Color Exchange Select this check box to convert the color of the picture Image You cannot use the following characters in the picture name From Specifies color before conversion Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box Specify the color and then click OK to Selects the color after conversion color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click this butto...

Page 69: ...rted by models that are equipped with a video interface Item Description File format Wave files wav Data format PCM Sampling rate 8000 11025 12000 16000 24000 22050 32000 44100 Hz Quantization bit rate 16 bit Audio type Mono or stereo File size Max 512 KB HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Item Description File format HG5G 4G 3G V AVI file avi HG4G 3G MP4 file mp4 Movi...

Page 70: ...rt screen tiles click WindOI NV4 Windows 7 Windows Vista Click Start click Programs click Automation Organizer V2 click WindOI NV4 and then click WindOI NV4 Windows XP Click Start click All Programs click Automation Organizer V2 click WindOI NV4 and then click WindOI NV4 WindO I NV4 starts 2 Starting and Exiting WindO I NV4 You can also start WindO I NV4 by double clicking WindO I NV4 icon on the ...

Page 71: ...e software Preference The Update Preference dialog box is displayed when this button is clicked To update information when WindO I NV4 starts check this check box The Automation Organizer Updater dialog box will be displayed when there is an update Close Closes the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box and start WindO I NV4 In order to display the Automation Organizer Updater your computer must ...

Page 72: ...utton to open the project data The recovery data is deleted when the project data is saved Delete Deletes the selected recovery data Delete All Deletes all recovery data Close Closes the Project Recovery dialog box Recovery data is not deleted The Project Recovery dialog box will be displayed again the next time WindO I NV4 starts 2 2 Exiting WindO I NV4 Click and then click Exit WindO I NV4 WindO...

Page 73: ...kspace The workspace is the area where the Project window the Object List window the Screen List window the Part List window and the Toolbox window are located You can change the position and method for displaying windows in the workspace For details refer to 3 4 Windows Displayed in the Workspace on page 2 54 Editing window The editing window is the area for editing Base Screens and Popup Screens...

Page 74: ...p Open Opens project data that has already been created Save Saves the project data being edited Save As Saves the project data being edited with a new name Print Outputs the project data being edited to a printer or Word file Close Closes the project data being edited Recent Projects Shows the list of recently used project data up to a maximum of ten items WindO I NV4 Options Customizes WindO I N...

Page 75: ...lbar If you click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar button the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu is displayed You can change the quick access toolbar to any desired settings Changing the buttons displayed on the quick access toolbar Check only the buttons you wish to display on the quick access toolbar More Commands You can add or delete quick access toolbar commands 1 Click the button on the q...

Page 76: ...ove button The command is deleted Show below the Ribbon You can change the position of the quick access toolbar to be located below the ribbon Click the button on the quick access toolbar and then click Show below the Ribbon If you right click a command on the quick access toolbar and click Remove from Quick Access Toolbar that quick access toolbar command can be deleted To change the order of the...

Page 77: ...ition to be below the ribbon with the following methods Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show below the Ribbon Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize on the WindO I NV4 Options dialog box You can also return the quick access toolbar to its original position with the following methods Right click the quick access toolbar or ...

Page 78: ...lready been created Popup Screen Opens a Popup Screen that has already been created Open Previous Screen Opens a screen number before the currently selected screen Open Next Screen Opens a screen number after the currently selected screen Delete Deletes the selected screen Reuse Copies another project s screens Command Description Shapes Line Draws a line Polyline Draws a polyline Polygon Draws a ...

Page 79: ...Input Character Input Inserts a Character Input Picture Display Inserts a Picture Display Video Display 1 Inserts a Video Display Message Display Inserts a Message Display Message Switching Display Inserts a Message Switching Display Alarm List Display Inserts an Alarm List Display Alarm Log Display Inserts an Alarm Log Display Numerical Display Inserts a Numerical Display Calendar Inserts a Calen...

Page 80: ...t s size and display region A specific value is added to the device address number of the object when pasting and duplicating parts Increment Bit Number Enables or disables the increment bit number function A specific value is added to the bit number of the object when pasting and duplicating parts Command Description Download Project Data Downloads project data to the MICRO I Files to External Me...

Page 81: ...r function FTP client function Sound 1 Configures the sound function Multimedia Function 1 Configures the multimedia function Global Script Configures one global script Command Description User Accounts Configures security function user accounts and passwords Command Description Web Page Editor Shows the Web Page Editor Creates a Custom Web Page Command Description Picture Manager Shows the Pictur...

Page 82: ...evice inserted in the MICRO I Command Description Start Stop Monitor Starts or stops monitoring the MICRO I with WindO I NV4 An external device is required when configuring it Go Offline Online Switch the MICRO I to Offline Mode or Online Mode Under Offline Mode you can change values of device addresses with WindO I NV4 and check the operation of project data on the MICRO I Screens Shows or hides ...

Page 83: ...mparison Result window This window displays the results of that comparison of projects Screen Diagram Shows the Screen Diagram This window displays the Overlapping Screen information and the screen numbers and titles of the screens linked by the Goto Screen Button the Goto Screen Command the Numerical Input the Character Input the Alarm List Display and the Alarm Log Display Toolbox Shows the Tool...

Page 84: ... that correspond to the specified user Command Description Zoom Changes the magnification of the editing window Command Description Close All Closes all editing windows Command Description 1 dot Sets the line width to one dot 2 dots Sets the line width to two dots 3 dots Sets the line width to three dots 5 dots Sets the line width to five dots Solid Sets the line to solid Dot Sets the line to dott...

Page 85: ...l Vertically flips selected objects Flip Horizontal Horizontally flips selected objects Align Left Aligns selected objects to the left Align Center Aligns selected objects to the center Align Right Aligns selected objects to the right Align Top Aligns selected objects to the top Align Middle Aligns selected objects to the middle Align Bottom Aligns selected objects to the bottom Make Horizontal Sp...

Page 86: ...able docking Windows that are not docked are called floating windows If you drag the title bar of the workspace window you can move all the docked windows together If you drag the tab of a workspace window you can move just the selected window Docking windows You can dock a floating window to WindO I NV4 s left right top or bottom frame or a separate window 1 Drag the window s title bar or tab The...

Page 87: ...r a separate window If the workspace window is dropped on the icon it is docked to WindO I NV4 s left right top or bottom frame If a floating window is dropped on the Docking icon it is docked to WindO I NV4 s left right top or bottom frame or a docked window When the mouse cursor gets close to a Docking icon while dragging the title bar or tab the location to dock the window is displayed Window d...

Page 88: ...window Change the displayed window with the tabs Changing the display method of windows Auto Hide If the workspace window is docked you can change the widow to automatically hide and show only its tabs Click the Auto Hide icon to change the window to show only its tabs The window is displayed when you bring the mouse cursor close to the tabs Auto Hide icon Tabs Mouse cursor Click Auto Hide to secu...

Page 89: ...e display is updated with the latest information Position This section of the status bar shows the X and Y coordinates of the mouse cursor in the editing window Text Group This section of the status bar shows the current text group The text displayed in the editing window changes according to the displayed text group To change the text group click and select the text group Active User This section...

Page 90: ...s dialog box Configure the items and click the OK button Type Selects the type of grid Touch Panel Aligns the grid to the touch panels Other Aligns the grid to the specified spacing Enter the spacing for the grid in Horizontal and Vertical Style Select the grid style with Dot or Line Color Select the grid color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click this button to open the color palette Selec...

Page 91: ...tatus bar The Zoom dialog box is displayed 2 Specifying the zoom magnification 50 to 400 and click OK Customizing the status bar You can change the commands displayed on the status bar Right click the status bar and check only the commands you wish to display on the status bar The preview display and the actual screen displayed on the MICRO I may differ For example the image for overlay screens in...

Page 92: ... screens the path when selecting files and the path for automatic backups The settings configured here are saved even when you exit WindO I NV4 The procedure for configuring the work environment is shown below 1 Click and then click WindO I NV4 Options The WindO I NV4 Options dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as desired 4 Customizing WindO I NV4 ...

Page 93: ... Increment Address Number When copying or duplicating parts select this check box to add a specified value 999 to 999 to address number of the device address set for the original part before pasting it to the screen Enable Text Auto Resizing Select this box to automatically change the text size according to a change in part size Enable Input Method Editor IME when entering Device Address Select th...

Page 94: ... 76 Use HG1B Compatible functions Select this box to enable previous functions HG1B For details refer to Chapter 4 3 17 Compatible Tab on page 4 76 Verify that a string is invalid E mail format When setting the E mail address place a check mark in the check box to check the string format used for the E mail address The check target is as follows Sender E mail Address in the E mail tab on the Proje...

Page 95: ...efer to Project Recovery Dialog Box on page 2 40 Backup A backup copy of a project being edited is created as often as you want The file name of the backup is as follows Project Name_Backup Date pn4 Backup date format YYYYMMDDhhmmss YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Example Project Name is TEST01 at 4 56 07 on January 23 2016 TEST01_20160123045607 pn4 If the project file has no...

Page 96: ...low the ribbon select this check box Add Add a command to the Customizing the quick access toolbar list Remove Delete a command from the Customizing the quick access toolbar list Customize Quick Access Toolbar Shows the list of commands displayed on the quick access toolbar Reset Returns the settings of the quick access toolbar to their default To change the order of the commands drag and drop a c...

Page 97: ...f Automation Organizer is released the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box is displayed For details refer to Automation Organizer Updater Dialog Box on page 2 39 Go online Shows the IDEC web page for free updates manuals and online services About Shows the About WindO I NV4 dialog box and displays the version of WindO I NV4 In order to display the Automation Organizer Updater your computer mus...

Page 98: ... 350 400 Object List tab This tab changes the items displayed in the Object List window List Items Shows the list of items that can be displayed in the Object List window Add Adds an item to Display Items Select an item in List Items and click this button to add it to Display Items Delete Deletes an item from Display Items Select an item in Display Items and click this button Display Items Shows t...

Page 99: ...4 Customizing WindO I NV4 2 WindO I NV4 Features Basic Operations Parts List tab This tab changes the items displayed in the Part List window Show Image Name Select this box to display the image name for parts in the Part List window ...

Page 100: ...box Specifying a device address with the Tag Editor To display the Tag Editor click to the right of the text box for setting the device address Use this Tag Editor to set the device address The Tag Editor for the Allen Bradley and Emerson drivers is different from other drivers For details refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual Target Select the device that includes the device addre...

Page 101: ...cted file Export Displays the Export dialog box Select the location to save the file enter a file name and then click Save to save the tag names and comments of Address number list as a CSV file Cross Reference Shows the Cross Reference dialog box For details refer to Cross Reference Dialog Box on page 2 70 Refresh Updates the Use column on the Tag Editor Add New Tag Adds the Allen Bradley tag dat...

Page 102: ...l Cross Reference Dialog Box On the Tag Editor select the device address and then click Cross Reference to show the screen type screen number and part number where that device address is used Enter the device address in Device Address and click Reflesh to see the updated data ...

Page 103: ...of five items of data can be used To flip the bits in data select the Not check box Operator priority is the same as scripts For details refer to Chapter 20 6 3 About the Priority of the Operator on page 20 59 1 Click the Condition button to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box 2 Click Value or Device Address and enter a value or device address To flip the bits in data select the Not ...

Page 104: ...s greater than NO YES Less than Compares if is less than NO YES Bitwise operators Bitwise AND Calculates the logical product AND of each bit in and YES YES Bitwise OR Calculates the logical sum OR of each bit in and YES YES Bitwise XOR exclusive OR Calculates the exclusive logical sum XOR of each bit of and YES YES Bitwise NOT Flips the logic of each bits of For word device and fixed values 0 will...

Page 105: ...f adding the values of D11 D12 multiplied by two and D13 is equal to the value of D10 100 D 0 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 This expression cannot be configured in the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box because it has over 6 items of data The condition is satisfied if the result of adding the values of D0 through D7 is 100 or greater 1 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 This expression cannot be configured on the T...

Page 106: ...5 WindO I NV4 Common Operations and Settings 2 74 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 107: ...screens are updated with the latest data at all times When a button is pressed or a command is executed in the MICRO I screen the value is written to the external device address 1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device Chapter 3 Communication 1 Device Link Communication HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I 1234 External device Device Lin...

Page 108: ...ings step by step by clicking and then clicking New the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed For details refer to Chapter 4 Create new project data by using the interactive quick start on page 4 1 Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Communication Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box tab on the Project Settings dialog box For details refer to Chapter ...

Page 109: ...the Communication Interface tab For details refer to Chapter 4 3 5 O I Link Tab on page 4 53 2 O I Link Communication HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Read Write 5678 MICRO I O I Link Slave Slave 1 MICRO I O I Link Slave Slave 2 MICRO I O I Link Slave Slave 15 MICRO I O I Link Master External device 0 1 Read Write D1 M1 5678 O I Link Communication Device Link Communi...

Page 110: ...nterface The Event Transmission function from the MICRO I can be used with DM Link 1 1 Communication The Event Transmission function is a function that works as follows When value in the dedicated DM Link memory of the MICRO I is changed the data is transmitted from the MICRO I to the external device 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only 3 DM Link Communication HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V H...

Page 111: ...d Write Read Write Read Write DM Link 1 N Communication The Event Transmission function cannot be used with DM Link 1 N Communication HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Write Read DM Link Ethernet UDP Communication External Devices Computer PLC or board computer HUB MICRO I Delicated DM Link memory The Event Transmission function cannot be used with DM Link Ethernet UD...

Page 112: ...by clicking and then clicking New the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed For details refer to Chapter 4 Create new project data by using the interactive quick start on page 4 1 Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Communication Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box For details refer to Chapter 4 Changing Communication Drivers on page 4 21 Select IDEC...

Page 113: ...ting new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step by clicking and then clicking New the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed For details refer to Chapter 4 Create new project data by using the interactive quick start on page 4 1 Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Communication Driver tab on the Project Settings d...

Page 114: ...2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I Data reception Data transmission User communication External device Device Link Communicaton When the serial interface connecting external devices is RS485 a maximum of 31 external devices can be connected However carefully check the specifications including the command settings and error processing and verify whether or not multiple external devices is...

Page 115: ...e Command 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Communication Interface tab on the Project Settings dialog box 3 Select the interface for user communication under Interface Configuration and then select the user communication in Function under Interface Settings HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG...

Page 116: ...1G 1P 1 For details refer to Chapter 4 When SERIAL1 RS232C SERIAL1 RS422 485 COM RS232C or COM RS422 485 is selected under Interface Configuration on page 4 39 Ethernet Interface For details refer to Chapter 4 When Protocol1 to Protocol7 is selected for Ethernet under Interface Configuration on page 4 42 USB Interface For details refer to Chapter 4 When USB2 USB A is selected under Interface Confi...

Page 117: ...l be set in Protocol Name The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters 7 Set the time out 0 to 255 in Receiving Character Time Out x100 msec For details on the Receiving Character Time Out x100 msec refer to Receiving Character Time Out x100 msec on page 3 32 You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name ...

Page 118: ...nual 8 Set Transmission TXD command Click Add under Command List The Command Settings dialog box is displayed 9 Select TXD in Type Specify the transmitted data to the external device connected to the MICRO I and the conditions for transmitting data ...

Page 119: ... Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expressions configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Fixed Period Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval Set the time interval between data transmissions as 1 to 3600 seconds in Period sec 11 Specify the bit ...

Page 120: ...ta List The Data Settings dialog box is displayed 16 Select data type in Type Data setting items are displayed For details on transmission command refer to Transmission TXD Command on page 3 49 17 Set the data and then click OK The data configured in Data List on the Command Settings dialog box is displayed ...

Page 121: ...nsmission command configured in Command List and Data List on Project Settings dialog box is displayed The data is displayed in Data List in the order they were set To change the order of data select data and then click Up or Down to shift it Click Expand Data List to hide Type Trigger Condition and Detail the number of the data displayed in Data List will increase ...

Page 122: ... WindO I NV4 User s Manual 20 Specify Receive RXD command Click Add under Command List The Command Settings dialog box is displayed 21 Select RXD in Type Define the data configuration for received data from the external device ...

Page 123: ...the type of data handled by the conditional expression in Data Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expressions configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 23 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for report...

Page 124: ...ata List The Data Settings dialog box is displayed 27 Select data type in Type Data setting items are displayed For details on receive command refer to Receive RXD Command on page 3 62 28 Specify the data and then click OK The data configured in Data List on the Command Settings dialog box is displayed ...

Page 125: ...t on Project Settings dialog box is displayed To add a transmission command repeat steps 8 through 19 To add a receive command repeat steps 20 through 29 The data are displayed in Data List in the order they were set To change the order of data select data and then click Up or Down to shift it Click Expand Data List to hide Type Trigger Condition and Detail the number of the data displayed in Data...

Page 126: ...r communication to use Transmission TXD and Receive RXD commands To set the created user communication protocol to another user communication or to use it in another project click Copy to Protocol Manager to register it in Protocol Manager For details on the Protocol Manager refer to 5 3 Protocol Manager on page 3 32 ...

Page 127: ...alog box is displayed 2 Click the Communication Interface Tab in the Project Settings dialog box 3 Select the interface for user communication under Interface Configuration and then select the User Communication 1 1 in Function under Interface Settings 1 Inching function can be configured only for User Communication 1 HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P ...

Page 128: ...net Interface 2 For details refer to Chapter 4 When Protocol1 to Protocol7 is selected for Ethernet under Interface Configuration on page 4 42 5 Click the User Communication tab 6 Enter the name of the user communication protocol that will be set in Protocol Name The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters 1 This is applicable for models with a serial interface RS422 485 only 2 This is a...

Page 129: ...ching check box 10 Configure the transmission command for the Inching Function Click Add under Command List The Command Settings dialog box is displayed The items displayed in Command List can be changed with the TXD RXD and Inching check boxes Commands in Command List are displayed in the order they were created but commands for inching function are always displayed above the transmission and rec...

Page 130: ...he conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in Data Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expressions configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 14 Specify the bit device ...

Page 131: ...ion in Comment under Detail The maximum number is 40 characters 17 Set the command data for the inching function Click Add under Data List The Data Settings dialog box is displayed 18 Select data type in Type Data setting items are displayed For details on transmission command refer to Transmission TXD Command on page 3 49 ...

Page 132: ...dialog box is displayed To add a command for inching function repeat steps 10 through 20 To add a transmission command repeat steps 8 through 19 of Using Transmission Command and Receive Command To add a receive command repeat steps 20 through 29 of Using Transmission Command and Receive Command The data are displayed in Data List in the order they were set To change the order of data select data ...

Page 133: ...OK This concludes configuring user communication To set the created user communication protocol to another user communication or to use it in another project click Copy to Protocol Manager to register it in Protocol Manager For details on the Protocol Manager refer to 5 3 Protocol Manager on page 3 32 ...

Page 134: ...ther user communication 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 In the User Communication tab on the Project Settings dialog box select the user communication to set from the protocol list and then click Open Protocol Manager Protocol Manager is displayed 3 Select a user communication protocol in Protocol List and click OK P...

Page 135: ...I NV4 User s Manual 3 29 5 User Communication 3 Communication The user communication protocol selected in Protocol Manager is configured to the user communication specified on the Project Settings dialog box ...

Page 136: ...nd then import it to a project Saving registered user communication protocol as a file 1 On the Configuration tab in the Manager group click Protocol Manager Protocol Manager is displayed 2 Select the user communication protocol in Protocol List and then click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the save location and then click Save The name of the saved file will be the name of t...

Page 137: ...er group click Protocol Manager Protocol Manager is displayed 2 On Protocol Manager click Import The Open dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the user communication protocol file and then click Open The user communication protocol is registered in Protocol Manager The name of the user communication protocol file is set as the name of the protocol ...

Page 138: ... monitored These setting items are used only with receive command Example The received data 1 frame is 2 bytes While ON is selected as Trigger Type in Trigger Condition and LM100 is set to Device Address LM101 is set to Completed Device Address and LDR110 is set to Status Device Address The data of second byte starts to be received before exceeding the Receiving Character Time Out duration after t...

Page 139: ...Out duration First byte of receive data Second byte of receive data Value of Receiving Character Time Out address number 0 bit 15 of Status Device Address LDR110 Value of Completed Device Address LM101 Receive command 1 0 1 0 1 0 Receiving Character Time Out duration First byte of receive data Second byte of receive data Value of Device Address LM100 when Trigger Condition is While ON Inching refe...

Page 140: ...ll displays the Command Settings dialog box Type Shows the type of command Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Key Shows the function keys F1 to F12 assigned to the command Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box This option is only displayed when the Inching check box is selected Trigger Type Shows the trigger type for data transmission or b...

Page 141: ...e selected command downward in the list Delete Deletes the selected command from the Command List Adding copying and shifting up and down happen within the range of the same type of command There are two types of commands TXD RXD and Inching No Displays the number for managing the data Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box For details refer to Data Settings Dialog Box on p...

Page 142: ...5 User Communication 3 36 WindO I NV4 User s Manual Command Settings Dialog Box Specify the command details for user communication protocol ...

Page 143: ...ondition device address LM100 changes to 1 data can be received ready to receive by user communication so when data is transmitted from the external device the MICRO I starts to receive the data When data receiving is successfully completed the value of the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 1 Transmission data Transmission 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 4 34h External device MICRO I Value of Device Add...

Page 144: ...unction Key F7 is pressed data is transmitted by user communication from the MICRO I to the external device When data transmission is successfully completed the value of the Completed Device Address LM301 changes to 1 Data of Inching function Transmission SOH 01h CR 0Dh 1 31h SOH 01h 0 30h 2 32h K 4Bh HG1P External device Driving part MICRO I Condition for While satisfying the condition in Trigger...

Page 145: ...ling edge is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expressions configuration procedure re...

Page 146: ...procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Function Key Select the function key F1 to F12 assigned to the command Trigger Type A condition for data transmission is selected from the following Always Enabled Data is always transmitted at a configured execution interval while a function key is pressed While satisfying the condition Data is transmitted at a configur...

Page 147: ...When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON Device Address is LM100 and Completed Device Address is LM101 When the Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically check box is not selected When data receiving is successfully completed the value of the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 1 When the first data of the next frame is received the value of the Completed Device Address LM10...

Page 148: ...tion and Calculation End Position settings and the transmission data 1 2 Reserved 3 Registering Constant Data Error When data type is Registering Constant Character or Registering Constant Hexadecimal the value of the Index Device Address does not match the Index No of the registered Registering Constant Change the data stored in the Index Device Address 4 Reserved 5 Use Reference Device Data Erro...

Page 149: ...of the Registering Constant data Check the transmission data from the external device 4 Device Data Conversion Error When data type is Device Address and Conversion Type is ASCII to Hexadecimal a code other than 0 to 9 or A to F receives as data When data type is Device Address and Conversion Type is ASCII to Decimal a code other than 0 to 9 receives as data Or the converted data exceeds 65535 Che...

Page 150: ...le When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is Rising edge and Device Address is LM100 Receiving Time Out x100 msec Set the time out 0 to 255 from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when 1 frame of data has been received A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command If the Receiving Character Time Out is set to 0 it is not monitored This can be configured only wh...

Page 151: ...tisfied the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device Address LDR110 address number 0 bit 14 changes to 1 Comment Enter a comment for a command The maximum number is 40 characters Receive command Value of Device Address LM100 when Trigger Condition is While ON 1 0 1 0 Value of Completed Device Address LM101 1 0 Receive data 1 frame Receiving Time Out duration Receive data 1 frame Value ...

Page 152: ...as follows HEX A When Hexadecimal to ASCII is selected DEC A When Decimal to ASCII is selected N When No conversion is selected Variable When the Variable check box is selected variables are displayed as follows V00 When NULL 00h is selected for transmission command V Device Address When Device Address is selected for transmission command V In the case of receive command Words Displays the number ...

Page 153: ...sion Type Display the conversion methods for values of device addresses as follows HEX A When Hexadecimal to ASCII is selected N When No conversion is selected Number of bytes Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or received data Example BCC 2 1 XOR N 2 Skip Displays the specified data enclosed in Skip Skip Number of bytes Example Skip 2 Add Adds a data to Data List Click this button di...

Page 154: ...ecimal Device Address Registering Constant Character Registering Constant Hexadecimal BCC Skip Skip can only be configured when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box Setting item varies based on the selection in Type on the Command Settings dialog box When TXD or Inching is selected refer to Transmission TXD Command on page 3 49 When RXD is selected refer to Receive RXD Comman...

Page 155: ...racter is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box Data Enter character data to be transmitted 1 to 1 500 bytes The size of a single byte character is one byte and that of a double byte character is two bytes Example Constant Character for transmission command data When the trigger condition is satisfied the character data is transmitted in the following order Item Setting Data 1234 123...

Page 156: ... is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box and Constant Hexadecimal is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box Data Enter hexadecimal data to be transmitted 1 to 1 500 bytes Example Constant Hexadecimal for transmission command data When the trigger condition is satisfied 1234h is transmitted in the order 12h and 34h Item Setting Data 1234 1234h No conversion 12h Transmiss...

Page 157: ...ress You can only specify an internal device For details refer to Chapter 2 Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings on page 2 5 Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Storage Method of data Select the handling method for the value of read device address This can be configured only when No conversi...

Page 158: ...a word device to which a number of bytes is applied for transmitted data Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 When the value of device address exceeds Number of bytes x Words or when it is negative the Device Data Variable Specification Error address number 0 bit 6 of the Status Device Address cha...

Page 159: ...onversion Type Decimal to ASCII Device Address LDR100 Use Reference Device Address OFF Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable OFF Item Setting Conversion Type No conversion Device Address LDR100 Use Reference Device Address OFF Storage Method of data from Upper byte Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable ON NULL 00h 1234h LDR100 5678h LDR101 Hexadecimal to ASCII 1 31h Value of Device Address 4 34h 5 35h 2...

Page 160: ...rage Method of data from Lower byte Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable ON Device Address LDR200 Item Setting Conversion Type No conversion Device Address LDR100 Use Reference Device Address ON Device Address LDR200 Storage Method of data from Upper byte Words 2 Variable OFF LDR100 LDR101 No conversion Transmission data 34h 12h 78h Order of transmission 1234h 5678h 12h 34h 56h 78h Upper Lower Value...

Page 161: ...er is two bytes The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The setting...

Page 162: ...x No according to the value of device address is transmitted When the LDR100 value is 2 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 123 Index No 2 456 Index No 3 789 Index Device Address LDR100 123 1 456 2 789 3 Index Device Address LDR100 2 Data Index No Number of Registering Constants 3 Transmission data 4 34h 5 35h 6 36h Order of transmission ...

Page 163: ...ze or the same data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The settings at the insertion point shift down one line Set...

Page 164: ...ex No according to the value of device address is transmitted When the LDR100 value is 3 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 1234 Index No 2 5678 Index No 3 2537 Index Device Address LDR100 1234h 1 5678h 2 2537h 3 Index Device Address LDR100 3 Data Index No Number of Registering Constants 3 Transmission data 25h 37h Order of transmission ...

Page 165: ...he method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 1 2 3 4 5 6 Calculation Start Position Transmission data 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 5 4 3 2 1 0 Calculation End Position Transmission data XOR Calculates the data with exclusive logical add ADD Calculates the data using addition ...

Page 166: ...an exclusive OR XOR of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh 2 If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0 shift to the right by one bit If the bit is 1 shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value A001h 3 Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times 4 Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the data ...

Page 167: ... to the transmission data When Calculation Type is Modbus RTU CRC When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is appended to the transmission data 0 30h 4 34h 1 byte BCC data Second byte First byte Converted data 4 34h 0 30h 4 34h BCC data 0 30h 4 34h 2 bytes Converted data Second byte First byte B 42h A 41h B 42h A 41h BCC data 4241h Hexadecimal to ASCII Data...

Page 168: ...ingle byte character is one byte and that of a double byte character is two bytes Example Constant Character for receive command data When the trigger condition is satisfied the received data is compared with the following data When a Constant Character is set at the beginning of a command the first one byte is recognized as the start code When a Constant Character is set at the end of a command t...

Page 169: ... box Data Enter hexadecimal data designated to be received 1 to 1 500 bytes Example Constant Hexadecimal for receive command data When the trigger condition is satisfied the received data is compared with the following data When a Constant Character is set at the beginning of a command the first one byte is recognized as the start code When a Constant Character is set at the end of a command the l...

Page 170: ...and specify a device address You can only specify an internal device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Storage Method of data Select the handling method for received data This can be configured only when No conversion is selected under Conversion Type Number of bytes Specify the received data s...

Page 171: ...d data Insufficient by 1 word 0 is stored When the Variable check box is selected observe the following points When data is set expect for the end of a command set Constant Character data or Constant Hexadecimal data following Device Address data When there is no data stored in the device address all of the values of device addresses specified under Words will be 0 The maximum amount of the receiv...

Page 172: ...DR100 Use Reference Device Address OFF Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable OFF Item Setting Conversion Type No conversion Device Address LDR100 Use Reference Device Address OFF Storage Method of data from Upper byte Number of bytes 1 Words 3 Variable ON 0012h LDR100 0034h LDR101 ASCII to Hexadecimal 2 32h Value of Device Address 1 31h 4 34h 3 33h Received data 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 4 34h Order of recep...

Page 173: ...OFF Storage Method of data from Lower byte Number of bytes 2 Words 3 Variable ON Item Setting Conversion Type ASCII to Hexadecimal Device Address LDR100 Use Reference Device Address OFF Number of bytes 1 Words 3 Variable ON 3231h LDR100 0033h LDR101 0000h LDR102 1 31h Value of Device Address 2 32h 3 33h NUL 00h 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h ETX 03h Order of reception Words 3 Received data Upper Lower from Low...

Page 174: ...ber of bytes 2 Words 3 Variable ON Item Setting Conversion Type No conversion Device Address LDR100 Use Reference Device Address ON Device Address LDR200 Storage Method of data from Upper byte Words 2 Variable OFF LDR100 LDR101 LDR102 2 32h Value of Device Address 1 31h 3 33h NUL 00h 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h ETX 03h Words 3 12 3 DEC DEC 0 ASCII to Decimal DEC 2 bytes Received data Constant Hexadecimal da...

Page 175: ...es The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The settings at the inse...

Page 176: ...ta and the value of the Index No 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device Address LDR100 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 123 Index No 2 456 Index No 3 789 Index Device Address LDR100 Received data Compare 4 34h 5 35h 6 36h Order of reception 2 LDR100 Value of the Index Device Address 123 1 456 2 789 3 Data Index No Number of Registering Const...

Page 177: ...e same data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line Settings cann...

Page 178: ...gistered data and the value of the Index No 2 Dec of the matching data is stored in Index Device Address LDR100 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 1234 Index No 2 5678 Index No 3 2537 Index Device Address LDR100 Received data Compare 25h 37h Order of reception 3 LDR100 Value of the Index Device Address 1234h 5678h 2537h 1 2 3 Data Index No Number of Reg...

Page 179: ...ess LDR100 of Device Address of the receive command data is 2 Dec the data is stored in the device address LDR202 which is offset by 2 The last 1 byte is taken as the terminal code Constant Hexadecimal data is not stored 0000h LDR200 0000h LDR201 3132h LDR202 Value of Device Address LDR100 2 CR 0Dh ...

Page 180: ... the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 1 2 3 4 5 6 Calculation Start Position Receive data 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 5 4 3 2 1 0 Calculation End Position Receive data XOR Calculates the data with exclusive logical add ADD Calculates the data using addition ADD 2 s Complement Calculates th...

Page 181: ...tes 2 1 Obtain an exclusive OR XOR of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh 2 If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0 shift to the right by one bit If the bit is 1 shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value A001h 3 Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times 4 Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 ...

Page 182: ...Hexadecimal to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes of data is used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data When the calculation type is Modbus RTU CRC When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data 0 30h 4 34h Comparison data 4 34h Bytes 1 Converted data Second byte First byte 0 30h 4 ...

Page 183: ...is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box Number of bytes Specify the number of bytes 1 to 249 of receive data to be ignored Example Skip for receive command data In the received four byte data 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 4 34h only the data for 3 33h and 4 34h is received and the two bytes of 1 31h and 2 32h are discarded Item Setting Number of bytes 2 Enabled data 4 34h 3 33h 2 bytes Ignored ...

Page 184: ...inal code When the terminal code is followed by BCC the data including the number of bytes of BCC is received Set Not set Set Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the maximum command length Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs Not set Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the length o...

Page 185: ...0 Registering Constant Hexadecimal Device Address Without Variable Command length Receive BCC 1 0 XOR N 1 BCC Command settings Start code None Terminal code None When trigger conditions are satisfied for two or more receive commands for which both start code and terminal code are set all commands are analyzed and processed for receive processing Since commands with and without errors may be mixed ...

Page 186: ...nsmission command 1 Write a value of 100 Dec to LDR100 of transmission command data Device Address 2 Change the trigger condition LM100 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission After the transmission wait duration five seconds the transmission data is sent The transmission data is as follows When data transmission is successfully completed the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 1 When the ...

Page 187: ...ssfully completed the Completed Device Address LM102 changes to 1 When the value of each bit of address 0 of Status Device Address LDR130 is 0 reception is completed without an error Item Setting Type RXD Trigger Condition While ON Device Address LM101 Completed Device Address LM102 Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically No Status Device Address LDR130 Receiving Time Out 0 No Receive Tim...

Page 188: ...data 3 Change the value of the trigger condition LM200 from 0 to 1 to send the command The transmission data is as follows When data transmission is successfully completed the Completed Device Address LM201 changes to 1 When the value of each bit of address number 0 for Status Device Address LDR220 is 0 transmission is completed without an error Item Setting Protocol Name Sample 2 Receiving Charac...

Page 189: ...LM202 Completed Device Address LM203 Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically No Status Device Address LDR260 Receiving Time Out 0 No Receive Time Out Comment RXD command Command Data Settings dialog box settings Constant Hexadecimal 02 Registering Constant Character 10 AB 20 CD Index Device Address LDR230 Skip 2 bytes Device Address Conversion Type No conversion from Upper byte Number of ...

Page 190: ...e 3032h there is a match since the BCC part data is 3032h When there is no match the BCC Error address number 0 bit 0 of Status Device Address changes to 1 When data reception is successfully completed the Completed Device Address LM203 changes to 1 When the value of each bit of address number 0 for Status Device Address LDR250 is 0 transmission is completed without an error 0002h Hexadecimal to A...

Page 191: ...ransmission is successfully completed the Completed Device Address LM301 changes to 1 When the value of each bit of address number 0 for Status Device Address LDR330 is 0 transmission is completed without an error Item Setting Protocol Name Sample 3 Receiving Character Time Out Cannot be configured Inching Function Enable Execution Interval 10 x10 msec Item Setting Type Inching Function Key F7 Tri...

Page 192: ...evice RS232C 1 SD Pin No Name 2 RD 3 RS 4 CS 5 SG FG Pin No Name RD SD SG Shield Wire HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 5T HG1G Terminal External Device RS232C Cover FG Pin No Name 1 RDB RD 6 SDA SD 4 SDB SD 9 Pin No Name SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 5 SG RDA RD Shield Wire HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F Connector External Device RS422 485 8 RDA RD Pin No Name 9 RDB RD 6 SDA SD 7 SDB SD 5 SG FG Pin No Name S...

Page 193: ... drivers 6 Sub Host Communication HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Read Write 5678 External device 0 1 D1 M1 5678 MICRO I Sub Host Communication Numerical Display Display Device Address LLR0 Bit Button Destination Device Address LLR1 1 5678 LLR0 LLR1 HMI Link Register Allocates M1 Allocates D1 External Device Address Protocol Communication Driver MICROSmart Manufactu...

Page 194: ...ication 1 COM2 Sub Host Communication Item Settings Protocol MICROSmart Allocate Device Address HMI Link Register LLR LLR0 0 D0100 LLR1 0 M0002 LLR2 1 D100 1 LLR3 2 D101 Display Device Address for Numerical Display LLR0 Destination Device Address for Numerical Input LLR3 Destination Device Address for Bit Button LLR1 Trigger Device Address for Pilot Lamp LLR2 2222 1234 External device External dev...

Page 195: ...up click Project The Project Settings dialog box appears 2 Click the Communication Interface tab 3 Select the interface for Sub Host Communication under Interface Configuration and then select the Sub Host Communication in Function under Interface Settings The Sub Host Communication tab is displayed 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only 2 HG1G 1P only 3 HG2G 5T only Serial Interface COM1 1 COM2 1...

Page 196: ...elected under Interface Configuration on page 4 38 HG2G 5T HG1G 1P 1 For details refer to Chapter 4 When SERIAL1 RS232C SERIAL1 RS422 485 COM RS232C or COM RS422 485 is selected under Interface Configuration on page 4 39 5 Click the Sub Host Communication tab 6 Selects the protocol as MICROSmart or Modbus RTU Master in the Protocol 1 This is applicable for models with a serial interface RS422 485 ...

Page 197: ... 7 Allocate the external device addresses to the HMI Link Registers LLR used with Address Number in Settings For details refer to Chapter 4 3 7 Sub Host Communication Tab on page 4 58 8 Click OK This concludes configuring Sub Host Communication for communication interfaces ...

Page 198: ...number of the device addresses configured with the Monitor the error information of each Slave Number check box is also cleared 2 Finish 1st reading This bit changes to 1 after all device addresses allocated to HMI Link Registers LLR are read 3 Reserved 4 Current Error This bit changes to 1 while a communication error occurs in any device address allocated to HMI Link Registers LLR The bit changes...

Page 199: ... When this bit is 1 MICRO I connects with each external device When this bit is 0 MICRO I does not connect the external device Default value is 1 when the device addresses of the relevant slave number are registered to HMI Link Registers LLR 1 Reserved 2 Finish 1st reading This bit changes to 1 after all device addresses allocated to HMI Link Registers LLR of the relevant slave number are read 3 R...

Page 200: ...ghting security and fire protection systems were connected using methods unique to the building equipment and systems manufacturers However conforming to BACnet allows equipment and systems to be connected and monitored using a common method A device connected by BACnet and a device compatible with BACnet IP is called a BACnet device 7 BACnet Communication HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V ...

Page 201: ...og Output Object Analog Value Object Binary Input Object Binary Output Object Binary Value Object Number of Objects 256 maximum 1 BIBBs DS RP B DS WP B DS RPM B DS WPM B DS COV B DS COVU B DM DDB B DM DOB B DM DCC B BBMD None BBMD Device Virtual Device Not supported Foreign Device Supported Subscribed COV Function Number of Requests That Can Be Accepted 256 requests maximum Unsubscribed COV Functi...

Page 202: ...vices Services are interfaces used to exchange information between BACnet devices Services are classified into the client side that initiates services and the server side that executes services The Services supported by BACnet IP in the MICRO I are as follows 1 The MICRO I initiates services for other BACnet devices 2 The MICRO I executes services that are initiated from other BACnet devices Objec...

Page 203: ...operty B ReadProperty DS WP B Data Sharing Write Property B ReadPropertyMultiple DS RPM B Data Sharing Read Property Multiple B WriteProperty DS WPM B Data Sharing Write Property Multiple B WritePropertyMultiple DS COV B Data Sharing COV B SubscribeCOV ConfirmedCOVNotification UnconfirmedCOVNotification DS COVU B Data Sharing COV Unsubscribed B UnconfirmedCOVNotification Device Network Management ...

Page 204: ...with WindO I NV4 MICRO I starts running Device addresses Physical I Os BACnet device Analog Input object Present_Value 10 0 Analog Output object Present_Value 20 0 XXXX object YYYY object D0000 1000 Coefficient 0 01 External analog input 10 V Mutually reflected External analog output 20 mA D0004 1000 Coefficient 0 02 CH0 10 V CH2 20 mA MICRO I Analog I O module Read property Write property The pro...

Page 205: ...est from a BACnet device This function is implemented using DS WP B Data Sharing Write Property B and DS WPM B Data Sharing Read Property Multiple B The below diagram shows a BACnet device changing the analog output value of the MICRO I that has been associated with the Analog Output object BACnet objects BACnet device Device addresses Physical input Analog Input object Present_Value 10 0 D0000 10...

Page 206: ...cation may not be provided for changes in values that are faster than the synchronization cycle of objects and device addresses AI 10 Properties Value Present_Value 10 0 COV_Increment 3 0 BACnet device MICRO I Report request COV notification transmission To report requester Present_Value of AI 10 has changed to 15 0 COV notification transmission Present_Value of AI 10 has changed to 18 5 Present_V...

Page 207: ...ion ConfirmedCOVNotification Without confirmation UnconfirmedCOVNotification Lifetime The time to enable the COV function in 1 sec increments If 0 or omitted the COV function is enabled with no time limit Report Request Parameters Description Monitored Object Identifier Analog Input object instant number 10 Issue Confirmed Notifications With confirmation ConfirmedCOVNotification Lifetime 360 sec B...

Page 208: ...lags have changed Binary Input Binary Output Binary Value Present_Value Status_Flags Notification of change is provided when 1 or 2 as follows 1 When Present_Value has changed 2 When any of the bits in Status_Flags have changed AI 10 Properties Value Present_Value 10 0 COV_Increment 3 0 Status_Flags BACnet device 2 BACnet device 1 MICRO I Unsubscribed COV frequency Present_Value of AI 10 is 10 0 S...

Page 209: ... Foreign Device function is used for performing broadcast communications with BACnet devices on different IP subnets even when there is no BBMD on the IP subnet of the MICRO I Broadcast communications can be performed with a BACnet device on the BACnet IP network by registering the MICRO I as a foreign device for a specified BBMD BBMD Bridge Internet IP subnet 1 BACnet IP network BBMD Bridge BACne...

Page 210: ...h properties are changed they operate with the values after the change BACnet IP Properties with Allocated Device Addresses and the Values of Those Device Addresses Enabled Bound Disabled Not bound When the status of the BACnet communication is stopped by error the value of HMI Special Data Registers LSD260 3 is 1 and restarts the BACnet communication set 0 to the value of HMI Special Internal Rel...

Page 211: ...g BACnet IP 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Click the BACnet IP Settings tab select the Use BACnet IP check box and click Settings The BACnet Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Configures a basic settings of BACnet IP For details refer to BACnet IP Settings on page 3 108 ...

Page 212: ...indO I NV4 User s Manual 4 Adds a new object Click New The New Object dialog box is displayed 5 Select the object type of the object to register and assign it an instance number 6 Click OK The new object is added to the object list ...

Page 213: ...ed object ID in the object list The properties are displayed 8 Configure the properties For details refer to Object List on page 3 110 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 to set all the objects 10 click OK This concludes configuring BACnet IP The maximum number of objects that can be registered is 256 ...

Page 214: ...ers starting from the specified data register Port Number Configures the port number for performing BACnet Communication Configures the port number in the range from 0 to 65 535 Fixed Value Use a constant value Default 47808 Data Register Uses a value of device address Turn ON BACnet Communication bit LSM70 automatically Configures whether or not to set 1 to the HMI Special Internal Relay LSM70 BA...

Page 215: ...on the MICRO I registers itself as a Foreign Device on the configure BBMD BBMD IP Address To join a BACnet IP network when there is no BBMD on the IP subnet of the MICRO I configures the IP address of the BBMD on the other IP subnet Fixed Value Use a constant value Data Register Uses a value of device address This option uses 4 words of address numbers starting from the specified data register Exa...

Page 216: ...e current settings as default Saves the settings of the properties as the default values of the object Property settings Enable When the value of the HMI Special Internal Relay LSM70 BACnet Communication Bit is 1 the COVU function is always enabled and the Unconfirmed COV Notification service is sent Disable The COVU function is always disabled and the Unconfirmed COV Notification service is not s...

Page 217: ...do not have the same instance number Delete Deletes the object under the node selected in the object list Export Exports the settings of the following objects as a CSV file Analog Input Analog Output Analog Value Binary Input Binary Output Binary Value Import Imports a CSV file that was export and automatically creates objects Objects cannot be imported if the format of the CSV file is invalid or ...

Page 218: ...fixed values and device addresses for Present_Value of the Analog Input object Device Control Selects whether to set a fixed value for Present_Value or to allocate device addresses Configures a fixed value to Present_Value Select Disable in the Device Control of Present_Value enter a constant value for Initial Value Enable Specifies the Present_Value as a constant Disable Specifies the Present_Val...

Page 219: ...136 Coefficient Configures Present_Value as the product of the value stored in the device address multiplied by the coefficient Present_Value Value stored in the device address Coefficient Example The coefficient is multiplied as a Float32 F value The conversion order is as follows Device Addresses Present_Value 1 The value of the device addresses is converted to a Float32 F value 2 The coefficien...

Page 220: ...nual Analog Output Object Use these settings to configure devices for Present_Value of the Analog Output object Device Control Device Control of Present_Value is Enable A constant value cannot be configured for Present_Value of the Analog Output object ...

Page 221: ...plied by 1 coefficient multiplied is stored in the device addresses Value of device addresses Present_Value 1 coefficient Example The coefficient is multiplied as a Float32 F value The conversion order is as follows Present_Value Device Addresses 1 Present_Value is multiplied by 1 coefficient 2 The data type of the result of 1 Float32 F is converted Device for Present_Value Conversion type Storage...

Page 222: ...l Analog Value Object Use these settings to configure device addresses for Present_Value of the Analog Value object Device Control Device Control of Present_Value is Enable A constant value cannot be configured for Present_Value of the Analog Value object ...

Page 223: ...s out of range nothing is executed even when the value of Device for write trigger changes from 0 to 1 Device for Present_Value Conversion type Storage Destination Present_Value for reading UBIN16 W BIN16 I The address number of Top Device Address 0 UBIN32 D BIN32 L Float32 F The address number of Top Device Address 0 The address number of Top Device Address 1 Present_Value for writing UBIN16 W BI...

Page 224: ...ce addresses allocated as Present_Value for writing by the coefficient is set as Present_Value Present_Value Present_Value for writing Coefficient The coefficient is multiplied as a float type value The conversion order is as follows Present_Value Device Addresses 1 Present_Value is multiplied by 1 coefficient 2 The data type of the result of 1 Float32 F is converted Device Addresses Present_Value...

Page 225: ... Binary Input object Device Control Selects whether to set a fixed value for Present_Value or to allocate device addresses Configures a fixed value to Present_Value Select Disable in the Device Control of Present_Value and then select INACTIVE or ACTIVE for Initial Value Enable Specifies the Present_Value as a constant Disable Specifies the Present_Value as a value of word device ...

Page 226: ...alue Select Enable in the Device Control of Present_Value and then click a button displayed in Device to display the Present_Value Settings dialog box Configure the parameters in the Present_Value Settings dialog box Device for Present_Value Configures the device address to store Present_Value ...

Page 227: ...ue of the Binary Output object Device Control Device Control of Present_Value is Enable A constant value cannot be configured for Present_Value of the Binary Output object Allocate device addresses to Present_Value Configure the parameters in the Present_Value Settings dialog box Device for Present_Value Configures the device address to store Present_Value ...

Page 228: ...l Binary Value Object Use these settings to configure device addresses for Present_Value of the Binary Value object Device Control Device Control of Present_Value is Enable A constant value cannot be configured for Present_Value of the Binary Value object ...

Page 229: ...ddress 2 continuous words of address number are used 1 Specify the priority between 1 and 16 If the priority is out of range If the value of Device for write trigger changes from 0 to 1 then nothing is executed Device for Present_Value Storage Destination Present_Value for reading The address number of Top Device Address 0 Present_Value for writing The address number of Top Device Address 1 Specif...

Page 230: ...1 The BACnet device reads the analog input value of the Analog Input object 2 The BACnet device writes the analog output value of the Analog Output object BACnet objects BACnet client Initial values of properties Set with WindO I NV4 MICRO I starts running Data Sharing Read Property Data Sharing Read Property Multiple Data Sharing Write Property Data Sharing Write Property Multiple Device addresse...

Page 231: ...er R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Object_Name Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Object_Type BACnetObjectType R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Present_Value Real number R W Refer to Present_Value on page 3 132 Description Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Device_Type Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Status_Flags BACnetStat...

Page 232: ...ter string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Object_Type BACnetObjectType R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Present_Value Real number R R Refer to Present_Value on page 3 132 Description Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Device_Type Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Status_Flags BACnetStatus_Flags R R Refer to Status_Flags on page 3 145 Event_Sta...

Page 233: ...etObjectType R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Present_Value Real number R R Refer to Present_Value on page 3 132 Description Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Status_Flags BACnetStatus_Flags R R Refer to Status_Flags on page 3 145 Event_State BACnetEventState R Normal fixed Reliability BACnetReliability R R W Indicates whether or not Present_Value is reliable Out_Of_Servi...

Page 234: ...fixed value with WindO I NV4 Object_Name Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Object_Type BACnetObjectType R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Present_Value BACnetBinaryPV R W Refer to Present_Value on page 3 132 Description Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Device_Type Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Status_Flags BACnetStatus_Flags...

Page 235: ... value with WindO I NV4 Object_Type BACnetObjectType R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Present_Value BACnetBinaryPV R R Refer to Present_Value on page 3 132 Description Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Device_Type Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Status_Flags BACnetStatus_Flags R R Refer to Status_Flags on page 3 145 Event_State BACnetEventState R N...

Page 236: ...ject_Name Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Object_Type BACnetObjectType R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Present_Value BACnetBinaryPV R R Refer to Present_Value on page 3 132 Description Character string 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Status_Flags BACnetStatus_Flags R R Refer to Status_Flags on page 3 145 Event_State BACnetEventState R Normal fixed Reliability BA...

Page 237: ...tring 1 R Set a fixed value with WindO I NV4 Location Character string 1 R W Set the initial value with WindO I NV4 Description Character string 1 R W Set the initial value with WindO I NV4 Protocol_Version Unsigned integer R Cannot be edited with WindO I NV4 Protocol_Revision Unsigned integer R Cannot be edited with WindO I NV4 Protocol_Services_Supported BACnetServicesSupported R Cannot be edite...

Page 238: ...n which write instructions are ranked and the value of Present_Value is determined In this case values cannot be directly written to Present_Value To write a value to Present_Value the value is first stored in Priority_Array Present_Value Settings on page 3 112 at the index number indicated by Priority Priority_Array on page 3 145 Then the value stored in Priority_Array with the smallest index num...

Page 239: ...Value Write value Present_Value to be written from the BACnet device 1 When bit 15 of Device for priority is 0 and the value of Device for write trigger changes from 0 to 1 writes the value of Present_Value for writing to the Priority_Array at the index number stored in the bit 4 to 0 of Device for priority 2 Device for write trigger is automatically reset to 0 3 The value stored in Priority_Array...

Page 240: ... of Priority_Array at the index number is used as Present_Value until it is reset to NULL 00h If all values stored in Priority_Array are NULL 00h Relinquish_Default on page 3 145 is used as Present_Value 1 If the value of the Device for priority D0010 is 1 when the value of the Device for write trigger D0011 is 1 writes the value 15 0 of the Present_Value for writing D0002 to the element 1 of Prio...

Page 241: ... for write trigger 1 The BACnet device writes the write value 20 0 to Priority_Array at the index number indicated by the specified priority 3 2 Priority_Array with the smallest index number out of all non NULL 00h values is element 3 20 0 so 20 0 is used as the value of Present_Value 3 Present_Value 20 0 is written to the Present_Value for reading D0000 BACnet objects Device addresses BACnet devi...

Page 242: ...ject and the BACnet device reads out the analog input value When writing the value of device addresses as Present_Value Present_Value changes in the following manner Data Type Value of Device Addresses Present_Value of BACnet Device UBIN16 W Value within range of each data type Value of Device Addresses BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L Float32 F 0 0 0 Denormalized number Value of Device Addresses Normaliz...

Page 243: ...Present_Value The data type of Present_Value is set in Conversion type on page 3 115 of the Analog Output Object BACnet objects BACnet device Device addresses Physical output Analog Output object Present_Value 20 0 Priority_Array D0000 1000 Coefficient 0 02 External analog output 20 mA Reflected CH0 20 mA Write value 20 0 Priority 2 MICRO I Digital output module Write from BACnet device Read out t...

Page 244: ... the Present_Value for reading D0002 is the Present_Value for writing D0010 is the Device for priority and D0011 is the Device for write trigger Writing the Value of a Device Address to Present_Value 1 When the value of the Device for write trigger D0011 is 1 writes the value of the Present_Value for writing D0002 to the Priority_Array at the index number stored in the Device for priority D0010 2 ...

Page 245: ...Value for reading D0000 BACnet objects Device addresses BACnet device Analog Value object Present_Value 26 5 D0000 26 5 D0002 XXXX D0010 XXXX D0011 XXXX Reflected Write value 26 5 Priority 1 MICRO I Priority_Array 26 5 1 NULL 00h 2 27 0 3 16 1 2 3 Present_Value for reading Present_Value for writing Device for priority Device for write trigger Element 1 26 5 of Priority_Array is used as the value o...

Page 246: ...range of 0 to 65 535 Present_Value Value outside range of 0 to 65 535 0 BIN16 I Value within range of 32 768 to 32 767 Present_Value Value outside range of 32768 to 32 767 0 UBIN32 D Value within range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 Present_Value Value outside range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 0 BIN32 L Value within range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Present_Value Value outside range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 1...

Page 247: ... object and the BACnet device reads out the state of the external input The following table shows Present_Value Polarity and the physical state of the input Present_Value Polarity Physical State of Input INACTIVE NORMAL OFF or INACTIVE ACTIVE NORMAL ON or ACTIVE INACTIVE REVERSE ON or ACTIVE ACTIVE REVERSE OFF or INACTIVE BACnet objects BACnet device Device addresses Physical input Binary Input ob...

Page 248: ...state of the external output The following table shows Present_Value Polarity and the physical state of the output Present_Value Polarity Physical State of Output INACTIVE NORMAL OFF or INACTIVE ACTIVE NORMAL ON or ACTIVE INACTIVE REVERSE ON or ACTIVE ACTIVE REVERSE OFF or INACTIVE BACnet objects BACnet device Device addresses Physical output Binary Output object Present_Value 0 Priority_Array Q00...

Page 249: ...riting D0010 is the Device for priority and D0011 is the Device for write trigger Writing the Value of a Device Address to Present_Value 1 When the value of the Device for write trigger D0011 is 1 writes the value of the Present_Value for writing M0001 to the Priority_Array at the index number stored in the Device for priority D0010 2 The value of the Device for write trigger D0011 is automaticall...

Page 250: ...ue for reading M0000 BACnet objects Device addresses BACnet device Binary Value object Present_Value 1 M0000 1 M0001 XXXX D0010 XXXX D0011 XXXX Reflected Write value 1 Priority 1 MICRO I Priority_Array 1 1 NULL 00h 2 0 3 16 1 2 3 Present_Value for reading Present_Value for writing Device for priority Device for write trigger Element 1 1 of Priority_Array is used as the value of Present_Value until...

Page 251: ...ult Relinquish_Default is the default value used as Present_Value when all values stored in Priority_Array are NULL 00h Polarity This property represents the relationship between the physical state of the input output and the logical state indicated by Present_Value in the Binary Input and Binary Output objects 1 Always FALSE on the MICRO I Status_Flags Value Logical Value Condition IN_ALARM 1 0 F...

Page 252: ... the physical input output are bound 1 TRUE Out of service Present_Value and the physical input output are unbound Out_Of_Service TRUE is used for simulations Definition Value Analog Input Analog Output Analog Value Binary Input Binary Output Binary Value no fault detected 0 YES YES YES YES YES YES no sensor 1 YES NO NO YES NO NO over range 2 YES NO YES NO NO NO under range 3 YES NO YES NO NO NO o...

Page 253: ...about the application such as the modification date of the created project data as a fixed string with WindO I NV4 Protocol_Services_Supported This property represents the types of services that are supported by the MICRO I Protocol_Object_Types_Supported This property represents the types of objects that are supported by the MICRO I Object_List This property represents the list of created objects...

Page 254: ...7 BACnet Communication 3 148 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 255: ...is chapter describes the various settings required to create a project 1 1 Creating New Project Data Create new project data by using the interactive quick start You can create project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step 1 Click then click New A Select Product Series dialog box is displayed Chapter 4 Project Settings 1 Creating and Manipulating WindO I NV...

Page 256: ...ype Number A list of model numbers associated with the selected MICRO I is displayed Select the model number to use Installation Select the MICRO I installation direction from the following options The supported display orientation varies based on the model HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F Horizontal Vertical Counter Clockwise Vertical Clockwise HG2G 5T HG1G Horizontal Vertical Counter Clockwise Ve...

Page 257: ...on of Device Address Format Select the format for the device address This option can only be configured when Allen Bradley is selected for Manufacturer This concludes creating project data Next you will create a screen For details refer to Chapter 5 3 1 Properties of Base Screen Dialog Box on page 5 14 Allen Bradley Enter device addresses in the Allen Bradley format Example B 10 123 5 WindO I NV4 ...

Page 258: ...ject data the Enter Password screen will be displayed The password to enter varies based on the check box setting of the Use Password to open a Project found under the Options tab in the Security dialog box When this check box is checked enter the password for Use Password to open a Project When this check box is unchecked enter the password for the user account assigned to the Administrator secur...

Page 259: ...t Data 4 Project Settings 1 3 Saving Project Data Saving project data You can save the project data being edited Click and then click Save When new project data is created and you have never save it the Save As dialog box is displayed Enter the project name and then click Save ...

Page 260: ...e the project data being edited with a different name 1 Click then click Save As The Save As dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the project name and click Save You cannot use the following characters in the project name You cannot create project data in read only folders or in WindO I NV4 s working folders temporary folders that start with ...

Page 261: ...lected the settings are displayed in Detailed Settings to the right 3 Select Output to and click Print Printer The data is printed on the printer connected to the computer The Windows Print dialog is displayed For details refer to Windows help Word Document The data is output to a Word file The Save As dialog box is displayed Specify the save location and file name and then click Save If the print...

Page 262: ...r the data log settings and those settings will be printed For details refer to Data Log Settings on page 4 12 Operation Log Settings Target Events to record in the operation log settings will be printed Recipe Settings Settings in the recipe settings will be printed Preventive Maintenance Settings Prints the Settings in the Preventive Maintenance E mail Settings Select the print target for the e ...

Page 263: ...ut to the Save As dialog box is displayed Specify the save location and file name and then click Save Global Script Settings in Global Script will be printed Script Manager Select the print target for the Script Manager and those settings will be printed For details refer to Script Manager on page 4 13 Text Manager Select the Text Messages List for the Text Group and those settings will be printed...

Page 264: ...elect the delivery date of the project data Control No Enter the control number of the project data The maximum length is 60 characters Version No Enter the version number The maximum length is 60 characters Company Enter the name of the company The maximum length is 60 characters on 2 lines Address Enter the address of the company The maximum length is 120 characters on 4 lines Department Enter t...

Page 265: ...ll not be printed Autorun The Enable USB Autorun and Open Popup Screen when USB Flash Drive is inserted settings will be printed Web Server All settings on the Web Server tab will be printed FTP Server All settings on the FTP Server tab will be printed Expansion Module All settings on the Expansion Module tab will be printed External Memory Device All settings on the External Memory Device tab wil...

Page 266: ...se the alarm function will not be printed Advanced Prints the Basic print content the Storage Method and the Monitoring Period on the General tab and the contents of the External Memory Device tab the Printing tab and the Options tab Basic Settings will be printed Channel numbers for which Log function is Disable will not be printed Advanced The Basic print content Channel Name and Condition of Wr...

Page 267: ...ttings will be printed Numbers for which E mail Function is Disable will not be printed Advanced Only content that differs from the default content will be printed for the Basic print content and E mail Function Trigger Condition and E mail content for each number Numbers for which E mail Function is Disable will not be printed Basic Prints the Script List Advanced Prints the Basic print content a...

Page 268: ...r s Manual Text Manager Print Content Please select the group numbers to print Select the check boxes of the Text Group to print the Text Message List Up to 6 groups can be printed at once Group No Displays the number of the Text Group Group Name Displays the Text Group Name ...

Page 269: ...the items of data that will be output when printing the object list Select the check boxes of the items to output Name Type Text ID Text Device Address Trigger Type Trigger Condition Trigger Type visible Trigger Condition visible State Changes the state of the parts for printing Select the state from the following items OFF ON ON OFF Both Invert white and black Select this to print the screen by i...

Page 270: ...his dialog box to set up the page layout such as the page size orientation and headers and footers Turn Headers and Footers On or Off Sets whether or not to print headers and footers when printing Each click of the button switches between show and hide View Full Width Use this button to display one page of the print at its full width in the print preview dialog box View Full Page Use this button t...

Page 271: ...w of the content that will be printed Current Page Indicates the current page number in Current Page Total Pages format You can also enter a page number to display it First Page Displays the first page Previous Page Displays the previous page Next Page Displays the next page Last Page Displays the last page Drag to adjust the margins ...

Page 272: ...e The Open dialog box is displayed 2 Select a file to compare with then click Open The Comparison Result window is displayed Comparison results are displayed using colored text Blue Complete match Red Different content Green Only saved in the open project Gray Only saved in the comparison project To compare with the comparison project data again click the arrow to the right of Compare from the Pro...

Page 273: ...es This section describes how to change the product series set in the project data being edited 1 Click Change Product Series on the status bar The Change Product Series dialog box is displayed 2 Select Product Series Model and Installation and then click OK The Save As dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the save location and file name and then click Save ...

Page 274: ... s Manual 4 When the data is finished being converted click Close Color settings color data are not converted If the Popup Screen size is larger than the Base Screen size after the Product Series is changed the Popup Screen size is changed to the same size as the Base Screen ...

Page 275: ...project data being edited 1 With Communication Driver on the status bar click one of External Device Communication 1 to External Device Communication 4 The Communication Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary 3 Click the Communication Driver Network tab change the settings as necessary and then click OK The confirmation message is ...

Page 276: ...dO I NV4 User s Manual 4 Check the message and click Yes If there are no device addresses that correspond to the external device addresses used in the current project data after changing the communication driver the items set with those device addresses are blank ...

Page 277: ...oject data being edited Click and then click Close If the project data being edited has not been saved a confirmation message for saving the project data is displayed Click Yes to save the project data and close it Click No to close the project data without saving changes Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data ...

Page 278: ...for the project overall This section describes the configuration procedure for project settings 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary 2 Project Settings Configuration Procedure HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P ...

Page 279: ...Specifies the time from when the MICRO I power is turned on until communications start with the external device 0 to 9999 seconds 3 Project Settings Dialog Box HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Default Screen Specifies the screen number of the base screen to display first when the MICRO I is turned on 0 t...

Page 280: ...acklight brightness is lowered Light ON with Screen Changing When the backlight is turned off or when the backlight brightness has been lowered with the backlight control function select this check box to turn on the backlight or restore the backlight brightness when the screen is switched This option can only be configured when the Auto OFF check box or the Halve the Brightness check is selected ...

Page 281: ...s screen as English or Japanese For details refer to Chapter 34 1 Maintenance Screen on page 34 1 Use System Area The System Area is an area of predetermined device addresses to control the screen and communicate error information and time information between the MICRO I and the external device Select this check box to use the System Area For details refer to System Area on page 4 30 Flashing Cycl...

Page 282: ... the project Storage Method of String Data Selects the handling method for text entered with the Character Input and values of device addresses read by the Message Display Device Address Specifies the word device to write the value Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Time sec Specifies the interv...

Page 283: ...x to display the Password Screen at a large size 3 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only from Upper word Values of internal devices are read from and written to the upper order word Example When Data Type for the Numerical Input is UBIN32 D and the numerical value 12345678 Hex was entered and written to destination device address LDR100 from Lower word Values of internal devices are read from and w...

Page 284: ...108 LDR109 LDR110 LDR111 System Area 1 The address number of Top Device Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 System Area 2 System Area 3 System Area 4 Address number Bit Function Description 0 0 to 15 Display screen number This bit stores the number of the screen being displayed Write a value to this bit to change the screen to that number Immediately after the power is turned on the value configured b...

Page 285: ...he backlight is off 6 Beep This bit stores the beep state Write a value to this bit to change the state This bit is 0 immediately after the power is turned on 0 Stop Stops continuous beeping 1 Beep Starts continuous beeping 7 Screen display This bit stores the screen display state Write a value to this bit to change the state 0 Hide Hides the screen when the backlight is on 1 Show Displays the scr...

Page 286: ... Script error This bit changes to 1 when an error occurs during script execution Error details are stored in HMI Special Data Registers LSD52 and LSD53 For details refer to Chapter 20 1 4 Script Error on page 20 4 To clear this bit write 1 to the Clear error bit System Area 1 address number 1 bit 9 11 USB flash drive access error This bit changes to 1 when an error occurs when accessing an inserte...

Page 287: ...ng text has been canceled Write 1 to character input setting clear address number 1 bit 11 to clear this bit 6 Character input setting cancel This bit changes to 1 when entering text with the Character Input is canceled This bit changes to 0 when entering text or when entering text has been completed Write 1 to character input setting clear address number 1 bit 11 to clear this bit 7 to 15 Reserve...

Page 288: ...digit BCD 9 0 to 7 Clock data Hour These bits store the current Hour 00 to 23 value as a 2 digit BCD 8 to 15 Clock data Day These bits store the current Day 01 to 31 value as a 2 digit BCD 10 0 to 7 Reserved 8 to 15 Clock data Minute These bits store the current MICRO I clock data Minute 00 to 59 11 0 to 3 Clock data Day of Week These bits store the current Day of Week value as a 2 digit BCD The r...

Page 289: ... vary based on the model The supported functions for each communication interface are as follows HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Name Interface Function ExternalDevice Communication 1 to 4 O I Link Master O I Link Slave User Communication 1 to 3 Sub Host Communication Printer Maintenance Communication COM1 Serial Interface RS232C or RS422 485 YES YES...

Page 290: ... 1 to 4 O I Link Master O I Link Slave User Communication 1 to 3 Sub Host Communication Maintenance Communication SERIAL1 RS232C Serial Interface RS232C YES NO NO YES YES NO SERIAL1 RS422 485 Serial Interface RS422 485 YES YES YES YES YES NO Ethernet Ethernet Interface YES NO NO YES NO YES USB2 USB A USB Interface Type A NO NO NO YES NO NO USB USB B USB Interface Mini B NO NO NO NO NO YES Name Int...

Page 291: ...pter 25 Monitor Function on page 25 1 Web Server Refer to Chapter 28 1 Web Server Function on page 28 1 BACnet Communication 1 Refer to Chapter 3 7 BACnet Communication on page 3 94 Functions Available with the USB Interface The following functions can be used with MICRO I models equipped with a USB interface Online Refer to Chapter 24 Online Function on page 24 1 Debug Refer to Chapter 25 Monitor...

Page 292: ...al Device Communication 3 External Device Communication 4 User Communication 1 User Communication 2 User Communication 3 or Sub Host Communication is selected for Function Stop Bits Selects the stop bits as 1 or 2 This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1 External Device Communication 2 External Device Communication 3 External Device Communication 4 User Communication...

Page 293: ... Sub Host Communication is selected for Function Stop Bits Selects the stop bits as 1 or 2 This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1 External Device Communication 2 External Device Communication 3 External Device Communication 4 User Communication 1 User Communication 2 User Communication 3 or Sub Host Communication is selected for Function Parity Selects the parity f...

Page 294: ...s increase the timeout time on the Home tab in the Project group in Comm Setup For details refer to Chapter 24 1 3 Change Communication Settings on page 24 5 According to the DHCP server specifications the IP address may change by removing and reinserting the Ethernet cable After connecting the MICRO I into a different network turn the power to MICRO I off and then on again Automatically obtain th...

Page 295: ...ation Driver are selected on the Communication Driver tab refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual About Networking Terminology IP Address The number allocated to identify devices connected to an IP network such as the Internet or an intranet The IP address is the address of each individual device on a network Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used to indicate the position of the divisio...

Page 296: ...e also sends data to the MICRO I s listening port and that data is received by the MICRO I Target Configures the IP address and port number for the external device These options can only be configured when TCP Client or UDP is selected for Operation Mode IP Address Specifies the IP address for the target The format is xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255 When connecting mul...

Page 297: ...AWA Electric as Manufacture and MP2000 Ethernet as Communication Driver are selected on the Communication Driver tab refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual Duplicate UDP port numbers of MICRO I cannot be configured in the following functions UDP is selected for the User Communication refer to Port No on page 4 42 IDEC System as Manufacture and DM LINK Ethernet UDP as Communication D...

Page 298: ...s to their default values 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only Function Selects the function used by the USB interface Type A from the following N A User Communication 1 User Communication 2 User Communication 3 This communication interface is not used when N A is selected HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F HG1G 1P USB1 USB B HG2G 5T USB USB B Function Selects the function used by the USB interface...

Page 299: ... communication driver is displayed External Device These options configure the communication driver to use For details refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Function 1 1 The MICRO I is connected to a single external device 1 N The MICRO I is connected to multiple external devices Transmission Wait x 10 msec Specifies t...

Page 300: ...egister Word When using a communication driver other than those listed above and for MICROSmart SmartAXIS is selected the values of all device addresses are handled as from Upper word Enable Pass Through Select this check box to use the Pass Through function This option is only displayed for models that can use the Pass Through function For details refer to Chapter 27 1 2 Supported External Device...

Page 301: ... for all station numbers Only an internal device can be configured for this option Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 The information stored as error information is as follows For details refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual Initialization Conditions under which the error occurr...

Page 302: ...nication 2 External Device Communication 3 and External Device Communication 4 cannot be set to Modbus RTU Master S7 200 PPI S7 MPI or MP920 RTU According to the communication drivers that cannot be simultaneously used 3 External Device Communication 2 External Device Communication 3 and External Device Communication 4 cannot be set to DM Link 1 1 DM Link 1 N DM Link Ethernet UDP 1 or Modbus TCP S...

Page 303: ...mmunication Driver Extension Settings Dialog Box The Communication Driver Extension Settings dialog box is used to configure the communication driver extension settings These settings vary based on the external device For details refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual ...

Page 304: ...ll allows you to edit the name The maximum number is 20 characters You cannot use the following characters and name in the External Device Name The following characters and a space blank Full width character The same name as another External Device ID External Device Communication Shows the function set for the serial interface or the Ethernet interface Default Disabled Clicking the cell allows yo...

Page 305: ...same number as the other External Device IDs cannot be used for Slave Number IP Address Shows the IP address of the external device Default 192 168 0 1 Clicking the cell allows you to specify the IP address of the external device The format is xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255 When connecting multiple devices to the same network make sure to assign each device a unique I...

Page 306: ...al Device Communication 1 to External Device Communication 4 is a total of 32 external devices The number of external devices that can be set varies based on the communication interface Communication Interface Number of External Devices Serial Interface Connection 1 1 communication 1 Serial Interface Connection 1 N communication 31 max Ethernet Interface 32 max ...

Page 307: ... Link Station Selects the slave station Slave1 to Slave15 This option can only be configured when O I Link Slave is selected for Function under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab Slave Settings Select the check boxes for the slave stations to connect to This option can only be configured when O I Link Master is selected for Function under Interface Settings on the Communication ...

Page 308: ...tarts to be received A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command If the Receiving Character Time Out is set to 0 it is not monitored These setting items are used only with receive command Example The received data 1 frame is 2 bytes the While ON is selected as the Trigger Type in the Trigger Condition and LM100 is set to the Device Address LM101 is set to the Complet...

Page 309: ...e Out duration First byte of receive data Second byte of receive data Value of Receiving Character Time Out address number 0 bit 15 of Status Device Address LDR110 Value of Completed Device Address LM101 Receive command 1 0 1 0 1 0 Receiving Character Time Out duration First byte of receive data Second byte of receive data Value of Device Address LM100 when Trigger Condition is While ON Inching re...

Page 310: ...mmand Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box This option is only displayed when the Inching check box is selected Trigger Type Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Condition Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data Doubl...

Page 311: ...ion and receive commands Up Shifts the selected command upward in the list Down Shifts the selected command downward in the list Delete Deletes the selected command from the Command List Adding copying and shifting up and down happen within the range of the same type of command There are two types of commands the TXD the RXD and the Inching No Displays the number for managing the data Double click...

Page 312: ...o HMI Link Registers Address Number Shows the LLR address numbers LLR 0 to LLR 63 Device Address Shows the device addresses allocated to LLR address numbers B W Shows the device type B Bit device W Word device BWORD Bit device in word Device Type Selects the device type of the device address to allocate to the HMI Link Register LLR Only device types that can be used are shown Address Number Specif...

Page 313: ...umber and click Set to allocate the settings configured by Device Type Address Number Bit Number and Slave Number to the HMI Link Register LLR Set with Auto Increment Allocates sequential device addresses from the device address configured by Device Type Address Number Bit Number and Slave Number to the HMI Link Registers LLR after the selected LLR address number Delete Deletes the device address ...

Page 314: ...ode Select this check box to reverse only black or white when printing HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P The color cannot be configured To print in monochrome configure the print color on the printer that is used When the edge of the data is not printed enable No Trimming and Bordered in the printer s settings When connecting the MICRO I to a printer an error may occu...

Page 315: ... HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P You cannot use the following characters in the folder name After operation starts the folders created in the External Memory Device folder and the file names cannot be changed All Screenshots Select this check box to erase all the screenshots in the CAPTURE folder All Alarm ...

Page 316: ...pup Screen when USB Flash Drive is inserted Select this check box to display a popup screen when a USB flash drive is inserted in the MICRO I HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Screen Number Specifies the popup screen number 1 to 3015 to display when a USB flash drive is inserted in the MICRO I Coordinates X Y Specifies the coordinates to display the popup screen With ...

Page 317: ...rocessing time for parts on the screen Select this check box to use a Cyclic Script Only one Cyclic Script can be configured for the project Script ID Specify the script ID to use 1 to 32000 as the Cyclic Script Click to display Script Manager Select a script from the script list For details refer to Chapter 20 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script specified w...

Page 318: ...n the displayed screenshot Enable Remote Monitor only Displays a screenshot of the screen displayed on the MICRO I Disable Displays only the detailed system information page Go back to System Information if operation is not performed for the following period Select this check box to automatically return to the homepage when no action is performed in the Remote Control page or Remote Monitor page f...

Page 319: ... Web Page or Use Custom Web Page is selected If Device Address is selected for Data Type note the following points If the value of device address is set to 61 or higher it will be treated as 60 minutes Once a network connection is established between the web browser and the MICRO I the timeout period cannot be changed The timeout period needs to be set in Device Address before a web browser access...

Page 320: ...t number of MICRO I note the following points The numbers that cannot be used 2538 for pass through 2101 for FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass through Duplicate numbers cannot be configured in the following functions Maintenance communication refer to Port Number on page 4 40 Web server function refer to Port Number on page 4 65 FTP server function TCP Server is selected for the User C...

Page 321: ...on procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 The timeout period to login the MICRO I is 1 minute If Device Address is selected for Data Type note the following points When the value of device address is 0 the Inactivity Timeout is 1 minute and when the value of device address is 61 or more the Inactivity Timeout is regarded as 60 minutes Once a network connection is est...

Page 322: ... the Host Name of the outgoing mail server SMTP The maximum number is 40 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used IP Address Specifies the IP address of the outgoing mail server SMTP The format is xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255 If Host Name is selected the IP address of the outgoing mail server SMTP is looked up and obtained from the host name u...

Page 323: ...meric characters and symbols can be used Specify General setting and Authentication setting by Value of Device Address Select this check box to set the General Setting and the Authentication Setting using the value of the specified device address Top Device Address Specify the word device to use It allocates the settings of the General Setting and the Authentication Setting starting at the configu...

Page 324: ...value of device address 3 Add a NULL terminating character 0x00 as the end of the string data when the string length is less than twenty words Settings Address Number Words Data Format Outgoing mail server SMTP 0 to 20 21 1 2 Host Name is selected String IP Address is selected Decimal Outgoing mail server SMTP port number 21 1 Decimal Sender E mail Address 22 to 42 21 2 3 String Sender Name 43 to ...

Page 325: ...ss Device Address LKR 122 LKR 123 LKR 124 LKR 125 LKR 126 LKR 127 LKR 128 LKR 129 LKR 130 LKR 131 to LKR 142 String ASCII t e s t e x a m p l e c o m 0 0 0 0 Value Hexadecimal 7465h 7374h 4065h 7861h 6D70h 6C65h 2E63h 6F6Dh 0000h 0000h Sender Name Device Address LKR 143 LKR 144 LKR 145 LKR 146 to LKR 163 String ASCII T e s t 0 0 0 0 Value Hexadecimal 5465h 7374h 0000h 0000h Require authentication ...

Page 326: ...ddress LKR 186 LKR 187 LKR 188 LKR 189 LKR 190 LKR 191 LKR 192 LKR 193 to LKR 206 String ASCII t e s t _ p a s s w o r d 0 0 0 Value Hexadecimal 7465h 7374h 5F70h 6173h 7377h 6F72h 6400h 0000h Use secure connection SSL Device Address LKR 207 Value Decimal 1 Settings Preset Value ...

Page 327: ...ize of only the image files when the current project data is downloaded Location Shows the save location for the current project data Created Shows the date and time the current project data was created Modified Shows the date and time the current project data was last saved Accessed Shows the date and time the current project data was opened User Enter the name of the creator The maximum number i...

Page 328: ...alarm log data log and operation log data as CSV files European Japanese Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic The display type for dates and times varies based on the selected language Japanese YYYY MM DD hh mm ss European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic MM DD YYYY hh mm ss 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only ...

Page 329: ...al fonts are selected for download to the MICRO I shows the size of the standard fonts Use Kanji Dictionary Data 1 Select this check box to download the Kanji dictionary data to the MICRO I 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V only HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Optional fonts if left cleared will be removed from the MICRO I when the project data is downloaded The check boxes for opt...

Page 330: ...nder Compatibility HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Script Trigger Condition Calculate 16 bit data with 16 bit Select this check box to calculate arithmetic operations modulo as 16 bit data when UBIN16 W BIN16 I or BCD4 B is selected for Data Type Data that exceeds 16 bits is lost Clear this check box to calculate as 32 bits No data will be lost Handle Logical operat...

Page 331: ...um Limits for the range Word Button Word Write Command Write the data as 2 words Select this check box to write the calculated result of arithmetic operations as two words when UBIN16 W or BIN16 I is selected for Data Type For the calculated result is written in two words as a 32 bit numeric value For division the quotient data is written in the first word and the remainder data is written in the ...

Page 332: ...BACnet communication For details on the BACnet communication refer to Chapter 3 7 BACnet Communication on page 3 94 Use BACnet IP Select this check box to use the functions of the BACnet communication Click Setting to display the BACnet Settings dialog box HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P ...

Page 333: ...ck Target Info The Target Information dialog box is displayed The project data size can be checked with Memory Space byte under Target Runtime Information The project data size varies based on the fonts downloaded to the MICRO I For details refer to Chapter 2 Font Size on page 2 9 Parts Number of parts Total number of Bit Buttons Word Buttons Goto Screen Buttons Key Buttons 32 000 max Selector swi...

Page 334: ...V4 User s Manual E mail Settings A maximum of 255 external device addresses can be used in the E mail settings File Transfer Settings FTP client function A maximum of 240 external device addresses can be used in the File Transfer settings ...

Page 335: ...ing objects and parts on the base and creates a screen that is displayed on the MICRO I Popup Screen 1 to 3015 The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the MICRO I is in Run Mode The size and coordinates of the screen can be specified and this screen can also be moved on the Base Screen A Popup Screen for the standard Keypad 1 will automatically be created in screen numbers 3001 ...

Page 336: ...click under New 2 Click Base Screen or Popup Screen The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed 3 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and click the OK button 2 Creating and Manipulating WindO I NV4 Screens HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P To edit the properties for a Base Screen or Popup Screen that has already been created double click an area in the edit...

Page 337: ...alog box is displayed 3 Click the screens to open in Screen List and then click the OK button Screen Type Select the type of screen to open from the following items The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List All Base Screen Popup Screen Screen List This list shows screens that have already been created If you right click a screen in the Project window and then click Open Screens the sele...

Page 338: ...the screen with the previous screen number or the next screen number of the screen displayed in the active editing window To open the screen with the previous screen number click the Open Previous Screen button in the Screens group on the Home tab To open the screen with the next screen number click the Open Next Screen button ...

Page 339: ...diting window Click in the upper right of the editing window Closing all screens You can close all the editing windows On the View tab in the Window group click Close All Closing a specific screen You can close multiple editing windows as a group 1 Right click a screen folder in the Project window and click Close Screens The Close Screens dialog box is displayed ...

Page 340: ...n Type Select the type of screen to close from the following items The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List All Base Screen Popup Screen Screen List This list shows the screens being edited Select All Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List To select multiple screens press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items ...

Page 341: ...for the new screen and the Number of copies to duplicate and then click the OK button Screen Type Select the type of screen to duplicate from either Base Screen or Popup Screen The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List Screen List This list shows screens that have already been created Screen Number Specify the screen number Base Screen 1 to 3000 Popup Screen 1 to 3015 for the new screen...

Page 342: ... the screens duplicated from screen number 5 If a screen number already exists after copying and you click the OK button on the Duplicate Screens dialog box an overwrite confirmation message is displayed Click the Yes button to overwrite the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message Click the Yes To All button to overwrite all the screens Click the No button to display the next ...

Page 343: ... confirmation message is displayed 2 Click the Yes button The screen is deleted Click the No button to return to the editing window without deleting the screen Deleting specific screens You can delete multiple screens as a group 1 On the Home tab in the Screens group click Delete The Delete Screens dialog box is displayed If you right click a screen folder in the Project window and click Delete Sc...

Page 344: ...Yes To All button Click the Yes button to delete the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message When deleting multiple screens the next message to confirm deleting a screen is displayed Click the Yes To All button to delete all the screens without displaying the confirmation message Click the No button to display the next message to confirm deleting a screen without deleting the ...

Page 345: ...k Reuse Screens the Open dialog box is displayed If a password has been configured for the project data the Password Screen will be displayed The password to enter varies based on the check box setting of the Use Password to open a Project found under the Options tab in the Security dialog box When this check box is checked enter the password for Use Password to open a Project When this check box ...

Page 346: ...ncluded in the screen a text ID or a script ID already exists in the project data being edited an overwrite message is displayed Click the Yes button to overwrite the item displayed in the confirmation message If there are multiple redundant items a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items Click the Yes To All button to overwrite all of the picture numbers pictures text IDs and sc...

Page 347: ...r popup screens collectively 1 Selects multiple screens of the same type on the Project window or in the Screen List window right click to open a popup menu and then click Properties The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed 2 Configure only the items to modify collectively 3 Click the OK button To select multiple screens press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items ...

Page 348: ...elect Base Screen as the screen type You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen Number Enter the Base Screen s screen number 1 to 3000 Title Enter the Base Screen s title Maximum number is 40 characters Size Shows the screen size You cannot change the size of Base Screens Screen List This list shows screens that have already been created It is only displayed when creating a new...

Page 349: ...y with Base Screen is configured the background color for the Base Screen specified as the background is displayed 1 to 5 Select these to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens No Enter the overlay screen s screen number 1 to 3000 Coordinates X Y Specify the display location of the overlay screen in coordinates The coordinates can be set in the range Screen size 1 dot The origin is the uppe...

Page 350: ...ng edited Overlay screen 5 screens max Base screen being edited Overlay screen 3 None Displays the screen Flash 1 sec cycle The screen display is flashed in one second intervals Flash 0 5 sec cycle The screen display is flashed in half second intervals Backlight OFF Turns off the backlight until the screen is touched or until bit 0 or bit 7 is set to 1 in the system area 1 s address number 1 Verti...

Page 351: ...n the Security Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the screen Only Permitted security groups can open this screen Double clicking the ce...

Page 352: ...ly being edited as the bottom most layer Example Displaying a Base Screen currently being edited on the layered screen 3 For details about how to configure these settings refer to 3 1 Properties of Base Screen Dialog Box on page 5 14 Example When Base Screen 100 which has a clock placed in it is used as a layered screen Base Screen 1 which is displayed as the base and Base Screen 2 will be display...

Page 353: ...00 0 Displayed as the base Layered Screen Layered Screen Layered Screen Base Screen 101 is displayed Layered Screen Base Screen 101 is not displayed Outside of the display area Layered Screen Displayed as the base When layering and displaying base screens that have drawings and parts placed on the top layer they are displayed in order of each top layer in front of each base screen Example When lay...

Page 354: ... Screens for standard Keypads for Numerical Input and Character Input Font Select the font to use for the title from the following items Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic This option can only be selected when Use Text Manager is cleared Use Text Manager Select this to use text registered in the Text Manager for the screen title However the text color is wh...

Page 355: ...ose is set Width Height Specify the width 40 dots to Base Screen width and the height 40 dots to Base Screen height of the Popup Screen None Displays the Popup Screen s background with the color specified in Background Color Transparency Displays the Popup Screen s background as transparent The amount of transparency can be selected from 10 to 90 in 10 increments Superimpose Displays the Popup Scr...

Page 356: ...ab in the Security dialog box Click to display the Security Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Vertical The focus moves vertically from top to bottom Horizontal The focus moves horizontally from left to right Custom Sets the desi...

Page 357: ...in the Security Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the screen Only Permitted security groups can open this screen Double clicking the c...

Page 358: ...r Screen Display Area MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I When there is a title bar on the popup screen touch switches that are within 20 dots of the title bar will not respond 1 Press 2 Touch the position where the screen will be moved to 3 The screen will move the position that was touched MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I The location that was touched will become the location of The Popup Screen can be moved in the ...

Page 359: ...01 to 3015 with the WindO I NV4 Example HG2G 5T Decimal Number Value Keypad Uppercase Alphabet Keypad The Keypad Popup Screen will differ depending on the model selected The Keypad Popup Screen can also place drawing objects and parts in the same manner as Popup Screen numbers 1 to 3000 Screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are screen numbers that are empty when a new project has been created and are handle...

Page 360: ...ce screen is not included 5 Screen Restrictions HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Item Number of screens Number of screens that can be created 3 000 max Number of layered screens 5 max Item Number of screens Number of screens that can be created 3 015 max Number of screens that can be displayed on the Base Screen 3 max Including the Device Monitor 1 Screen Number of P...

Page 361: ...tially missing 5 5 Vertical Installation Even if you choose for them to be installed and displayed vertically the screens in the System Mode will be the same as horizontal installation and display If the same device address is used in multiple device address settings the used number of device addresses will be counted as 1 device address It will not be counted as 1 point per device address setting...

Page 362: ...5 Screen Restrictions 5 28 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 363: ...te a variety of events when triggered by a change in values of device addresses or by touch Chapter 6 Drawings and Parts 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I Caution Equilateral Triangle Polyline Line Text Picture External device External device Parts changed to reflect changes in values of device addresses Tank 1 MICRO I MICRO I D10 80 D11 25 D12 2 D1...

Page 364: ...tered in the Text Manager 2 Drawing objects HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Shapes Function Basic Shapes Line Draws a line Polyline Draws a polyline Polygon Draws an object that connects two or more vertices with straight lines Rectangle Draws a rectangle Circle Ellipse Draws a circle or ellipse Arc Draws an elliptical arc Pie Draws a pie Equilateral Polygon Draws a...

Page 365: ...rd device Part Description Pilot Lamp Displays images Switches the displayed image according to the value of a bit device Multi State Lamp Displays images Switches the displayed image according to the value of a word device Part Description Numerical Input Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write entered numbers Character Input Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write the character code for ...

Page 366: ... trigger conditions are satisfied Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address number or to perform operations on the written value Goto Screen Command Switches to another screen or displays a window when certain trigger conditions are satisfied Print Command Outputs a screenshot to a printer or external memory devices when certain trigger conditions are satisfied Script Command Execu...

Page 367: ...en these objects overlap on base screens and popup screens Configure the Properties dialog box of the drawings or parts if they need to be placed on the top layer For details refer to the settings for the drawings or part 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Base Screen or Popup Screen Display for Base Screen or Popup Screen 130 100 120 1...

Page 368: ...n is placed on the top layer If parts placed on the top layer overlap the display order of the parts does not change Example A Numerical Display is placed on the top layer and a Bit Button is placed in front of it Display for Base Screen 1 Numerical Display is displayed in front Changes the value 1234 Numerical Display Bit Button Base Screen 1 1234 9999 Object list No Type Layer 1 Numerical Displa...

Page 369: ...top layer overlap the drawing placed on the top layer is always displayed in front Example A Numerical Display is placed on the base screen and an equilateral hexagon is placed on the top layer Display for Base Screen 1 The display order of the equilateral hexagon and Numerical Display is unchanged 1234 9999 Changes the value 1234 Equilateral Hexagon Numerical Display Base Screen 1 Object list No ...

Page 370: ...aced on the top layer and a Picture Display is placed in front of it In the following situations the drawing and the part image type are hidden When the drawing or part is flashing When the hidden condition is satisfied in a part configured with display conditions When a lamp is off that has its Not Display Image check box selected on the View tab When an unregistered state or number is selected f...

Page 371: ...ng and a part that has None selected for Image Type placed on the top layer overlap if the value for the top layer part changes or if the picture for the part changes no part of the background drawing will be missing Example An equilateral hexagon is placed on the top layer and a Numerical Display is placed in front of it Display for Base Screen 1 Overlapping part for the equilateral hexagon and N...

Page 372: ... At this time the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM33 is 1 For details refer to Chapter 33 HMI Special Relay LSM on page 33 2 When the Message Display Message Switching Display and Alarm List Display have their Scroll check box selected on the Format tab in the Properties dialog box and they are placed on the top layer the scrolling speed of the text will be slower On the Top Layer magenta R...

Page 373: ...k and hold the mouse button at the location start point to start drawing the line on the edit screen 3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location A line is drawn that connects the start point and stop point Chapter 7 Drawings 1 Shapes HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Stop point Start point Drag To change the style of the drawn line perform one of the following operati...

Page 374: ...lor for the line color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flash Select this check box to make the line flash The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Point1 Point2 Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the line on the top layer The line...

Page 375: ...ation A line is drawn that connects the last end point and the stop point Stop point Start point End point End point The maximum number of end points in a polyline including the start point and the stop point is 300 points To change the style of the drawn polyline perform one of the following operations Double click the polyline to open the Properties dialog box Select the polyline and select the ...

Page 376: ... from the Color Palette Flash Select this check box to make the polyline flash The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Coordinates Size Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the polyline on the top layer The polyline will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chap...

Page 377: ...ocation A polygon is drawn with the start point and stop point connected End point Start point Stop point End point The maximum number of end points in the polygon including the start point and the stop point is 300 points To change the style of the drawn polygon perform one of the following operations Double click the polygon to open the Properties dialog box Select the polygon and select the sty...

Page 378: ... and the background color to use for the polygon color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the polygon Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Flash Select this check box to make the polygon flash...

Page 379: ...he top layer The polygon will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 W H Specifies the size of the polygon in width and height W 1 to base screen horizontal size H 1 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Polygon ...

Page 380: ... to start drawing the rectangle on the edit screen 3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle A rectangle is drawn with the start point and stop point set to opposite angles Stop point Drag Start point To change the style of the drawn rectangle perform one of the following operations Double click the rectangle to open the Properties dia...

Page 381: ...d when 1 dot is selected for Line Width Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the rectangle color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the rectangle Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a...

Page 382: ... Size Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the rectangle on the top layer The rectangle will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 For Curve For Straight Round Radius Round Radius Convex Concave None X Y Specifies the display position of the rectangle in coordinates With t...

Page 383: ...rcle or ellipse on the edit screen 3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle A circle or ellipse is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the start point and the stop point Stop point Drag Start point To change the style of the drawn circle or ellipse perform one of the following operations Double click th...

Page 384: ...nd the background color to use for the circle or ellipse color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the circle or ellipse Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Flash Select this check box to make...

Page 385: ...g on page 6 5 X Y Specifies the display position of the circle or ellipse in coordinates With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the rectangle that circumscribes the circle or ellipse is the X and Y coordinates X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Circle ellipse W H Specifies the size of the circle or ellipse...

Page 386: ... the rectangle An arc is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the start point and the stop point Stop point Drag Start point To change the style of the drawn arc perform one of the following operations Double click the arc to open the Properties dialog box Select the arc and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab Select the arc and open the right click m...

Page 387: ...a color from the Color Palette Flash Select this check box to make the arc flash The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Coordinates Size Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the arc on the top layer The arc will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 ...

Page 388: ...angle of the rectangle A pie is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the start point and the stop point Stop point Drag Start point To change the style of the drawn pie perform one of the following operations Double click the pie to open the Properties dialog box Select the pie and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab Select the pie and open the right ...

Page 389: ...round color to use for the pie color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the pie Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Flash Select this check box to make the pie flash The flash interval is spe...

Page 390: ...e top layer The pie will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 W H Specifies the size of the pie in width and height W 1 to base screen horizontal size H 1 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Pie ...

Page 391: ...ursor changes to pencil 2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location start point on the edit screen to start drawing the square that will circumscribe the equilateral polygon 3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the square An equilateral polygon is drawn that inscribes the square made from the opposite angles of the start point and the sto...

Page 392: ...und color to use for the equilateral polygon color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the equilateral polygon Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Flash Select this check box to make the equil...

Page 393: ...ther drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 W Sets width to define the size of the equilateral polygon The maxium size varies based on the item selected for Installation Horizontal 1 to base screen vertical size Vertical 1 to base screen horizontal size H Displays the same as the width Width Height Screen Equilateral p...

Page 394: ...ttern of the shape last drawn or the shape that last had its style changed The clicked location is the fill start point Fill start point To change the fill style perform one of the following operations Double click the fill start point to open the Properties dialog box Select the fill start point and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab Select the fill start point and open the right...

Page 395: ...display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern to fill with Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Fill Start Point X Y Specifies the display position of the fill start point in coordinates The upper left corner of the screen is the origin X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertica...

Page 396: ...location on the edit screen to place the picture Picture Manager is displayed 3 Select a picture and click Select The selected picture is placed on the screen 2 Picture HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P To change the picture that was placed on the screen perform one of the following operations Double click the picture to open the Properties dialog box then click Brows...

Page 397: ...ox to display the picture on the top layer The picture will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 X Y Specifies the display position of the picture in coordinates With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the rectangle that circumscribes the picture is t...

Page 398: ... to display in Text and configure the options as necessary The maximum number is 3737 characters 4 Click OK The text is placed on the screen 3 Text HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P To change the style of the text placed on the screen perform one of the following operations You can change the entered text in the Properties dialog box Double click the text to open the ...

Page 399: ...s cleared Style Selects the style of text from the following Regular Bold Shadow This option can only be configured when Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic is selected for Font Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertic...

Page 400: ...ted by Font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on page 2 6 This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared Text Color Selects the color for the displayed text color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Magnification This option can only be configured when Japanese European...

Page 401: ...ter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 Normal The text does not flash Flash The text flashes X Y Specifies the display position of the text or the text area in coordinates With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the rectangle that circumscribes the text or the upper left corner of the text area is the X and Y coordinates When the Use Text Area ch...

Page 402: ...3 Text 7 30 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 403: ... 8 Buttons 1 Bit Button HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I 0 1 External device Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device Release Initial image Press Release Press 1 Operation and view Data written 1 Write Action Write Pressing the button writes a 0 to the bit device Release Initial image Press Release Press 0 Operation and view Data written 0 Write Actio...

Page 404: ...o the bit device Each press of the button alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device Release Initial image Press Release Press 1 Operation and view Data written 0 Write Action Write Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1 and vice versa Release Initial image Press Release Press Operation and view Toggle Action Toggle Pressing t...

Page 405: ...ons 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Bit Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Bit Button 3 Double click the dropped Bit Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 406: ...e button is OFF or ON Action Mode Select the behavior of the button from the following To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Set Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device Reset Pressing the button...

Page 407: ...Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device Alternate Each press of the button alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device Toggle Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1 and vice versa Move Pressing the button writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the de...

Page 408: ...s set to Move Example This button writes the values in a contiguous block of bit devices to a contiguous block of device addresses at the destination 1 Advanced mode only 1 M0 1 M1 1 M2 1 M3 1 M4 Action Mode Set Write 5 Destination Device Address M0 bit bit 15 0 1 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 1 1 1 1 Action Mode Set Write 5 Destination Device Address D0 15 Device Address Specify the source bit device Click to d...

Page 409: ...on the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the MICRO I activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ON o...

Page 410: ... image displayed on the View tab OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and backgroun...

Page 411: ...s the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 412: ... Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the verti...

Page 413: ...xt Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting You can specify the character spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 to...

Page 414: ...ile LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always enable The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Condit...

Page 415: ...r Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditio...

Page 416: ...ible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected...

Page 417: ... other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 Time x100 msec Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a value from 0 to 600 units of 10 ms The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time Hold down for 3 secs MICRO I MICRO I Button Does not ope...

Page 418: ...r not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part If al...

Page 419: ...ermitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not display...

Page 420: ... to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part...

Page 421: ...address to a word device Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device 2 Word Button HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I External device D1 0 100 D1 100 Write Destination word device 100 Value 100 D1 MICRO I External device D0 123 D1 0 D0 123 D1 123 Move Value in device address Destination word device D0 D1 MICR...

Page 422: ...ten Write Value in device address Pressing the button writes the fixed value of ON Data to a word device Releasing the button writes the fixed value of OFF Data to a word device Release Press Release Press Initial image Write ON data Operation and view Action Data written Write ON data Write OFF data Write OFF data Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be ...

Page 423: ...ing the button adds the value in the Source 1 to the Source 2 value and writes the sum in the word device Release Initial image Press Release Press Arithmetic operation Write Operation and view Action Data written Result Arithmetic operation Write Result Release Initial image Press Release Press Addition Write Operation and view Action Value in reference device address 100 200 300 400 500 Data Val...

Page 424: ...1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Word Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Word Button 3 Double click the dropped Word Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 425: ...vior of the button from the following To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Set Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device Move Pressing the button writes the value in the source device...

Page 426: ... AND XOR Pressing the button performs arithmetic on a value of source device address and a constant value or the value of device address and writes the result to a word device Example Add Addition Pressing the button adds the value in the Source 1 to the Source 2 value and writes the sum in the word device Release Press Release Press Initial image Write ON data Operation and view Action Data writt...

Page 427: ...ng error on page 36 3 Value Use a constant value Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set Momentary or Alternate If Action Mode is set to Momentary or Alternate the value in the ON Data is written when the button is ON and the value in the OFF Data is written when the button is OFF Hexadecimal Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values in hexadecimal Device Addr...

Page 428: ...s on page 2 5 Write 1 Specify the number of word devices 1 to 64 at the destination For Move specify how many times to write This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set Momentary Alternate or Move Example If Data Type is set to UBIN16 W and Write is set to 5 the same data will be written to 5 continuous word addresses Example If Data Type is set to UBIN32 D and Write is set to 5 the ...

Page 429: ...on the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the MICRO I activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ON o...

Page 430: ...e image displayed on the View tab OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and backgrou...

Page 431: ...ts the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 432: ... Regular or Bold for text style Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to ...

Page 433: ...ext Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting You can specify the character spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 t...

Page 434: ...ile LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always enable The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Condit...

Page 435: ...r Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditio...

Page 436: ...ible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected...

Page 437: ... other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 Time x100 msec Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a value from 0 to 600 units of 10 ms The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time Hold down for 3 secs MICRO I MICRO I Button Does not ope...

Page 438: ...r not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part If al...

Page 439: ...Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displa...

Page 440: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the par...

Page 441: ...s the Popup Screen Device Monitor Password Screen Adjust Brightness Screen File Screen and Open User Account Setting Screen Pressing the button switches to the System Mode Pressing the button resets the current screen 3 Goto Screen Button HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I D51 123 D52 456 D53 0 999 D51 123 D52 456 D53 0 9...

Page 442: ...1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Goto Screen Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button 3 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 443: ...0 characters OFF Text ON Text Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration Text tab This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned fo...

Page 444: ...rightness on page 34 2 Close Adjust Brightness Screen Closes the Adjust Brightness Screen For details refer to Chapter 34 1 3 Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 34 2 Open File Screen for movie files 1 Opens the File Screen For details refer to Chapter 10 4 4 File Screen on page 10 92 Close File Screen for movie files 1 Closes the File Screen For details refer to Chapter 10 4 4 File Screen on page...

Page 445: ...ct this check box and specify a device address to specify the coordinates using the value of the specified device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen Button Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed Dev...

Page 446: ...t Setting Screen Dialog Box Top Device Address Specifies a word device to use Processing Area of User Account Setting Screen 152 words are used from the starting device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 ...

Page 447: ...itches the image displayed on the View tab OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and...

Page 448: ... the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 449: ...n Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in ...

Page 450: ...t Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting You can specify the character spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 to ...

Page 451: ...is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always enable The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operat...

Page 452: ...be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the...

Page 453: ...s the visible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is...

Page 454: ...other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 Time x100 msec Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a value from 0 to 600 units of 10 ms The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time Hold down for 3 secs MICRO I MICRO I Button Does not oper...

Page 455: ...whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this p...

Page 456: ...rmitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displaye...

Page 457: ...ced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over...

Page 458: ...to an external memory device 1 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P 4 Print Button HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I Printer 2011 1 11 Refer to Chapter 32 1 2 Connecting a Printer to MICRO I on page 32 1 for compatible printers and instructions on how to c...

Page 459: ...tons 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Print Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Print Button 3 Double click the dropped Print Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 460: ...x on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Printer 1 Outputs the screenshot to the printer connected to the MICRO I Print Time Stamp Adds the date and time of printing to the screenshot before sending it to the printer The date and time format depends on the language selected in Language Language is a...

Page 461: ...e edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the MICRO I activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ON or OFF state of the device address allowing you to display the...

Page 462: ...the All Screenshot data check box and then configure the trigger device address Assign that trigger device address to a part To erase files with WindO I NV4 click Clear on the Online tab and then click Stored Data in External Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box Select the Screenshot Data check box and click OK To erase files on the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and the HG2G 5F go to the Syst...

Page 463: ...hes the image displayed on the View tab OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and ba...

Page 464: ...e display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 465: ...hinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the...

Page 466: ...anager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting You can specify the character spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 to 100...

Page 467: ...LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always enable The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates ...

Page 468: ...configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tr...

Page 469: ...he visible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is se...

Page 470: ...er drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 Time x100 msec Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a value from 0 to 600 units of 10 ms The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time Hold down for 3 secs MICRO I MICRO I Button Does not operate...

Page 471: ...ther or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part...

Page 472: ...tted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displayed F...

Page 473: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 474: ...Show focus Move focus Key Bu on Display reference screen Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault...

Page 475: ... models with a video interface only 2 HG5G 4G 3G V only 3 HG4G 3G only 4 Recording sound function is for HG4G 3G only MICRO I Copy files USB flash drive SD memory card HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I Play Play Stop Back Next SD memory card Movie Files AVI format MP4 format Movie File List movie lst HG4G HG3G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V 2 3 Video Camera Microphone Images Audio Saves ...

Page 476: ...1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Key Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Key Button 3 Double click the dropped Key Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 477: ...applicable to the selected key Key To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Language Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser These languages are available Ja...

Page 478: ...hese settings specify the source data to be transferred and destination This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser If Download Project is selected 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only Source Select the the external memory where the project ZNV Project File to be transferred is stored SD Memory Card 1 or USB Flash Drive Location S...

Page 479: ...or wav to the root directory of an SD memory card or USB flash drive Error wav Destination Select the destination external memory SD Memory Card or USB Flash Drive Location Specify the location where the file will be transferred The maximum number is 247 characters Example Save it to the SOUND folder under HGDATA01 folder on an SD memory card or USB flash drive HGDATA01 SOUND If a file name is spe...

Page 480: ... 4 3 4 Communication Driver Network Tab on page 4 50 Interface Select the communication interface in which the MICRO I is connecting to the download destination PLC from serial interface or Ethernet For details refer to Chapter 4 Interface Configuration on page 4 35 If serial interface is selected for Interface Slave Number Specify the slave number of the download destination PLC 0 to 31 External ...

Page 481: ... is displayed here If Ethernet is selected for Interface Select from the following method Specify External Device ID Specify the External Device ID 0 to 31 of the upload source PLC This is the External Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box on the Communication Driver Network tab External Device Name The name of the specified PLC is displayed here Specify IP Address Specify the IP...

Page 482: ...hile data is being saved to the external memory device recording cannot be executed with a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the recording function Also during these situations the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD155 0 changes to 1 For details refer to Chapter 33 HMI Special Data Register LSD on page 33 7 Video and Audio Records images and sound Video only No Audio Rec...

Page 483: ...n the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the MICRO I activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ON or...

Page 484: ...ches the image displayed on the View tab OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background color...

Page 485: ...s the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 486: ... Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the verti...

Page 487: ...xt Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting You can specify the character spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 to...

Page 488: ...ile LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always enable The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Condit...

Page 489: ...r Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditio...

Page 490: ...ible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected...

Page 491: ... other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 Time x100 msec Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a value from 0 to 600 units of 10 ms The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time Hold down for 3 secs MICRO I MICRO I Button Does not ope...

Page 492: ...r not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part If al...

Page 493: ...ermitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not display...

Page 494: ... to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part...

Page 495: ...focus can be moved according to the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box Fcs Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box Fcs Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set ...

Page 496: ...ASCII code form to a device address After the data is written the focus can be moved according to the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box SP Inputs a space Cur Moves the cursor right Cur Moves the cursor left Fcs Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of t...

Page 497: ...rsor ENT Writes the text input in character code form to a device address After the data is written the focus can be moved according to the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box When displaying conversion candidates for Kanji in Kanji input mode input the selected Kanji SP Inputs a space When reading is entered in Kanji input mode convers...

Page 498: ... Operation Page Up Scrolls up the number of lines 1 to 1023 specified in Scroll Size Page Down Scrolls down the number of lines 1 to 1023 specified in Scroll Size Up Moves the focus the number of lines 1 to 1023 specified in Scroll Size The current point of focus can be shown by pressing Select Down Moves the focus the number of lines 1 to 1023 specified in Scroll Size The current point of focus c...

Page 499: ... normal playback This button cannot be used during fast forward slow or when paused FF When this button is pressed during playback the movie file fast forwards while being played Press this button during fast forward to return to normal playback This button cannot be used during rewind slow or when paused Slow Press this button for slow movie file playback Press this button during slow playback to...

Page 500: ...om the following uses Keypad Half Width Character Keypad Hiragana 1 Data Transfer Alarm Display Multimedia Function 2 Keypad Half Width Character These buttons are used for Numerical Input and Character Input Keypad Hiragana 1 These buttons are used for Character Input to enter Hiragana and Kanji 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V only 2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only When you select a k...

Page 501: ...ser s Manual 8 99 5 Key Button 8 Buttons Data Transfer These buttons are used to execute Data Transfer functions Alarm Display These buttons are used to manipulate the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts ...

Page 502: ...y Button 8 100 WindO I NV4 User s Manual Multimedia Function 2 These buttons are used to start and stop recording and to operate the Video Display 2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only ...

Page 503: ...he Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Key Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Key Button 3 Double click the dropped Key Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 On the General tab under Key Type click Browse Key Browser is displayed 1 Recording sound function is for HG4G 3G only 1 HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T...

Page 504: ... Channel 2 to record a video only no audio out of the signals input from the device This setting is enabled only if Rec was selected using the Key Browser Recording Target 3 In the signals input from the device select Video and Audio or Video only No Audio as the recording target 7 Click OK Close the Properties of Key Button dialog box 8 Repeat steps 1 through 4 2 HG5G 4G 3G V only 3 This is appli...

Page 505: ...n page 31 15 The year month day folder name is the date the file was recorded The file name for the recorded file is the time the file was saved 1 Recording sound function is for HG4G 3G only 2 AVI format for HG5G 4G 3G V MP4 format for HG4G 3G Recording stops when the maximum recording time 30 sec has elapsed even if the Stop button is not pressed Movie files cannot be recorded during playback Wh...

Page 506: ...e Parts group click Data Displays and then click Video Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display 3 Double click the dropped Video Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed 4 On the General tab under Action select Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen This option selects and plays movie files using the File Screen HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V ...

Page 507: ...creen to select a recorded images On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Goto Screen Button 7 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button 8 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 9 Select Open File Screen for Movie Files for Action Mode ...

Page 508: ...isplayed 2 Select the folder with the date of the recorded images Press to select 20110313 and then press Select The contents of the 20110313 folder will be displayed X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 Movie files that meet the following specifications can be played with the MICRO I HG5G 4G 3G V AVI file avi HG4G 3G MP4 file mp4 For details refer to Chapter 2 1...

Page 509: ... 000 Folder Up Update Page Up Page Down Select 1 2 Restore RepeatON RepeatOFF Full REW FF Nest Back Stop Play Pause MICRO I Video Display Press Play While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function while data is being recorded with a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the recording function or while data is being saved to the external memor...

Page 510: ...HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Command Description Bit Write Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device when pressed Word Write Writes a value to a word device when pressed You can specify the destination address number indirectly and perform arithmetic on the value to be written Goto Screen Switches screens and opens other windows when pressed Print Outputs a screenshot to th...

Page 511: ...e The button turns ON when pressed and OFF when released Release Initial image Press Release Press ON Operation and view Action ON OFF OFF The button switches between ON and OFF each time it is pressed Release Initial image Press Release Press ON Operation and view Action OFF ...

Page 512: ...1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Multi Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Multi Button 3 Double click the dropped Multi Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 513: ...n the button is OFF or ON Action Mode Select the Action Mode for the Multi Button Momentary or Alternate To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Momentary The button turns ON when pressed and OFF when rele...

Page 514: ...he word device For details refer to Properties of Bit Write for Multi Functions Dialog Box on page 8 114 Word Write Writes a value to a word device Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on the written value For details refer to Properties of Word Write for Multi Functions Dialog Box on page 8 115 Goto Screen Switches to another screen or displays a wind...

Page 515: ... on the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the MICRO I activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ON ...

Page 516: ...ion Mode is set to Move For details refer to Source Data on page 8 6 1 Advanced mode only Set Pressing the Multi Button writes a 1 to the bit device Reset Pressing the Multi Button writes a 0 to the bit device Set Reset Pressing the Multi Button writes a 1 to the bit device Releasing the Multi Button writes a 0 to the bit device Toggle Pressing the Multi Button inverts the value of the bit device ...

Page 517: ...n writes a value in a source device address to a destination word device Set ON OFF Data Pressing the button writes a fixed value of ON Data to a word device Releasing the button writes a fixed value of OFF Data to a word device Add Sub Multi Div Mod OR AND XOR Pressing the button performs arithmetic on a value of source device address and a fixed value or a value of device address and writes the ...

Page 518: ...d device address This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Chapter 2 Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings on page 2 5 Transfer 1 Specify the number of word devices 1 to 64 to transfer This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Transfer 1 on page 8 25 Destination Device Address Specify the destination word device Click ...

Page 519: ... Screen Closes the Adjust Brightness Screen Open File Screen for movie files 2 Opens the File Screen Close File Screen for movie files 2 Closes the File Screen Switch to System Mode Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode Reset current screen Resets the current Base Screen Open User Account Setting Screen Opens the User Account Setting Screen For details refer to Chapter 23 5 Editing User Acco...

Page 520: ...s configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen Coordinates X Y Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as the origin This setting is enabled only ...

Page 521: ...te and time format depends on the language selected in Language Language is available on the Project Details tab of the Project Settings dialog box The display formats are shown below Japanese YYYY MM DD hh mm English MM DD YYYY hh mm YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute External Memory Device 2 Outputs the screenshot as a file to the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I Files are...

Page 522: ...hat can be captured 1 to 999 can be set in HMI Special Data Registers LSD65 Default 99 The methods to erase screenshot files saved on the external memory device are as follows To erase files during operation using parts on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings dialog box select the Remove Files check box and the All Screenshot data check box and then configure the trigger device a...

Page 523: ...a Keypad for This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser Displays settings applicable to the selected key Key Language Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser These languages are available Japanese European Central European Baltic Cyrillic Browse Opens the Key Browser when clicked Select a key For details refer to 5 5 Key ...

Page 524: ...keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser If Download Project is selected 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only Source Select the external memory where the project ZNV Project File to be transferred is stored SD Memory Card 1 or USB Flash Drive Location Specify the location of the ZNV Project File znv The maximum number is 247 characters Example Where HG3G_DEMO_1 ZNV is a Z...

Page 525: ...av is a sound file saved on the root directory of an SD memory card or USB flash drive Error wav Destination Select the destination external memory SD Memory Card or USB Flash Drive Location Specify the location where the file will be transferred The maximum number is 247 characters Example To save it to the folder SOUND inside HGDATA01 on an SD memory card or USB flash drive HGDATA01 SOUND If a f...

Page 526: ...r 4 3 4 Communication Driver Network Tab on page 4 50 Interface Select the communication interface in which the MICRO I is connecting to the download destination PLC from serial interface or Ethernet For details refer to Chapter 4 Interface Configuration on page 4 35 If serial interface is selected for Interface Slave Number Specify the slave number of the download destination PLC 0 to 31 External...

Page 527: ...C is displayed here If Ethernet is selected for Interface Select from the following method Specify External Device ID Specify the External Device ID 0 to 31 of the upload source PLC This is the External Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box on the Communication Driver Network tab External Device Name The name of the specified PLC is displayed here Specify IP Address Specify the I...

Page 528: ... while data is being saved to the external memory device recording cannot be executed with a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the recording function Also during these situations the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD155 0 changes to 1 For details refer to Chapter 33 HMI Special Data Register LSD on page 33 7 Video and Audio Records images and sound Video only No Audio R...

Page 529: ...00 of the script to operate Script Manager will open when is clicked Select a script from the script list For details refer to Chapter 20 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager Script Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager Once this area is double clicked the Script Editor will open and editing can be done For ...

Page 530: ...he image displayed on the View tab OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and backgro...

Page 531: ...ets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 532: ...e Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vert...

Page 533: ...ext Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting You can specify the character spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 t...

Page 534: ...hile LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always enable The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Condi...

Page 535: ...or Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditi...

Page 536: ...sible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selecte...

Page 537: ...x100 msec Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a value from 0 to 600 units of 10 ms The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time Hold down for 3 secs MICRO I MICRO I Button Does not operate Button Operates This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched ...

Page 538: ...or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part If a...

Page 539: ... Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displ...

Page 540: ...se to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the pa...

Page 541: ...t parts Entering numbers in the Numerical Input Entering characters in the Character Input 7 Keypad HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P 1230 MICRO I Numerical Input Keypad MICRO I Character Input Keypad Do not use the Keypad part with the Goto Screen Button or a combination of Goto Screen Commands For details refer to 5 Key Button on page 8 72 ...

Page 542: ...displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Keypad Properties dialog box is displayed until OK is clicked Refer to 7 3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box on page 8 141 After OK on the Keypad Properties dialog box is clicked double clicking the Keypad thereafter calls up the Properties dialog box for the Key Buttons as a group This allows editing of settings common to each button View...

Page 543: ...s the Color Palette when Color is clicked Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Select a pattern to use or tonal gradation for the Keypad Displays the Pattern Palette when Pattern is clicked Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Font Select one of the following fonts to use for the text on the buttons Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic...

Page 544: ...eft corner of the Keypad using the upper left corner of the screen as the origin X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Keypad W H Specify the size of the Keypad by specifying width and height W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Keypad ...

Page 545: ... Run Modes Filling Stop Discharge 8 Selector Switch HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Automatic Manual Automatic Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual R button Ch2 Ch1 L button Knob Press L button to switch to Auto Press R button to switch to Manual Operate manually F S D F S D F S D F S D R button Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 L button Knob Press L button to switch to Filling Switch to ...

Page 546: ...ons 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Selector Switch 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Selector Switch 3 Double click the dropped Selector Switch and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 547: ...ce address for Ch1 is set to 1 and Ch2 is set to 0 The 3 Notch action is as follows The knob behaves as follows for 3 Notch No return 3 Notch R return and 3 Notch L return button Press R button knob switches from Ch1 left Ch2 middle Ch3 right in that order Press L button knob switches from Ch3 right Ch2 middle Ch1 left in that order Switching the knob writes 1 to the device address for the new kno...

Page 548: ...the knob is switched to Ch1 or from Ch1 to Ch2 it stays where it is even if the button is released Release Default state Press 0 1 1 0 Write Write Ch1 Ch2 Action Operation and view Data written Release Default state Press 0 1 1 0 Write Write Ch1 Ch2 Action Operation and view Data written Release Default state Press R button Release Press L button Release Press L button 0 0 1 Ch1 Ch2 0 1 0 Ch3 1 0 ...

Page 549: ...dresses set for the Selector Switch are the following states When values of multiple device addresses are 1 When values of all device addresses are 0 When the value of the device address of the return channel is 1 Use Text Manager Select this check box to use the text registered in the Text Manager as the Registration Text for each channel List of Notch settings This list shows the notch settings ...

Page 550: ...screen Ch1 Makes Ch1 the default knob position Writes 1 to the device address configured for Ch1 writes 0 to the device addresses configured for the other channels Ch2 Makes Ch2 the default knob position Writes 1 to the device address configured for Ch2 writes 0 to the device addresses configured for the other channels Ch3 Makes Ch3 the default knob position Writes 1 to the device address configur...

Page 551: ...on page 2 68 Text Enter the Registration Text for the channel The characters that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Format tab For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on page 2 6 Text ID To use the text registered in the Text Manager as the Registration Text for the channel specify the ID number from 1 to 32000 Click to display Text Manager The text ID setting i...

Page 552: ...und colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Flange Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons color 256 colors monochrome 1...

Page 553: ... and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 554: ...ed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on page 2 6 Size Sets the character size 8 to 128 Can only be set when Stroke is selected Style Selects Regular or Bold for text style Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Ta...

Page 555: ...0 the condition is not satisfied and the Selector Switch is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Selector Switch is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Selector Switch from the following Always enable The Selector Switch is always enabled While ON Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does ...

Page 556: ...ditor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure re...

Page 557: ...e as the visible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition...

Page 558: ...is check box to display disable touch sounds for this part Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 To enable touch sounds on the MICRO I select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System ta...

Page 559: ...hether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this pa...

Page 560: ...mitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displayed...

Page 561: ...lose to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Selector Switch on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing ...

Page 562: ...position is written to the device address when the button is released 9 Potentiometer HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P D0 0 Value of slider at displayed position 105 127 Value of slider at displayed position D0 127 MICRO I D0 Value of slider at displayed position 0 0 Write to device address External device Default state Press R button Release Press L button Release O...

Page 563: ...r parts 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Potentiometer 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Potentiometer 3 Double click the dropped Potentiometer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 564: ...the Potentiometer For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Minimum Specify the minimum value that can be entered The minimum value differs depending on the data type Maximum Specify the maximum value that can be entered The maximum value differs depending on the data type Destination Device Address Specify the destination word device Click to display the Tag Editor For the dev...

Page 565: ... color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Slider Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from...

Page 566: ...or the button Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Buttons X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and...

Page 567: ... is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Potentiometer is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Potentiometer is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Potentiometer from the following Always enable The Potentiometer is always enabled While ON Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Button Does not op...

Page 568: ...to serve as the input condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condit...

Page 569: ...as the visible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition i...

Page 570: ...s check box to display disable touch sounds for this part Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 To enable touch sounds on the MICRO I select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab...

Page 571: ...ether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this par...

Page 572: ...itted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displayed ...

Page 573: ...lose to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Potentiometer on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing ov...

Page 574: ...9 Potentiometer 8 172 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 575: ...1 1 How the Pilot Lamp is Used Pilot Lamp parts display drawing objects The value of a bit device is used to switch the drawing object displayed Switch and display pictures by values of device addresses Chapter 9 Lamps 1 Pilot Lamp HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I External device 0 1 ...

Page 576: ... Pilot Lamps 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Lamps and then click Pilot Lamp 2 Click a point on the Edit screen where you wish to place the Pilot Lamp 3 Double click the dropped Pilot Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode ...

Page 577: ...he same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well No Flash only ON Displays the drawing object for the ON state when the trigger condition is satisfied Flash ON Flash When the condition is satisfied and the value of the trigger device address is 1 the object flashes alternates between the drawing object for the ON and OFF states at fixed intervals The flash...

Page 578: ...ess is LM0 0 Displayed drawing object Trigger Condition Device Address LM0 value 1 1 0 0 Action Mode Value of Flash Trigger Device Address M0 0 1 1 Displays OFF drawing object Action Displays ON drawing object Flashing Displays OFF drawing object The lamp will neither turn on or flash if the trigger conditions are not met Lamp trigger conditions are configured on the Trigger Condition tab ...

Page 579: ...splay no drawing object in the OFF state 1 Advanced mode only Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 16...

Page 580: ...een X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts Sets width and height to define the size of parts The minimum size varies based on the item selected for Image Type Standard The minimum size varies based on the selected item and the maximum size is a base screen size Picture W 2 to base screen horizontal size H 2 to base screen vertical size Width He...

Page 581: ...fication Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom This option can only be con...

Page 582: ...ager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting You can specify the character spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 to 100 T...

Page 583: ...is While ON and Device Address is LM0 When LM0 is 0 condition is not satisfied so Lamp displays OFF graphic When LM0 is 1 condition is satisfied so Lamp displays ON graphic Trigger Type Selects the condition to turn on the Pilot Lamp from the following While ON Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Condition Notsatisfied Condition Satisfied Lamp Displays...

Page 584: ... page 2 1 Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the on condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the...

Page 585: ...he visible condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is se...

Page 586: ...is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 587: ...at created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be disp...

Page 588: ...Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts f...

Page 589: ...se to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Pilot Lamp on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 590: ...ied word device is used to switch the drawing object to be displayed Switch and display pictures by values of device addresses 2 Multi State Lamp HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I D0 bit15 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 D0 0001 bit0 bit3 D0 0010 bit0 bit3 D0 0000 bit0 bit3 State 0 State 1 State 2 OFF None ...

Page 591: ...e 1 State 2 The conditions to display the picture set by the OFF state on the screen are as follows Y is selected under Flash on the State tab and the trigger condition is not satisfied Switching Method on the General tab is Bit Number and the all bit in the device address are 0 or a bit not allocated a picture is 1 Switching Method on the General tab is Value and the value of device address is a ...

Page 592: ... State Lamps 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Lamps and then click Multi State Lamp 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Multi State Lamp 3 Double click the dropped Multi State Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode ...

Page 593: ...e address D0 corresponds to the following pictures and the OFF state is None Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits bit15 bit0 bit3 Value of Trigger Device Address D0 Picture State 0 State 1 State 2 None OFF Display picture for bit 0 Display picture for bit 1 Display picture for bit 2 No picture Display picture for bit 1 Display picture for bit 2 0001 0010 0100 1000 11...

Page 594: ...cture for bit 2 Display picture for OFF state Display picture for bit 1 Display picture for bit 2 0001 0010 0100 1000 1110 1100 State 0 State 1 State 1 State 2 State 2 Picture to display Bit state of Trigger Device Address D0 Action If multiple bits are 1 display the picture for the lowest order bit If all bits in the device address are 0 or if a bit with no associated picture becomes 1 display th...

Page 595: ...9 Lamps Trigger Device Address Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching the drawing object Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 ...

Page 596: ...he display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts Sets width and height to define the size of parts The minimum size varies based on the item selected for Image Type Standard The minimum size varies based on...

Page 597: ...an Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left Center Right Center Left For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction T...

Page 598: ...View Browser if Standard is selected under Image Type on the View tab or Picture Manager if Picture is selected This allows you to change the drawing object to display Text Shows the registration text Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the Registration Text Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared Text ID Shows the Text ID Double clicking the cell displays the Text M...

Page 599: ...ialog box where you can change the Windows Font This setting can only be changed when Windows is selected for Font on the Registration Text tab Line Spacing Shows the line spacing for Windows Font Double clicking the cell allows you to change the line spacing 0 to 100 This setting can only be changed when Windows is selected for Font on the Registration Text tab Character Pitch Shows the character...

Page 600: ...ng is only enabled if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared For details refer to Chapter 2 Windows Font on page 2 13 Browse Select the drawing object to use for the lamp part Clicking this button opens the View Browser if Standard is selected under Image Type on the View tab or Picture Manager if Picture is selected Image Shows the selected drawing object Foreground Color Background Color Sele...

Page 601: ...M0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Multi State Lamp is hidden While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Multi State Lamp is displayed Trigger Type Selects the condition to display the Multi State Lamp from the following Always visible The Multi State Lamp is always displayed While ON Displays the Multi State Lamp when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Show Co...

Page 602: ...gured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigg...

Page 603: ...ns tab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 604: ...t created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displ...

Page 605: ... Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 ...

Page 606: ...o No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Multi State Lamp on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over ...

Page 607: ...ssing the keypad or key buttons touch the Numerical Input to switch it to entry mode In entry mode the value of device address is displayed until a value is entered The Numerical Input can perform the following functions Write a value entered with the keypad or key buttons to a device address Display the current value of a device address Enter and display decimal numbers Display the entered value ...

Page 608: ...ome tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Input 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Input 3 Double click the dropped Numerical Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Data Over tab Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 609: ...se the Numerical Input Use as Numerical Input Uses the Numerical Input to enter or display values Use as Display for Keypad Uses the Numerical Input as a part to display the value entered with a Keypad Display the Minimum value specified with Data Over Uses the Numerical Input as a part to display the minimum value of a Numerical Input switched to input mode Display the Maximum value specified wit...

Page 610: ...selected for Type and the Adjust location automatically check box is cleared Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 Data Type Selects the type of data for the value For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Digits Specifies the digits to display The range of digits that can be set varies based on the displa...

Page 611: ...ect this check box to show a blank display if the value is 0 If the value is zero and it is not displayed the unit set on the Format tab is also not displayed Even if the Do not display when the value is zero check box is selected 0 is displayed when the value is not 0 Display the minus sign Select this check box to display the negative sign when displaying negative values This option can only be ...

Page 612: ...of device address to maximum value Entry mode Display value of device address Display mode Display focus Entry mode Display value of device address Display mode 1234 Operations and display 1234 99999 10000 1234 10000 Value of Destination Device Address Numerical Input display Keypad display Action 1234 10000 1234 10000 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 99999 10000 10000 10000 1234 1234 10000 1000...

Page 613: ...he Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Use Reference Device Address 1 Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word device by the value of this device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settin...

Page 614: ...splay mode Display value of device address Display mode Display value of device address Entry mode Write value to device address Entry mode Display value of device address Display mode Display value of device address Entry mode Display focus Entry mode Display focus Entry mode Display value of device address Display mode 1234 567 1234 567 1234 567 999 567 999 567 999 567 999 333 999 333 567 1234 O...

Page 615: ...r Palette Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Only the text is displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors ...

Page 616: ...Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 617: ...e set when Standard is selected for Font Align Text Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Text Color Selects the color of displayed text color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This option can configure the tex...

Page 618: ...t can be displayed with this function is 4 characters The fifth and subsequent characters of a character string are not displayed However if Windows Font is set for the specified Text ID characters all the characters are displayed If a carriage return CR is included the characters after the CR are not displayed Trigger Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to...

Page 619: ...t Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed 1234 1234 1234 1234 Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under Flash 0 1 MICRO I External device Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color under Flash Plate Color under Flash 1234 1234 1234 1234 Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address...

Page 620: ...ls are set in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Text Color Selects the color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades of text when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Selec...

Page 621: ...on page 2 68 Select UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD4 B or BCD8 EB for Data Type under the General tab and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum and Maximum as an integer Example To set a value of 1 25 for the upper limit enter 125 If the value of the device address to display exceeds the data range that can be processed for the data type selected under Data Format on t...

Page 622: ... Over Report Select this check box to write 1 in the Report Device Address when the entered value or the value of the device address to display exceeds the allowable range Report Device Address Specifies the Report Device Address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Operations and display 0 0 Ente...

Page 623: ...ion is not satisfied and the Numerical Input is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Input is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Input from the following Always enable The Numerical Input is always enabled While ON Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I Condition Not satisfied 0 LM0 Co...

Page 624: ...en While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Comment Used for entering a comment for the input condition The maximum number is 80 characters 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Valu...

Page 625: ... condition This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for...

Page 626: ... displayed by 60 Arithmetic Formulas Arithmetic formulas can be specified by freely combining multiple kinds of data and operators in the following format There is no limit on the number of data items or number of operators However the maximum number is 120 characters Round brackets can be used External device MICRO I D0 700 42000 60 Write value of entered value divided by 60 42000 Numerical Input...

Page 627: ...ckets and Item Description Arithmetic operators Sets the arithmetic operators Addition Adds and Subtraction Subtracts from Multiplication Multiplies and Division Divides by Modulo Calculates remainder after dividing by Bit operator Sets the bit operator Logical AND Calculates the logical product AND of each bit of and Logical OR Calculates the logical sum OR of each bit of and Logical XOR exclusiv...

Page 628: ...r or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part If...

Page 629: ...ted Numerical Input No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not dis...

Page 630: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Numerical Input on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 631: ...00 999 999 D100 999 Press Numerical Input Write value to device address Press ENT Display value of device address Entry mode Display value of device address Entry mode Close standard keypad Display standard keypad Enter 999 Display value of device address Display mode Display value of device address Display mode When the following operations are performed entry mode is canceled and the current val...

Page 632: ...To clear the System Area 2 numerical input setting complete bit or the numerical input setting cancel bit write 1 to System Area 1 Numerical Input Setting Clear bit address number 1 bit 10 To automatically clear these bits when the Numerical Input keypad is pressed in entry mode select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area automatically check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box ...

Page 633: ...ions Write the character codes for text entered with the keypad or key buttons to device addresses Display the character codes in current values of device addresses as text Display entered text as asterisk Enter Kanji characters 2 Character Input HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P D100 D101 4847 Hex H G 2053 Hex 4552 Hex 4945 Hex 5300 Hex E R D102 D103 D104 NULL S S MI...

Page 634: ...n the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Character Input 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Character Input 3 Double click the dropped Character Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 635: ...popup screen for the standard keypad For details refer to Chapter 5 4 3 Standard Keypad Popup Screen on page 5 25 Standard Hiragana Uses the standard keypad for entering full width characters The standard keypad is the keypad configured as the popup screen for the standard keypad For details refer to Chapter 5 4 3 Standard Keypad Popup Screen on page 5 25 Popup Uses a keypad configured as a popup ...

Page 636: ...address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Use Reference Device Address 1 Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word device by the value of this device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 For details o...

Page 637: ...00 Hex 5300 Hex C R O I NULL NULL S NULL 4D49 Hex M I 4352 Hex 4F49 Hex 0000 Hex 0000 Hex C R O I NULL NULL NULL NULL Enter MICROI Length of the string is 6 Check box Selected Check box Cleared Character Input display MICROI_ Value of destination device address HG SERIES MICROI MICROI_ HG SERIES MICROI Character Input display Value of destination device address Values updated to 8th character NULL...

Page 638: ...us Entry mode Write character codes to device addresses Entry mode Enter IDEC Deletes text E C IDEC_ HG_ _ IDEC_ Action Operations and display Value of Destination Device Address Only one Numerical Input or one Character Input set to Always Entry Mode can be configured for one screen Enter text Enter IDEC Press Character Input Press ENT 4944 Hex 4543 Hex I D Display text being entered Entry mode D...

Page 639: ...Display mode Display focus Entry mode Display focus Entry mode Display values of device addresses as text Display mode Display values of device addresses as text Display mode Move focus from Character Input A to B Write character codes to device addresses Entry mode Display text being entered Entry mode Write character codes to device addresses Entry mode 4352 Hex 4F20 Hex 4D49 Hex 534D Hex 4152 H...

Page 640: ...e Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Only the text is displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the f...

Page 641: ...he X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to base screen horizontal size H 20 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 642: ...nt Magnification Can only be set when Japanese European Central European Baltic or Cyrillic is selected for Font Align Text Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Text Color Selects the color of displayed text color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette...

Page 643: ...ypad popup screen 3003 Write 6 to D100 and 100 to D101 Font number Popup screen No 1stword 3rdword 2ndword Font number 1 Japanese 2 European 6 Central European 7 Baltic 8 Cyrillic Popup screen No 1 to 3015 Trigger Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to use as the trigger to switch the text and plate colors Click to display the Tag Editor For the device addr...

Page 644: ...ternately displayed Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under Flash 0 1 MICRO I External device HG SERIES HG SERIES HG SERIES HG SERIES Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color under Flash Plate Color under Flash Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under Flash MICRO I External device HG SE...

Page 645: ... intervals are set in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Text Color Selects the color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades of text when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palet...

Page 646: ...tisfied and the Character Input is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Character Input is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Character Input from the following Always enable The Character Input is always enabled While ON Enables the Character Input when the value of device address is 1 LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Operational Condition Satisfied Condi...

Page 647: ...when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Comment Used for entering a comment for the input condition The maximum number is 80 characters 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Va...

Page 648: ...s option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type ...

Page 649: ...elect this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 To enable touch sounds on the MICRO I select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the S...

Page 650: ...r or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part If...

Page 651: ...ter Input No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displayed For...

Page 652: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Character Input on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 653: ...2 Hex 4945 Hex 5300 Hex E R D102 D103 D104 S NULL I E S I E S NULL S Press Character Input Write text character codes to device addresses Press ENT Display values of device addresses as text Entry mode Display values of device addresses as text Entry mode Close standard keypad Display standard keypad Enter text as HG SERIES Display values of device addresses as text Display mode Display values of ...

Page 654: ...nt and popup screen with this setting will change simultaneously with the text group change and text can be entered with the same font as the text group Specify the same device address in the Change Text Group by Device Address on Text Manager as the Trigger Device Address for this setting External device MICRO I HG_ HG SERIES_ HG SERIES D100 4847 Hex H G D100 D101 4847 Hex H G 2053 Hex 4552 Hex 4...

Page 655: ...aracters in the Character Input Configuration Procedure 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Character Input 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you place the Character Input 3 Double click the dropped Character Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Select the Standard Hiragana as the Type on the General tab HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V ...

Page 656: ... select the 16x16 as the Size 6 Click OK The Properties of Character Input dialog box closes 7 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 8 Click the Font Kanji Dictionary Data tab and then select the Use Kanji dictionary data check box 9 Click OK ...

Page 657: ...mmunicating with the MICRO I To change Communication Settings click Change to display the Communication Settings dialog box Change Communicate with Port and Baud Rate For details refer to Chapter 24 1 Communicating with the MICRO I on page 24 1 13 On the confirmation message click Yes The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project files start downloading When finished downloading an ...

Page 658: ... 2 Press the Kanji to switch it to Kanji input mode 3 Enter the reading of Kanji with Hiragana The maximum number is 32 characters Example Press や ま た and then Small when you enter や ま だ External device MICRO I あ い う え お か き く け こ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね の は ひ ふ へ ほ ま み む め も や ゆ よ ら り る れ ろ ー わ を ん BS CLR CAN ENT Kanji Alphabet Num Sign Small SP あ い う え お か き く け こ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね...

Page 659: ...る れ ろ ー わ を ん BS CLR CAN ENT Kanji Alphabet Num Sign Small SP やまだ 山田 ヤマダ 山だ 耶麻だ ヤマだ あ い う え お か き く け こ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね の は ひ ふ へ ほ ま み む め も や ゆ よ ら り る れ ろ ー わ を ん BS CLR CAN ENT Kanji Alphabet Num Sign Small SP やまだ 山田 ヤマダ 山だ 耶麻だ ヤマだ Characters exceeding the number of Input Digits or the number of Display Digits are deleted あ い う え お か き く け こ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね の は ひ ふ へ ほ ...

Page 660: ...oncludes entering Kanji characters to the Character Input あ い う え お か き く け こ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね の は ひ ふ へ ほ ま み む め も や ゆ よ ら り る れ ろ ー わ を ん BS CLR CAN ENT Kanji Alphabet Num Sign Small SP 山田 たろう 太郎 田老 足ろう たろう 太朗 On the simulator you can not enter Kanji characters with the Character Input あ い う え お か き く け こ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね の は ひ ふ へ ほ ま み む め も や ゆ よ ら り る れ ろ ー わ を ん BS CL...

Page 661: ...osed by pressing close on the popup screen s title bar or another Character Input is pressed and selected before finished entering the text by pressing ENT entry mode is canceled and 1 is not written to the System Area 2 Character Input Setting Cancel bit address number 3 bit 5 To clear the System Area 2 character input setting complete bit or the character input setting cancel bit write 1 to Syst...

Page 662: ...move or scale the displayed picture according to value of device address Switch and display pictures by value of device address 3 Picture Display HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I D0 bit15 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 D0 0001 bit0 bit3 D0 0010 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 ...

Page 663: ...ition by values of device addresses MICRO I Picture List 5 x 100 ms 5 x 100 ms 5 x 100 ms Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 External device MICRO I Display picture at X 0 Y 0 Move picture to X 300 Y 250 Move picture to X 600 Y 500 X coordinate D100 0 Y coordinate D101 X coordinate D100 Y coordinate D101 X coordinate D100 Y coordinate D101 0 300 250 600 500 ...

Page 664: ...500 from the center of picture When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared all the pictures are displayed with the same size as Pic0 External device MICRO I Shrink picture to W 180 H 120 Scale picture to W 360 H 240 Scale picture to W 720 H 480 Width D100 180 Height D101 Width D100 Height D101 Width D100 Height D101 120 360 240 720 480 External device MICR...

Page 665: ...plays 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Picture Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Picture Display 3 Double click the dropped Picture Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 666: ...Example When Bit Number is selected and the bits of trigger device address D0 are allocated to the following pictures Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits bit15 bit0 bit3 Trigger device address D0 Picture Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 0001 Picture to display Trigger device address D0 bit state 0010 0100 1000 Display picture for bit 0 Display picture for bit 1 Display picture for bi...

Page 667: ...d Period Switches the pictures to display at a regular interval in picture number order on the picture list Example When Fixed Period is selected and the following pictures are allocated to the picture list Switches the pictures to display at a regular interval in picture number order on the picture list Interval Specifies the interval to switch pictures as 2 to 600 100 ms units This option can on...

Page 668: ...dress for the X coordinate is D100 and a device address for the Y coordinate is D101 The picture is moved to the values of D100 and D101 0 0 300 250 600 500 Position of picture to display Value of the Y coordinate device address D101 Value of the X coordinate device address D100 0 0 300 250 600 500 Width Specifies the word device that is the width of the picture Click to display the Tag Editor For...

Page 669: ...ynamic Rotation dialog box For details refer to Dynamic Rotation Dialog Box on page 10 64 Only the top layer is valid if the picture is NMF NV Metafile When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared all the pictures are displayed with the same size as Pic0 When moving and scaling pictures set the values of device addresses so the picture is not moved or scale...

Page 670: ...For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Use Custom Settings Select this check box to configure the range of values to read from the Source Device Address the range of the rotation angle the coordinate point of the center point that will serve as the pivot point for rotation When this check box is cleared rotate the picture with the minimum value is 0 the maximum value is a fi...

Page 671: ...um and maximum values that can be specified will depend on the data type selected by Data Type For details about data types refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 If Device Address is selected specify the word device to be read Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 When the Minimum is bi...

Page 672: ...points outside the screen s display area can also be specified as the pivot point of rotation If the size of both the width and height of the pictures is odd the center of picture is the origin If the width is even the left side of the center of picture is the origin If the height is even the top side of the center of picture is the origin Width Odd Height Odd Center of picture is origin Width Eve...

Page 673: ... as the pivot point for rotation perform one of the following operations For the coordinates the X coordinate and Y coordinate of the center point are displayed with the center of the picture as the origin Double click on the displayed picture Select and drag the mark indicating the center point or move with the cursor key Center Point Point ...

Page 674: ... the Picture Manager where you can specify the picture The picture number Pic number and the file name of the registered picture are displayed Remove Deletes the registered picture from the list Up Shifts the selected settings upward in the list Down Shifts the selected settings downward in the list X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is define...

Page 675: ...V4 User s Manual 10 69 3 Picture Display 10 Data Displays Size W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 2 to base screen horizontal size H 2 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 676: ...cts the condition to enable the Picture Display from the following Example When Trigger Type is While ON Device Address is LM0 and While not satisfying the condition is Not show Picture Display While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Picture Display does not display the picture While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Picture Display displays the picture LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 ...

Page 677: ... characters While not satisfying the condition Selects operation of parts when condition is not satisfied While ON Enables the Picture Display when the value of device address is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data While OFF Enables the Picture Display when the value of device address is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Pictur...

Page 678: ...ab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 679: ...lect that created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will ...

Page 680: ...up Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 part...

Page 681: ...ced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Picture Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing...

Page 682: ...tating and displaying a picture by the values of device addresses 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Picture Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Picture Display 3 Double click the dropped Picture Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Click the View tab ...

Page 683: ...ta Displays 5 Registers the pictures to display on the Picture List Double click pic0 Unregistered Picture Manager is displayed 6 Click Import Open dialog box is displayed 7 Specify the image file and then click Open The picture is saved in Picture Manager ...

Page 684: ...3 Picture Display 10 78 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 8 Specify the image file and then click Select The picture is saved in Settings 9 Repeat steps 5 through 8 and register all pictures for switching ...

Page 685: ...WindO I NV4 User s Manual 10 79 3 Picture Display 10 Data Displays 10 Click the General tab 11 Select the Dynamic Rotation check box and then click Edit ...

Page 686: ...that will be used to rotate and display the picture For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 14 Specify the maximum of the value to read from the Source Device Address in the Maximum under the Range of Value Rotate the picture with the minimum value is 0 and the Range of Angle to rotate is 0 to 360 degrees 15 Click OK The Dynamic Rotation dialog box closes 16 Change the settin...

Page 687: ...HG5G 4G 3G V only 2 This is applicable for HG4G 3G with a video interface only 3 Recording sound function is for HG4G 3G only 4 Video Display HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I Play Play Stop Back Next SD memory card Movie Files AVI format MP4 format Movie File List movie lst HG4G HG3G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V 1 2 Video Camera Microphone Images Audio MICRO I Play S...

Page 688: ...reen the video display will not display anything If a video display on a popup screen is moved outside the display area of the screen the movie playback and displayed video will stop Depending on the size of the video display the displayed image may be shrunk When the frame size of the movie file to be played is less than or equal to half the size of the Video Display the movie file cannot be play...

Page 689: ...r the Video Display 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Video Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display 3 Double click the dropped Video Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced Mode ...

Page 690: ...elects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to display one of the images from the video interface Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen Selects and plays files using the File Screen For details refer to 4 4 File Screen on page 10 92 Play the Movie File List Plays movie files in order of ID number on the movie file list It is a list of movie files that have been registered in the Multimedia Function...

Page 691: ...lect the check box and specify the bit number of a bit device or word device if you want to switch between display in full screen or not using the value of a device address Full screen is displayed when the value of a device address is changed from 0 to 1 Full screen ends when the value is changed from 1 to 0 Full screen can be ended with a Key Button Restore When the full screen ends with the Key...

Page 692: ...e 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange Click Pattern to display the Pattern Pa...

Page 693: ...Pattern to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Buttons Buttons Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0...

Page 694: ...b is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 695: ... whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this ...

Page 696: ...itted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not displayed ...

Page 697: ...ced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Video Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing o...

Page 698: ...der Page No Displays the current page number Folder Up button Moves to a folder that is 1 level higher in the hierarchy 123000 avi Modified Date 2011 3 13 13 00 30 Page No 1 File Screen DRIVE SD Card HGDATA01 RECORD 20110313 Update Page Up Page Down Select File Name Size 120000 avi 121500 avi 123000 avi 124500 avi 130000 avi 512 000 000 512 000 000 512 000 000 512 000 000 512 000 000 Folder Up Clo...

Page 699: ...own Moves down by one page Select Selects the file or folder that is in focus If a folder has been selected this will open the folder and display its contents File Name Displays a list of the files and folders in the currently selected folder Size For files this displays the file size bytes For folders this is displayed as Folder File names should be alphanumeric characters only Movie files that m...

Page 700: ...e External Memory Device folder HGDATA01 1 Press to select HGDATA01 and then press Select The contents of the HGDATA01 folder will be displayed 2 Press to select RECORD and then press Select The contents of the RECORD folder will be displayed Modified Date 2011 3 13 13 00 30 Page No 1 File Screen DRIVE SD Card Update Page Up Page Down Select File name Size Folder HGDATA00 Folder HGDATA01 Folder HG...

Page 701: ...y key or when you execute a Multi Command the movie file plays Modified Date 2011 3 13 13 00 30 Page No 1 File Screen DRIVE SD Card HGDATA01 RECORD Update Page Up Page Down Select File name Size Folder 20110312 Folder 20110313 Folder 20110314 Folder 20110315 Folder Up 1 2 123000 avi Modified Date 2011 3 13 13 00 30 Page No 1 File Screen DRIVE SD Card HGDATA01 RECORD 20110313 File name Size 120000 ...

Page 702: ...ex 3233 Hex D102 4B00 Hex D100 D101 3132 Hex 1 2 3334 Hex D102 4B00 Hex D100 D101 3536 Hex 5 6 3738 Hex D102 4B00 Hex 4 3 K 7 NULL 1 3 2 8 NULL K NULL K NULL Always show Show according to values of device addresses Goal Message details Display D100 D101 D102 Display only always shown text Do not show if upper byte of the source device address starting address number is 00 NULL Value of Source Devi...

Page 703: ...f device address MICRO I Line A A 1234K pcs pcs Line B 8K pcs Message details Line A 1234K pcs Line B 5678K pcs External device MICRO I HG SERIES HG SERIES D0 D0 D0 D0 Lower byte Upper byte 0x00 Lower byte Upper byte 0xF7 Lower byte Upper byte 0x90 0xF7 0x00 0xF7 Lower byte Upper byte 0x90 0xF7 Text color Plate color Text color Plate color ...

Page 704: ...n the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Message Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Message Display 3 Double click the dropped Message Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 705: ... text registered in Text Manager and display it as text enter 1 to 8 in Text for the Text ID at the position to display the value of device address as text The channels configured under Data are allocated in order from the first The text is displayed according to the values of device addresses in order from the first reference device address However in the following situations is not handled as te...

Page 706: ...ckslash enter a backslash before the backslash Example Settings Lists the settings for the text to display according to values of device addresses No Shows the channel numbers Ch1 to Ch8 Device Address Specifies the word device that stores the values read as character codes Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device...

Page 707: ...or Palette Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Only the text is displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors...

Page 708: ...d Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to base screen horizontal size H 5 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 709: ... Can only be set when Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic is selected for Font Align Text Horizontal Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right Center Left Left Right If Top Center or Bottom is selected for Align Text Vertical Center or Right can be set as this option If Center Top is selected for Align Tex...

Page 710: ...mbols representing voiced and semi voiced sounds of single byte characters are shown as follows When using text displayed according to values of device addresses the characters are counted as single byte characters and the display area for the characters is indicated by dotted lines Therefore when the text to display according to values of device addresses is double byte characters the display are...

Page 711: ...ay a message and align left Voltage abnormal V Vo oltage abnormal Vol ltage abnormal When the Scroll check box is selected the number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases If the MICRO I displays an error message clear the Scroll check box or reduce the number of parts on the screen When the scan time for the screen becomes longer and when the part that has its Scroll check bo...

Page 712: ...ext Color or in Plate Color on the View tab will be displayed When the value of device address is 1 the color displayed and specified in Text Color or Plate Color under the Specify Color Text Color Selects the color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades of the text when switching Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate colo...

Page 713: ...ssignments that are stored to device addresses are given below For color data refer to Appendix 1 Color Number on page A 1 D0 Lower byte Upper byte 0x00 Lower byte Upper byte 0xF7 D0 Lower byte Upper byte 0x14 0x16 D0 0x00 0xF7 Lower byte Upper byte D0 0x14 0x16 HG SERIES HG SERIES MICRO I External device Text color Plate color Text color Plate color Device Address bit bit 15 8 bit 7 bit 0 Upper b...

Page 714: ...d by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under Flash 0 1 MICRO I External device HG SERIES HG SERIES HG SERIES HG SERIES Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color under Flash Plate Color under Flash Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device...

Page 715: ...s button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This option can only be configured when the Change Display Colors check box is cleared or selected and Specify Color is selected Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This option can only b...

Page 716: ...rigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Message Display from the following Example When Trigger Type is While ON Device Address is LM0 and While not satisfying the condition is Not display message While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Message Display does not display the message While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Message Display displays the message LM0 MICRO...

Page 717: ...Selects the operation of the part when the condition is not satisfied While ON Enables the Message Display when the value of device address is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message While OFF Enables the Message Display when the value of device address is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message While satisfying the condition Enable...

Page 718: ...tab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 719: ...elect that created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will...

Page 720: ...oup Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 par...

Page 721: ...aced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Message Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousin...

Page 722: ...Method of String Data NULL terminating character Device address Stored value Displayed string Upper byte Lower byte D100 31 Hex 32 Hex 12 D101 33 Hex 34 Hex 34 D102 35 Hex 0 5 NULL terminating character Device address Stored value Displayed string Upper byte Lower byte D100 32 Hex 31 Hex 21 D101 34 Hex 33 Hex 43 D102 0 35 Hex When handling values of device addresses as character codes 0 is handled...

Page 723: ...play is used to switch the displayed message according to the value of a word device 6 Message Switching Display HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I External device D0 0001 bit0 bit3 D0 0010 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 D0 bit15 bit0 bit3 Msg0 Drying Heating Cooling Msg1 Msg2 Message details Drying Heating Cooling ...

Page 724: ...On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Message Switching Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Message Switching Display 3 Double click the dropped Message Switching Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mod...

Page 725: ...he status of bits in a device address Example When Bit Number is selected and the bits of trigger device address D0 are allocated to the following messages Switches the message to display according to the status of the bits bit15 bit0 bit3 Trigger device address D0 Msg0 Drying Heating Cooling Msg1 Msg2 Message 0001 Message to display 0010 0100 1000 Display Msg0 Action Display Msg1 Display Msg2 111...

Page 726: ... the value of a device address Example When Value is selected and the trigger device addresses D0 are allocated to the following messages Switches the message to display according to the value of the device address 0 1 2 Value of Trigger Device Address D0 Msg0 Drying Heating Cooling Msg1 Msg2 Message details 0 Message to display 1 2 3 Display Msg0 Action Display Msg1 Display Msg2 No message Msg0 M...

Page 727: ...lable Text on page 2 6 This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared To display the backslash enter a backslash before the backslash A line feed is added with pressing and holding ALT and ENTER keys Change Selects whether or not to configure Text and Plate per Msg number For N the colors are configured by Text Color on the Format tab and Plate Color on the View ta...

Page 728: ... Switching Display 10 122 WindO I NV4 User s Manual Remove Deletes the registered settings from the list Up Shifts the selected settings upward in the list Down Shifts the selected settings downward in the list ...

Page 729: ...e Color Palette Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Only the text is displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background c...

Page 730: ... X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to base screen horizontal size H 5 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 731: ...ation Can only be set when Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic is selected for Font Align Text Horizontal Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right Center Left Left Right If Top Center or Bottom is selected for Align Text Vertical Center or Right can be set as this option If Center Top is selected for Alig...

Page 732: ...d semi voiced sounds of single byte characters are shown as follows Aligned to le edge Horizontal display Next characters Speed 1 Fastest Sets the scrolling speed 1 to 10 1 is fastest 10 is slowest Start scrolling after displaying message Select this check box to start scrolling after a message is displayed for 2 seconds This check box is cleared This check box is selected After 2 seconds start sc...

Page 733: ...ue of device address is 1 the color displayed and specified in Text Color or Plate Color under the Change Display Colors Text Color Selects the color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades of the text when switching Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades when switching Click this ...

Page 734: ...sh are alternately displayed Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under Flash 0 1 MICRO I External device HG SERIES HG SERIES HG SERIES HG SERIES Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color under Flash Plate Color under Flash Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under Flash MICRO I External dev...

Page 735: ... Flash intervals are set in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Text Color Selects the color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades of text when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades when flashing Click this button to display the Color...

Page 736: ...on is satisfied The Message Switching Display is hidden while the condition is not satisfied Example When Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Message Switching Display is hidden While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Message Switching Display is displayed LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 HG SERIES Condition Not satisfied Condition ...

Page 737: ...on can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click ...

Page 738: ...ions tab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 739: ...can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part...

Page 740: ...No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User...

Page 741: ...aced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Message Switching Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by j...

Page 742: ...g Display Lock Unlock is configured on the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box For the key buttons used with the Alarm List Display refer to Chapter 8 Alarm List Display on page 8 96 The number of the message channel when using the Alarm function that has focus on the Alarm List Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD50 The information about where on the list the message th...

Page 743: ...larm List Displays 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Alarm List Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm List Display 3 Double click the dropped Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode ...

Page 744: ...ess configured on the List tab Example When Use Alarm Log Settings is selected the source device address device address to monitor configured by the Alarm Log function is D0 and the following messages are allocated to the channels D0 0 D0 1 D0 2 D0 3 ID1 Current fault ID2 ID3 ID4 Pump fault High pressure Low air pressure Message Source device address Message to display Bit state of Source device a...

Page 745: ...g 3 300 Pg Up Pg Dwn If all bits in the device address are 0 or if a bit with no associated message becomes 1 display nothing List Simultaneously displays multiple messages Sort Selects the display order when displaying multiple messages Old and New can only be configured when the Use Alarm Log Settings check box is selected Ascending Sorts the list in alphabetic order from A to Z Descending Sorts...

Page 746: ... with sequential addresses Random Configures trigger device addresses for each block number Block No Shows the block numbers in the amount specified by Number of Blocks Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box For details refer to Individual Settings Dialog Box on page 10 141 Trigger Device Address Shows the word device to use as the condition to display messages Double...

Page 747: ...e registered settings from the list Select a block number on the list and click this button to delete the selected settings from the list Settings Example When the number of blocks is 1 and D0 is specified as the trigger device address Message number 1 0 device address bit is D0 0 message number 1 1 device address bit is D0 1 up to message number 1 15 device address bit which is D0 15 D0 0 D0 1 D0...

Page 748: ...or When lines are displayed select this check box and select line color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Lines Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color...

Page 749: ...ck Pattern to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Buttons Buttons Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size ...

Page 750: ...e same color select this check box and select the text color to display color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette When this check box is cleared the color for messages is the text color configured in Text Manager Style Selects Regular or Bold for text style Magnification W H Selects text magnification 0 5 1 to 8 ...

Page 751: ...nification H Height 96 dots When the message is 2 lines 2nd line is not shown Since the alarm line spacing is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed this option is convenient to use when displaying multi line messages Set with Dots Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots Height dots Enter the height 8 to base screen vertical size 3 To compl...

Page 752: ...Display a message and align left Page Up Page Down Page Up Page Down Voltage abnormal Page Up Page Down V Page Up Page Down oltage abnormal Page Up Page Down ltage abnormal When the Scroll check box is selected the number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases If the MICRO I displays an error message clear the Scroll check box or reduce the number of parts on the screen When th...

Page 753: ...the Alarm Log Settings dialog box Coordinates Reference screen list Motor fault Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref High pressure Pump 1 fault Motor fault Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref High pressure Pump 1 fault Motor fault Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref High pressure Pump 1 fault Key bu on Ref Reference screen Key bu ons Up and Dwn 1 Select a message displayed on the Alarm List Display 2 Press the ke...

Page 754: ...n numbers 100 101 102 are automatically specified in order from message number 1 0 Example 2 When screen number 200 has been entered for message number 1 5 Message numbers 1 0 to 1 4 are left unchanged and screen numbers 200 201 202 are automatically specified in order from message number 1 5 Random Specifies a reference screen number 1 to 3000 for each message number Message No Displays the messa...

Page 755: ...ays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use th...

Page 756: ...ermitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not display...

Page 757: ...aced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Alarm List Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mou...

Page 758: ...10 02 Pump1 fault Slct Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Slct Slct Slct...

Page 759: ...Alarm Log Displays 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Alarm Log Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm Log Display 3 Double click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode ...

Page 760: ...rt Selects the display order for alarms that have occurred as Old or New Display Focus on List after changing Screens or occurring Alarms 1 Select this check box to automatically display the focus at the first item in the list after switching screens and when an alarm occurs Display Reference Screen 1 Select this check box to automatically display the reference screen for the alarm that has focus ...

Page 761: ...n the list When an alarm is pressed with no focus displayed the focus is displayed on that alarm When an alarm is pressed that does not have focus when the focus is displayed the focus is moved to that alarm The focus is no longer displayed when an alarm with focus is pressed 1 Advanced mode only Display First Alarm to 1st line on List Always displays the first alarm on the first line of the list ...

Page 762: ... the alarm was recovered from Confirmation Time Shows the time the alarm was confirmed by pressing the key button CHECK Occurrence Message Recovered Confirmed 12 01 12 00 Current fault 12 53 12 54 Title Recovery me Confirma on me Message Occurrence me Up Down Check Select Delete You can drag and drop the sub headings to change the order of items to be displayed on the Alarm Log Display This function...

Page 763: ...D MM DD YY DD MM YY MM DD DD MM non display Time Selects the display type of the time from the following HH MM HH MM SS non display If the title contains a newline the text after the newline is not displayed However if using a Windows font for the selected text ID all the characters are displayed If the title contains a language not supported as standard by the OS the characters may be garbled whe...

Page 764: ...or When lines are displayed select this check box and select line color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Lines Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color...

Page 765: ...k Pattern to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette Buttons Buttons Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1...

Page 766: ...the occurred alarm recovered alarm confirmed alarm and first alarm Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette 1 Advanced mode only W H Selects text magnification 0 5 1 to 8 Flash 1 Select this check box to flash alarms that are displayed on the list The flash interval is specified in Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Rever...

Page 767: ... the message fixed this option is convenient to use when displaying multi line messages Set with Dots Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots Height dots Enter the height 8 to base screen vertical size 3 To completely display a message a height equal to or greater than Magnification H x 16 dots x the number of message lines is required When Magnification H ...

Page 768: ...X and Y coordinates are the upper left corner of the reference screen This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for Reference Screen Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Pump 1 faul...

Page 769: ...s 6 enter the following To specify blocks 1 to 3 1 3 To specify blocks 1 3 6 1 3 6 To specify blocks 1 4 to 6 1 4 6 No Device address 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 13 1 14 1 15 D100 0 D100 1 D100 2 D100 13 D100 14 D100 15 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 13 2 14 2 15 D101 0 D101 1 D101 2 D101 13 D101 14 D101 15 Block 1 Block 2 5 0 5 1 5 2 5 13 5 14 5 15 D104 0 D104 1 D104 2 D104 13 D104 14 D104 15 Block 5 6 0 6 1 6 2 6 13 6 14 6 15...

Page 770: ...er or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed even if no user account has been selected Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited Input Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part Only Permitted security groups can use this part I...

Page 771: ...Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader are not...

Page 772: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Alarm Log Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over ...

Page 773: ...ype Decimal Data Type BIN16 I Digits 5 External device Hex AD2 MICRO I D100 1234 Display Device Address D100 Display Type Hexadecimal Data Type UBIN16 W Digits 4 Display Device Address D100 Display Type Decimal Data Type BCD4 B Digits 4 External device Decimal 123 4 MICRO I D100 1234 Display Device Address D100 Display Type Decimal Data Type BIN16 I Digits 4 Display Floating Point On Floating Digi...

Page 774: ...Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Display 3 Double click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Data Over tab Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 775: ...of digits that can be set varies based on the display type and data type The digits that can be set are as follows Display Type Data Type Digits Decimal display UBIN16 W BIN16 I 1 to 5 UBIN32 D BIN32 L 1 to 10 BCD4 B 1 to 4 BCD8 EB 1 to 8 Float32 F 1 to 10 Hexadecimal display UBIN16 W 1 to 4 UBIN32 D 1 to 8 Display Floating Point Select this check box to display the decimal point When the Display ...

Page 776: ...0001234 Do not display when the value is zero Select this check box to show a blank display if the value is 0 If the value is zero and it is not displayed the unit set on the Format tab is also not displayed Even if the Do not display when the value is zero check box is selected 0 is displayed when the value is not 0 Display the minus sign Select this check box to display the negative sign when di...

Page 777: ...uration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Use Reference Device Address 1 Select this check box and specify a device address to change the source device address by the value of this device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 For details on indirect readi...

Page 778: ...te Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Only the text is displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the ...

Page 779: ... The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to base screen horizontal size H 5 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 780: ...nt is selected specifies the text size 8 to 128 Style Selects Regular or Bold for text style Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font Magnification Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font Align Text Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Text Color Selects the color ...

Page 781: ... CR is included the characters after the CR are not displayed Trigger Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to use as the trigger to switch the text and plate colors Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 When the value of device address is 0 the color specifie...

Page 782: ... and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed 1234 1234 1234 1234 Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under Flash 0 1 MICRO I External device Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color Plate Color on the View tab Text Color under Flash Plate Color under Flash 1234 1234 1234 1234 Flashing Trigger device address under Flash Trigger device address under ...

Page 783: ... Selects the color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades of text when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This option can only be configured when Standard is selected fo...

Page 784: ...es refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 When Device Address is selected these options specify the source word devices Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Select UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD4 B or BCD8 EB for Data Type under the General tab and to display a fractional number ...

Page 785: ...splayed data exceeds the allowable range Report Device Address Specifies the Report Device Address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Example If the value of word device of the reading source is 120 which is higher than the upper limit of 100 or 10 which is below the lower limit of 0 a value of ...

Page 786: ...gger Type is While ON Device Address is LM0 and While not satisfying the condition is Not display Numerical data While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Display does not display the number While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Display displays the number LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 1234 Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Show number Hide number Data o...

Page 787: ...ay when the condition is not satisfied While ON Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device address is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data While OFF Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device address is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data While satisfying the condition Enables the Numerical...

Page 788: ...metic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic formula Only one device address can be set for an arithmetic operation The device address is as specified for Display Device Address under the General tab Value Sets the constant values for the arithmetic formula The values that can be set depend on the data type selected using Data Format under the General tab For details refer to Chapte...

Page 789: ...gical sum OR of each bit of and Logical XOR exclusive OR Calculates the exclusive logical sum XOR of each bit of and Left shift Shifts each bit of to left by bit s Right shift Shifts each bit of to right by bit s Input Examples Description 1 To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result add 1 to the value entered using the Keypad and write the result to the device address To perform the...

Page 790: ...at created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be disp...

Page 791: ...lay No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For ...

Page 792: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Numerical Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over ...

Page 793: ...imes 10 Calendar HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I 12 07 13 45 MICRO I ON Time 10 00 OFF Time 11 00 External device 09 00 10 00 11 00 0 1 10 00 0 1 11 00 0 09 00 Report Device Address M0 Action Time 09 00 09 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 Write Report Device Address M0 value 1 0 0 1 0 Write ON Time OFF Time When Alarm is selected for Calendar Type you can use just the a...

Page 794: ... On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Calendar 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Calendar 3 Double click the dropped Calendar and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 795: ... by writing 1 ON Time or 0 OFF Time to a device address at the configured times Clock Type Selects the items to display for the clock from the following Time Day of the Week Time Date Time Date Day of the Week Time Date Selects the display type of the date from the following YY MM DD MM DD YY DD MM YY MM DD DD MM This option can only be configured when Date Time or Date Day of the Week Time is sel...

Page 796: ...onfigured when the Year check box is cleared Alarm conditions Value Specifies the alarm time as values and the day of the week Year Enter the year 0 to 99 Month Enter the month 1 to 12 Day Enter the day 1 to 31 Day of the Week Select the day of the week Hour Enter the hour 0 to 23 Minute Enter the minute 0 to 59 Second Enter the second 0 to 59 Device Address Configures the alarm time as values of ...

Page 797: ...ween ON Time and OFF Time 1 is written to the Report Device Address Value of device address retained after ON Time elapses 1 0 09 00 09 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 Report Device Address M0 value Time ON Time Turn on MICRO I power Open screen 1 0 09 00 09 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 Report Device Address M0 value Time ON Time Writes 1 to notify that ON Time has already elapsed OFF Time The value of Report Device...

Page 798: ...lange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Only the text is displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flan...

Page 799: ... X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to base screen horizontal size H 5 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 800: ...lected specifies the text size 8 to 128 Style Selects Regular or Bold for text style Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font Magnification Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font Align Text Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 7 Text Color Selects the color of displ...

Page 801: ...and flange are also hidden and the part image is not displayed Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Calendar from the following Example When Trigger Type is While ON Device Address is LM0 and the Not show Calendar check box under While not satisfying the condition is cleared While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Calendar does not display the time While LM0 is 1 the cond...

Page 802: ...number is 80 characters Not show Calendar When this check box is cleared the part image is not displayed when the condition is not satisfied While ON Enables the Calendar when the value of device address is 1 Example When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying the condition While OFF Enables the Calendar when the value of device address is 0 Example When the Not show...

Page 803: ...ons tab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to place the parts on the top layer When drawings and parts overlap those place on the top layer are displayed in preference For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 804: ...reated group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displaye...

Page 805: ...No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User...

Page 806: ...se to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Calendar on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part...

Page 807: ... in a bar chart Display word device values in a peak chart Make the chart flash when the displayed data exceeds the maximum or minimum Chapter 11 Charts 1 Bar Chart HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I D100 50 D200 120 D300 40 External device MICRO I D100 50 D200 120 D300 40 External device MICRO I Range Value Minimum 0 Maximum 100 When Data Over ...

Page 808: ... in the Parts group click Charts and then click Bar Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Bar Chart 3 Double click the dropped Bar Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Data Over tab Scale tab Label tab Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 809: ...nd buttons in the Properties dialog box General Tab Part Name Enter a name for the part The maximum number is 20 characters Chart Type Selects the type of chart from the following items Horizontal Bar Vertical Bar Horizontal Peak Vertical Peak Peak charts only display the tip of the bar chart Horizontal Bar Horizontal Peak ...

Page 810: ...ices Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 If the data displayed in the chart is invalid 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit address number 2 bit 5 and an error message is displayed For details refer to Chapter 4 Processing error on page 4 32 and Chapter 36 Processing error on page 3...

Page 811: ... for the data to display in the chart Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor where you can edit the device address For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Fg Normal Selects the foreground color of the chart when normal color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can ...

Page 812: ... shades Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the background color of the chart when normal Bg Over 1 Selects the background color of the chart when data over color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the background color of the chart when data over Pattern Selects the chart pattern or tonal gra...

Page 813: ... display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a c...

Page 814: ...pacing Chart spacing 100 200 0 Scale not shown Show scale 10 dots 10 dots 10 dots X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to bas...

Page 815: ...ce value Minimum Maximum Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and or maximum The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on the data type selected with Data Format on the General tab For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 When Device Address is selected these options specify the source word devices Click to display...

Page 816: ...h Select this check box to make the chart flash when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range Report Select this check box to write 1 in the Report Device Address when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range Report Device Address Specifies the Report Device Address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Sett...

Page 817: ...ong the scale Can only be set when Float32 F is selected for Data Type under the General tab Floating Digits Sets the number of digits for the fractional parts of numbers 1 to 8 from the number of digits specified for Digits Can only be set when the Display Floating Point check box is selected Font Selects the font used for displayed text from the following Standard Stroke 7 Segment The characters...

Page 818: ...osition Scale Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale divisions Data Over Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for Maximum and Minimum under the Data Over tab Line Type Selects the type of grid lines from the following Solid Dot Dash Long Dash Long Dash Dot Long Dash Dot Dot Color Specifies grid line color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click...

Page 819: ...cters that can be displayed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on page 2 6 Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when text registered in the Text Manager are used for labels Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Inputs characters to be displayed for labels Maximum number is 40 characters Th...

Page 820: ...display Chart data While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the bar chart is not displayed While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the bar chart is displayed Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the bar chart from the following LM0 MICRO I Condi on Not sa sfied 0 LM0 Condi on Sa sfied 1 Show chart Hide chart 100 50 0 100 50 0 Data over does not operate for hidden bar charts Da...

Page 821: ...2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 While ON Enables the bar chart when the value of device address is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data While OFF Enables the bar chart when the value of device address is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data While satisfying the condition Enables the bar chart when the condit...

Page 822: ...mum number is 80 characters While not satisfying the condition Selects operation of the Bar Chart when condition is not satisfied Not display Chart data The plate and flange are displayed but Bar Chart is not displayed Not update Chart data The last updated Bar Chart is displayed The Bar Chart does not change ...

Page 823: ... tab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 824: ...reated group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displaye...

Page 825: ...roup Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 pa...

Page 826: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the bar chart on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part...

Page 827: ...splay the cursor and the date and time at the cursor 2 Line Chart HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I D100 60 80 70 70 90 D101 30 40 40 50 70 D102 10 10 20 10 10 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 There are two types of trend charts a normal trend chart and a pen recorder trend chart If the Data Log data displayed in the chart is deleted t...

Page 828: ...iguration procedure for Line Charts 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Line Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Line Chart 3 Double click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 829: ...atest data is sampled and the latest data is charted from the left edge If the sampled data exceeds the number of display points the entire chart is shifted to the left by the configured scroll size and the display is updated Example Display Points on the X Axis tab is 5 and Number of automatic scrolls when updating display is 1 Ch1 data 30 Ch2 data 10 Display 80 30 90 40 110 40 110 30 5 Opera on ...

Page 830: ...ferent The chart can display a maximum of 20 lines Device Address Display Display the values of multiple continuous device addresses as a single line chart The data size for the device addresses is 16 bits Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the start address number value control status of the continuous device addresses The number of values of device addresses to...

Page 831: ... the beginning when switching screens This option can only be configured when Log Trend Normal or Log Trend Pen Recorder is selected for Chart Type MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I 1234 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 Switch screen Switch screen Base screen 1 Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Display chart from beginning ...

Page 832: ...play the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color...

Page 833: ...nd Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to base screen horizontal size H 5 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 834: ...display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 The maximum number of data that can be displayed is the number of dots on the X axis of the graph the horizontal size of the area displaying the graph When setting the value exceeding the number of dots on the X axis as the Display Points thinned out data is displayed I...

Page 835: ...ddress is selected for Data Type the scroll size can be specified in the word device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 If the value of the device address is smaller than 1 minimum value then the Number of automatic scrolls remains at 1 If the value is larger than Display Points then Scroll Size...

Page 836: ... to Chapter 14 Save the data of Data Log and display in Line Chart on page 14 24 Right Scroll Device Address Left Scroll Device Address The chart can be scrolled to the right or to the left when display updating is stopped This option specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to scroll the chart left or right Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration ...

Page 837: ... configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 For address number assignment refer to Specifying Date and Time with Values of device addresses on page 11 33 This option can only be configured when Display data from specified date check box is selected Specify displaying period To specify the range of data displayed on the chart select this check box and specif...

Page 838: ...apter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Display the chart with the data of the specified date and time as the center when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Date and Time Specify the date and time of the data to display the center of the chart Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page ...

Page 839: ...isplay a scale on a X axis Major Divisions Enter the number of major scale divisions 1 to 20 Minor Divisions Enter the number of minor scale divisions 1 to 20 Color Selects the color of scales color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette If the area for displaying the scale is small the scale will not be displayed properly Sho...

Page 840: ...ger are used for labels Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Inputs characters to be displayed for labels Maximum number is 40 characters The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on page 2 6 Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared...

Page 841: ...on can only be configured when Log Trend Normal or Log Trend Pen Recorder is selected from Chart Type on the General tab 3 This option can only be configured when Device Address Display is selected from Chart Type on the General tab 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 120 Label for Y axis No 1 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 0 Label for Y axis No 2 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 70 Label for Y axis No 3 40 45 50 55 30 35 Lab...

Page 842: ...rt is initially displayed when the display is updated and when it is erased For details refer to Chapter 4 Processing error on page 4 32 and Chapter 36 Processing error on page 36 3 An error occurs in the following states The setting of Origin Minimum or Maximum are invalid or the Minimum and Maximum are the same values Data Type is BCD4 B BCD8 EB or Float32 F and the value cannot be expressed wit...

Page 843: ... and reopened the list is displayed filled from the beginning Trigger Type Always visible Always display the graph While ON The graph is displayed when the value of device address is 1 Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device ...

Page 844: ...are as follows Line Type Specifies the type of line You can also specify it using the value of device address Value Selects the type of line from the following Solid Dot Dash Long Dash Long Dash Dot Long Dash Dot Dot Device Address Specifies the line type using the value of device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device A...

Page 845: ...ess Specifies the line color using the value of device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Line color is specified by the color data When the value of device address is other than the color number the graph is displayed in 255 white For color data refer to Appendix Color Data Corresponden...

Page 846: ...ing Digits Sets the number of digits for the fractional parts of numbers 1 to 8 from the number of digits specified for Digits Can only be set when the Display Floating Point check box is selected Font Selects the font used for displayed text from the following Standard Stroke 7 Segment The characters that can be displayed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on pag...

Page 847: ...lay position Scale Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale divisions Data Over Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for Maximum and Minimum under the Data Over tab Line Type Selects the type of grid lines from the following Solid Dot Dash Long Dash Long Dash Dot Long Dash Dot Dot Color Specifies grid line color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades ...

Page 848: ...box is cleared The characters that can be displayed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on page 2 6 Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when text registered in the Text Manager are used for labels Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Inputs characters to be displayed for labels Maximum nu...

Page 849: ... This option specifies the word device that is the cursor s display position Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 If the value of the device address configured by Cursor Display Position is outside the range of points configured by Display Points on X Axis tab the cursor is displayed at the minimu...

Page 850: ...box and specify the destination word device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 The year month day hour minute and second are stored in continuous devices in order as BCD starting from the specified device address If there is no data at the cursor position 0 is stored in the device address Exampl...

Page 851: ...olor Selects the text color color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Display Type Configures the display type for the date and time data Display items Selects the items to display for the date and time data from the following Time Date Date Time If Date Time is selected the date is displayed centered on the first lin...

Page 852: ...Example When Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the line chart is not displayed While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the line chart is displayed Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the line chart from the following LM0 MICRO I Condi on Not sa sfied 0 LM0 Condi on Sa sfied 1 Show chart Hide chart 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 ...

Page 853: ...ering comments about trigger conditions Maximum number is 80 characters While ON Enables the line chart when the value of device address is 1 While OFF Enables the line chart when the value of device address is 0 While satisfying the condition Enables the line chart when the condition is satisfied 1 0 Hide chart Show chart Hide chart Show chart Show chart Show chart Hide chart Value of device addr...

Page 854: ... is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 855: ...hat created group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be dis...

Page 856: ... Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 parts ...

Page 857: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the line chart on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 858: ...lative change in multiple values of device addresses in real time Display the proportion of the sum of multiple values of device addresses in a stacked bar chart or a pie chart 3 Pie Chart HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I 1 1 1 4 2 1 D100 10 D200 10 D300 10 D100 120 D200 60 D300 30 If the source data is all 0 the chart shows the same proportio...

Page 859: ...re for pie charts 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Pie Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Pie Chart 3 Double click the dropped Pie Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode ...

Page 860: ...e proportion of the sum of the data as a horizontal stacked bar chart Example When displaying the values for three device addresses Vertical Bar Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a vertical stacked bar chart Example When displaying the values for three device addresses Horizontal bar display Ch3 data 0 Ch2 data 0 50 100 30 60 10 50 Ch1 data 0 100 120 150 Propor on 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 15...

Page 861: ...ng error on page 4 32 and Chapter 36 Processing error on page 36 3 No Shows the numbers for the chart Ch1 to Ch10 For Horizontal Bar the numbers are listed in order from the left For Vertical Bar the numbers are listed in order from the top For Pie the numbers are listed clockwise Device Address Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the chart Double clicking the cell displays...

Page 862: ...3 Pie Chart 11 56 WindO I NV4 User s Manual Remove Deletes the registered settings from the list Up Shifts the selected settings upward in the list Down Shifts the selected settings downward in the list ...

Page 863: ...ground Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Flange X Y Sets the display positio...

Page 864: ...3 Pie Chart 11 58 WindO I NV4 User s Manual Size W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to base screen horizontal size H 5 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 865: ... tab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 866: ...reated group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displaye...

Page 867: ...roup Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 pa...

Page 868: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the pie chart on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part...

Page 869: ... Used The meter displays the value of a word device as the movement of a needle Display the value of a word device in a meter 4 Meter HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I D100 0 D100 75 0 100 20 80 40 60 0 100 20 80 40 60 ...

Page 870: ...s 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Meter 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Meter 3 Double click the dropped Meter and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Range tab Scale tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode ...

Page 871: ... Properties dialog box General Tab Part Name Enter a name for the part The maximum number is 20 characters Meter Type Select the type of meter from the following items 90 Degree Meter 180 Degree Meter 270 Degree Meter Example 180 Degree Meter 90 degree meter 180 degree meter 270 degree meter 180 degree meter display Data 0 10 40 75 ...

Page 872: ... move past the left edge when the data value is the minimum or lower The needle stops at the right edge when the data value is the maximum or higher When Device Address is selected for Data Type the minimum and maximum can be specified in the word device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 If the...

Page 873: ...ome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV4 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 None The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed Needle color Plate color Foreground...

Page 874: ...ordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to base screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to base screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to base screen horizontal size H 5 to base screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 875: ... and maximum can be specified in the word device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 If the data displayed in the meter is invalid 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit address number 2 bit 5 and an error message is displayed For details refer to Chapter 4 Processing error on page 4 ...

Page 876: ...mber of digits to be displayed 1 to 10 Can only be set when Float32 F is selected for Data Type under the General tab Display Floating Point Select this check box to display a floating point along the scale Can only be set when Float32 F is selected for Data Type under the General tab Floating Digits Sets the number of digits for the fractional parts of numbers 1 to 8 from the number of digits spe...

Page 877: ...ab is displayed in Advanced mode Place on the Top Layer Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer The parts will have precedence when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it For details refer to Chapter 6 4 Drawings and Parts Overlapping on page 6 5 ...

Page 878: ...ated group For details refer to Chapter 23 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 23 19 Settings No Displays the security group numbers 0 to 15 Group Name Displays the name of the security group Display Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part Only Permitted security groups can display this part If all security groups are set to Permitted this part will be displayed ...

Page 879: ...up Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Prohibited 3 Reader Prohibited Prohibited Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Permitted 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Prohibited Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 For User1 part...

Page 880: ...e to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts Maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the meter on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part ...

Page 881: ...sfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied 0 State of condition Data written 0 Action Write Write Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not ...

Page 882: ...tisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied This function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied State of condition Action Move Move Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied...

Page 883: ...ation procedure for the Bit Write Command 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Bit Write Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Bit Write Command 3 Double click the dropped Bit Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 884: ...e trigger condition is no longer satisfied a 0 is written to the specified bit device 1 State of condition Data written 1 Action Write Write Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied 0 State of condition Data written 0 Action Write Write Condition Condition ...

Page 885: ...e versa Move This function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied State of condition Action Toggle Toggle Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied State of condition Actio...

Page 886: ... when LM0 changes from 0 to 1 Trigger Type Selects the condition to execute the command from the following LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0 Value of device address 1 0 Action Execu...

Page 887: ...ings on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Comment Used for entering comments about trigger conditions ...

Page 888: ...o No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Bit Write Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over...

Page 889: ...e trigger condition is satisfied 2 Word Write Command HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I External device D1 0 100 D1 100 Write Destination word device 100 Value Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied MICRO I External device D0 123 D1 0 D0 123 D1 123 Move Value in device address Destination word device Conditi...

Page 890: ...nger satisfied State of condition Data written Write Action OFF Data Write ON Data Write OFF Data Write ON Data Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Performs arithmetic on the value of source device address and a fixed value or a value of device address...

Page 891: ...ation procedure for the Word Write Command 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Word Write Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Word Write Command 3 Double click the dropped Word Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 892: ...F Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied State of condition Data written Write Action Write Value Value Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied State of condition Data written Write Action Write Value in d...

Page 893: ...ondition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied State of condition Data written Action Result Result Addition Write Addition Write Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Sa...

Page 894: ...the destination word device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Use Reference Device Address 1 Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word device according to the value of the specified device address This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move...

Page 895: ...xecuted when LM0 changes from 0 to 1 Trigger Type Selects the condition to execute the command from the following LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0 Value of device address 1 0 Actio...

Page 896: ...on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Comment Used for entering comments about trigger conditions The m...

Page 897: ...close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Word Write Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mous...

Page 898: ...n the trigger condition is satisfied Switches to the System Mode when the trigger condition is satisfied Resets the current screen when the trigger condition is satisfied 3 Goto Screen Command HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Condition MICRO I Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied MICRO I Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied D51 123 D52 456 D53 0 999 MICRO I Condition Sat...

Page 899: ...tion procedure for the Goto Screen Command 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Goto Screen Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Command 3 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 900: ... Popup Screen For details refer to Chapter 5 4 Popup Screen on page 5 20 Open Device Monitor Screen Opens the Device Monitor Screen For details refer to Chapter 25 2 2 Device Monitor on page 25 21 Close Device Monitor Screen Closes the Device Monitor Screen For details refer to Chapter 25 2 2 Device Monitor on page 25 21 Open Password Screen Opens the Password Screen For details refer to Chapter 2...

Page 901: ...l devices restart as if the Base Screens were switched Screen Number If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen specify the Base Screen number to switch to from 1 to 3000 If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close from 1 to 3015 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen Open Popup Sc...

Page 902: ...ed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1 Trigger Type Selects the condition to execute the command from the following LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0 Value of device address 1 0 Action Exe...

Page 903: ...ttings on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Comment Used for entering comments about trigger condition...

Page 904: ...to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Goto Screen Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing o...

Page 905: ...is satisfied 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P 4 Print Command HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I Printer 2011 1 11 Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Refer to Chapter 32 1 2 Connecting a Printer to MICRO I on page 32 1 for compatible printers and i...

Page 906: ...tion procedure for the Print Command 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Print Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Print Command 3 Double click the dropped Print Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 907: ...nding it to the printer The date and time format depends on the language selected in Language Language is available on the Project Details tab of the Project Settings dialog box The display formats are shown below Japanese YYYY MM DD hh mm English MM DD YYYY hh mm YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute External Memory Device 2 Outputs the screenshot as a file to the external memory device ins...

Page 908: ...can be captured 1 to 999 can be set in HMI Special Data Register LSD65 Default 99 The methods to erase screenshot files saved on the external memory device are as follows To erase files during operation using parts on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings dialog box select the Remove Files check box and the All Screenshot data check box and then configure the trigger device addres...

Page 909: ...cuted when LM0 changes from 0 to 1 Trigger Type Selects the condition to execute the command from the following LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0 Value of device address 1 0 Action ...

Page 910: ... page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Comment Used for entering comments about trigger conditions The max...

Page 911: ...close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Print Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing o...

Page 912: ... 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I Script A D 100 D 100 1 if D 100 50 D 100 0 Executes Script Start Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Complex processes such as conditional branching logical operation arithmetic operation function etc can be programmed in a text format using Scripts For details refer to Chapter 20 Script on page 20 1 ...

Page 913: ...figuration procedure for Script Commands 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Script Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Script Command 3 Double click the dropped Script Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 914: ... 32000 of the script to operate The Script Manager will open when is clicked Select a script from the script list For details refer to Chapter 20 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script selected in the Script Manager Script Displays the contents of the script selected in the Script Manager Once this area is double clicked the Script Editor will open and editing ...

Page 915: ... command from the following LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0 Satisfy the condition Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied Value of device addres...

Page 916: ... if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Period Sets the period for command execution from 1 to 3600 seconds Can only be set if Fixed Period is selected as Trigger Type Co...

Page 917: ...close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Script Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing ...

Page 918: ...mand HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Command Description Bit Write Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device Word Write Writes a value to a word device You can specify the destination address number indirectly and perform arithmetic on the value to be written Goto Screen Switches screens and opens other windows Print Outputs a screenshot to the printer or the exte...

Page 919: ...nfiguration procedure for Multi Commands 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Multi Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Multi Command 3 Double click the dropped Multi Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 920: ...e Screen type commands are set for Action Mode Goto Screen commands are not executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List Rather they are executed at the end of the scan when the trigger condition is satisfied Key commands are executed in the scan that follows a scan that satisfies the trigger condition If multiple Key commands are set only the first and second Key commands in th...

Page 921: ...2 49 Script Executes a script For details refer to Properties of Script for Multi Functions Dialog Box on page 12 55 Add Adds a command to the list A maximum of 32 commands may be added Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected from Command Type Edit Changes a command in the list Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected i...

Page 922: ...12 5 1 Advanced mode only Set Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied Reset Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied Set Reset Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied When the trigger condition is no longer satisfied a 0 is written to the specified bit device Toggle Toggles the value...

Page 923: ...estination word device when the trigger condition is satisfied Set ON OFF Data Writes a fixed value of ON Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied Writes a fixed value of OFF Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied Add Sub Multi Div Mod OR AND XOR Performs arithmetic on the value of source device address and a fixed value...

Page 924: ... value of the specified device address This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Chapter 2 Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings on page 2 5 Transfer 1 Specify the number of word devices 1 to 64 to transfer This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Transfer 1 on page 12 14 Destination Device Address Specify the destina...

Page 925: ...rightness Screen Closes the Adjust Brightness Screen Open File Screen for movie files 1 Opens the File Screen Close File Screen for movie files 1 Closes the File Screen Switch to System Mode Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode Reset current screen Resets the current Base Screen Open User Account Setting Screen Opens the User Account Setting Screen For details refer to Chapter 23 5 Editing ...

Page 926: ...s configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen Coordinates X Y Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as the origin This setting is enabled only ...

Page 927: ...ate and time format depends on the language selected in Language Language is available on the Project Details tab of the Project Settings dialog box The display formats are shown below Japanese YYYY MM DD hh mm English MM DD YYYY hh mm YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute External Memory Device 2 Outputs the screenshot as a file to the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I Files ar...

Page 928: ... that can be captured 1 to 999 can be set in HMI Special Data Register LSD65 Default 99 The methods to erase screenshot files saved on the external memory device are as follows To erase files during operation using parts on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings dialog box select the Remove Files check box and the All Screenshot data check box and then configure the trigger device ...

Page 929: ...eypad for This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser Displays settings applicable to the selected key Key Language Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser These languages are available Japanese European Central European Baltic Cyrillic Browse Opens the Key Browser when clicked Select a key For details refer to Chapter 8 5...

Page 930: ...is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser If Download Project is selected 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only Source Select the the external memory device where the project ZNV Project File to be transferred is stored SD Memory Card 1 or USB Flash Drive Location Specify the location of the ZNV Project File znv The maximum number is 247 characters Example Where HG3G_DEMO_1 ZNV ...

Page 931: ...wav is a sound file saved on the root directory of an SD memory card or USB flash drive Error wav Destination Select the destination external memory device SD Memory Card or USB Flash Drive Location Specify the location where the file will be transferred The maximum number is 247 characters Example To save it to the folder SOUND inside HGDATA01 on an SD memory card or USB flash drive HGDATA01 SOUN...

Page 932: ... Chapter 4 3 4 Communication Driver Network Tab on page 4 50 Interface Select the communication interface in which the MICRO I is connecting to the download destination PLC from serial interface or Ethernet For details refer to Chapter 4 Interface Configuration on page 4 35 If serial interface is selected for Interface Slave Number Specify the slave number of the download destination PLC 0 to 31 E...

Page 933: ...PLC is displayed here If Ethernet is selected for Interface Select from the following method Specify External Device ID Specify the External Device ID 0 to 31 of the upload source PLC This is the External Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box on the Communication Driver Network tab External Device Name The name of the specified PLC is displayed here Specify IP Address Specify the...

Page 934: ... while data is being saved to the external memory device recording cannot be executed with a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the recording function Also during these situations the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD155 0 changes to 1 For details refer to Chapter 33 HMI Special Data Register LSD on page 33 7 Video and Audio Records images and sound Video only No Audio R...

Page 935: ...2000 of the script to operate Script Manager will open when is clicked Select a script from the script list For details refer to Chapter 20 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager Script Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager Once this area is double clicked the Script Editor will open and editing can be done Fo...

Page 936: ...when LM0 changes from 0 to 1 Trigger Type Selects the condition to execute the command from the following LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0 Value of device address 1 0 Action Execut...

Page 937: ...ngs on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Comment Used for entering comments about trigger conditions T...

Page 938: ...to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Multi Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 939: ...HMI Timer Relay LTC0 value HMI Timer Current Value LTD0 value 1999 1999 1998 999 1 1999 0 Condition Condition Condition Condition Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied The HMI Timer Relay LTC is an internal device bit device that changes to 1 once the time set for the timer has elapsed The HMI...

Page 940: ...configuration procedure for Timers 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Timer 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Timer 3 Double click the dropped Timer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 941: ... to use and the enter the preset value The preset value is the time from when the timer starts its countdown until 1 is written to the HMI Timer Relay LTC Example When 0 is specified for Timer Address Number HMI Timer Relay LTC0 HMI Timer Current Value LTD0 Value When selecting sec in Unit the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 second units up to a maximum of 1092 minutes 15 seconds When se...

Page 942: ...mand from the following LM0 MICRO I 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied While ON Command is executed when a value of device address is 1 While OFF Command is executed when a value of device address is 0 While satisfying the condition The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied 1 0 Value of device address Action Execution Execution Exe...

Page 943: ... While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression confi...

Page 944: ...to No Name or Type in the object list Description Used for entering comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Timer on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part ...

Page 945: ...of device addresses and detect alarms Display an alarm screen when an alarm occurs Make a sound of the buzzer and screen flashing the screen when an alarm occurs Chapter 13 Alarm Log Function 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I External device 0 1 12 00 0 1 12 53 12 00 Alarm occurred 12 53 Recovered 12 54 Confirmed Alarm Log data No Message Occurrence...

Page 946: ...2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Output to External memory device Alarm Log data CSV External Memory Device MICRO I USB flash drive SD memory card Output to printer Printer MICRO I HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V For compatible printers and instructions on how to connect one to the MICRO I refer to Chapter 32 1 2 Connecting a Printer to MICRO I on page 32 1 ...

Page 947: ...st Alarm The first alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred Second and later An alarm that has occurred while another alarm is active Recovered Indicates that the alarm that occurred has been recovered from However for channels set to lock the alarm is not recovered from until a key button is pressed CHECK or All Chk Confirmed Indicates the key button CHECK or All Chk was pressed...

Page 948: ...Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 12 50 30 1 1 Voltage drop 12 01 2011 12 50 00 12 01 12 50 20 12 01 12 50 30 Channel No 1 2 Alarm 1 2 Temperature abnormal 12 01 2011 12 50 10 12 50 10 5 Channel No 1 1 Alarm occurred Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 12 51 00 1 1 Voltage drop 12 01 2011 12 50 00 12 01 12 50 20 12 01 12 50 30 Channel No 1 2 Al...

Page 949: ...alarm has occurred 4 Alarm state and time The alarm state occurred recovered confirmed and the time the alarm occurred was recovered from and confirmed When the sampled data is output as a CSV file the displayed label varies based on the output method 5 Label When the sampled data is output as a CSV file this is the text displayed in the label row This cannot be changed Ch No Message Occurrence Ti...

Page 950: ...ate and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an alarm occurs is recovered from or is confirmed The labels displayed in the label row are Ch No Message State and Time Example When the message for channel number 1 1 is Voltage drop and the message for channel number 1 2 is Temperature abnormal Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 1 1 Voltage drop 1...

Page 951: ... area the data is processed with either of the following methods Fixed If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount the new data is not saved Rotate If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount the oldest data is deleted and the new data is saved MICRO I External device 0 1 12 00 0 1 12 53 12 00 Alarm occurred 12 53 Recovered 12 54 Confirmed Alarm Log data No Message ...

Page 952: ... on the Alarm List Display Deleting Data The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows On the Online tab in WindO I NV4 click the arrow under Clear and click All or Alarm Log Data For details refer to Chapter 24 4 Clear on page 24 25 In the System Mode on the Main Menu screen press Initial Setting Initialize Alarm Log in order Model Maximum amount of data that can be s...

Page 953: ... Data as a CSV File on page 13 39 Print data with the printer 2 Print Alarm Log data with the printer connected to the MICRO I For details refer to Chapter 32 Printer on page 32 1 To use with the MICRO I To use with devices other than the MICRO I Alarm Log data Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirma on Time 1 1 Voltage drop 12 01 2011 12 00 05 12 01 12 01 10 12 01 12 01 30 1 2 Tempera...

Page 954: ...ed per channel 3 Set the number of blocks to manage in Number of Blocks 1 channel is used for 1 device address to monitor 1 block is 16 channels The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source Device Address Type setting and the model 4 Select the reference screen type in Reference Screen The reference screen is associated with the channel This screen is displayed when the key butt...

Page 955: ...nder NO NC select the alarm detection condition If you select NO the alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1 If you select NC the alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0 10 Under Lock Unlock select whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit If you select Unlock the alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when...

Page 956: ...cute using saved data and detected alarms 4 1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display on page 13 31 4 2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm on page 13 33 4 3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred on page 13 37 4 4 Saving the Data as a CSV File on page 13 39 To use the Alarm Log settings configured on...

Page 957: ...orage Method Selects the data processing method when the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount set for the data storage area 3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Fixed If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount the new data is not saved Rotate If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage...

Page 958: ... number of alarms that has occurred for channel 1 1 is saved in LKR101 and this pattern continues up to LKR131 where the number of alarms that has occurred for channel number 2 15 is saved Top Device Address Block 1 16 channels Block 2 16 channels Channel No LKR100 LKR101 LKR102 LKR114 LKR115 LKR116 LKR117 LKR118 LKR130 LKR131 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 14 1 15 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 14 2 15 If you specify HMI Keep Reg...

Page 959: ...Specifies a word device to write the alarm state Number of blocks x 16 number of channels address numbers are used starting from the set device address For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Bit 15 Bit 0 Bit 3 0 Before alarm a er recovery 1 A er alarm 0 Second and later alarm Alarm that has occurred again while an alarm is ac ve 1...

Page 960: ...se screen or popup screen associated with each channel Word Uses a word device Device Addresses are configured per block Bit Uses a bit device Device Addresses are configured per channel Word 0 to 128 Bit 0 to 8 1 block is composed of 16 channels 1 device address can be monitored for each channel The maximum number of device addresses that can be monitored is 16 for each block Time 09 15 Motor fau...

Page 961: ...n page 2 68 Data Shows whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area Double clicking the cell switches between Store and No Store Setting to Store makes the buzzer sound when the value of bit for the channel changes to 1 Alarm function Shows whether or not the alarm function is used Double clicking the cell switches between Enable and Disable Channels switched to Disable cannot be...

Page 962: ... sequentially set from block number 1 channel number 1 starting with the specified device address For the Individual Settings dialog box if Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab is Word the 16 channels for the block selected at the start of the specified device address are batch configured For Bit the selected channel is individually configured Click to open the Tag Editor where you can ed...

Page 963: ...returns the normal state Example NO NC is NO Press CHECK Record confirma on me Record recovery me Record occurrence me Unlock Record confirma on me Record recovery me No opera on Record occurrence me Lock 0 1 0 1 Monitored bit Alarm occurred The display on the Alarm List Display disappears when the alarm is recovered from regardless of the Lock Unlock setting To keep displaying the alarm until CHECK...

Page 964: ... the following folder on the external memory device 1 The default External Memory Device folder name is HGDATA01 For details refer to Chapter 31 1 6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder on page 31 15 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P External Memory Device folder ALARMLOG Sampled data after starting output to the external memory d...

Page 965: ...r to Chapter 33 HMI Special Data Register LSD on page 33 7 SD memory card USB flash drive LSD42 LSD33 Trigger Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition for batch output For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Data is output to file when the value of the Trigger Device Address...

Page 966: ...iles saved on the external memory device increases it may take some time for the data output processing or the output of the next data may not be processed normally When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both occur simultaneously the pictures may not be displayed When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device the b...

Page 967: ...ecovered 1 3 Overcurrent Data to be output 3 minutes after operation starts Data to be output 3 minutes after that Data to be output after another 3 minutes 3 minute interval after operation starts Output to External memory device External Memory Device USB flash drive SD memory card Real time output stops when the file size of the Alarm Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficient space ...

Page 968: ...igured by File Name Device Address to the end of the file name for the output data File Name Device Address Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add to the file name For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This option can only be configured when the Add Device Address data to File Name check box is selected...

Page 969: ...r of files saved on the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation starts the number of files at that time is the limit From there the data is discarded in order from the oldest data and replaced with new data with each file output The following operations are as follows if the Realtime Output check box is selected Even if the data is outputted forcibly the real time output pe...

Page 970: ...by Add Device Address data to File Name YYMMDD The year month and day of the month set on Add Time Stamp hhmmss The hour minute and second of the time configured on Add Time Stamp Item Setting File Name ALMHTO Add value of Device Address to File Name File Name Device Address is LDR200 LDR200 value 123 Add Time Stamp YY MM Date when data was output September 2013 Item Setting Specify File Name by V...

Page 971: ...vice Address Settings on page 2 68 The data prints when the value of the Trigger Device Address changes from 0 to 1 Output to printer Printer 0 1 Trigger Device Address MICRO I Alarm Log data Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 1 1 Voltage drop 12 01 2011 12 00 05 12 01 12 01 10 12 01 12 01 30 1 2 Temperature abnormal 12 01 2011 12 01 09 12 01 12 02 21 12 01 12 02 55 1 1 ...

Page 972: ...conds Paper Feed Direction Selects the paper feed direction as either Vertical or Horizontal Vertical Horizontal ABC ABC For A4 size paper up to 40 items of Alarm Log data are printed on a single sheet The year is not printed for recovery times and confirmation times The function to sample data operates when Alarm Log data is printing ...

Page 973: ... Buzzer and Screen flashing Select the check box for the items that will trigger the sound of the buzzer and screen flashing to stop 1 The first alarm that has occurred in a state where no alarms are active All Alarms The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing each time an alarm occur Only First Alarm The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing only when the first alarm 1 occurs No beeps ...

Page 974: ... and Screen flashing check boxes is satisfied To stop the sound of the buzzer set System Area 1 address number 1 bit 6 to 0 To stop the screen flashing set System Area 1 address number 1 bit 1 to 4 to 0 However when System Area 1 address number 1 bit 6 is 1 for a reason other than the occurrence of an alarm the sound of the buzzer does not stop until 0 is written When System Area 1 address number ...

Page 975: ...s dialog box is displayed 2 Select the type of device address to monitor under Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks 3 Select the channel number to register and click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the device address to monitor in Source and select Store under Data 4 Using Data and Detected Alarms HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G ...

Page 976: ... Parts group click Data Displays and then click Alarm Log Display 9 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm Log Display 10 Double click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 11 Change the settings on each tab as necessary For details refer to Chapter 10 8 3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box on page 10 154 12 Click OK The Pro...

Page 977: ...tive Alarm 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Alarm Log The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the type of device address to monitor under Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks 3 Select the channel number to register a message to and click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed ...

Page 978: ...monitor in Source and select No Store under Data 5 Select Enable under Alarm function and configure NO NC and Lock Unlock 6 Select the Text ID check box and click Text Manager opens 7 Double click the Text and enter the message 8 Click OK You are returned to the Individual Settings dialog box Text ...

Page 979: ...ll the channels 11 Click OK The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes 12 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Alarm List Display 13 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm List Display 14 Double click the dropped Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed The messages to use can be registered in advance in Text Manage...

Page 980: ...e the other settings and the settings on each tab as necessary For details refer to Chapter 10 7 3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box on page 10 138 17 Click OK The Properties of Alarm List Display dialog box closes This concludes configuring the MICRO I to display registered messages with the Alarm List Display according to the active alarm ...

Page 981: ...is displayed 2 Select the type of device address to monitor under Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks 3 Select the channel number to register a message to and click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the device address to monitor in Source and select Store under Data 5 Select Enable under Alarm function configure NO NC and Lock Unl...

Page 982: ...arm occurs check box to make a sound of the buzzer when an alarm has occurred 8 Select the Screen flashing when Alarm occurs check box to have the screen flashing when an alarm has occurred 9 Click OK The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes This concludes configuring the settings to make a sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has occurred ...

Page 983: ... folder For details refer to the Data File Manager User s Manual Data Structure and Output Example The data structure for files output with batch output and real time output is different Batch Batch output shows the recovery and confirmation time for an alarm that has occurred on a single line The data structure of files output with batch output is as follows Bold items are replaced by the Alarm L...

Page 984: ... Name Dimmer Console V4 50 41 bytes File Type Alarm Log Data 30 bytes 2 bytes Time State Ch No Message 35 bytes 08 11 2011 14 46 12 Occurred 1 0 Voltage drop 57 bytes 08 11 2011 14 46 13 Recovered 1 0 Voltage drop 58 bytes 08 11 2011 14 46 16 Confirmed 1 0 Voltage drop 58 bytes 08 11 2011 14 47 18 Occurred 1 1 Temperature abnormal 65 bytes The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full ...

Page 985: ...ata Log function can perform the following functions Sample values of device addresses at a fixed interval Sample values of device addresses when a value of device address changes Output Data Log data to the external memory device 1 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Chapter 14 Data Log Function 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3...

Page 986: ...O I External device Internal device 124 125 126 Data Log data Sampling Time Data001 01 01 2011 12 00 30 120 01 01 2011 12 01 30 121 01 01 2011 12 02 30 122 01 01 2011 12 03 30 123 01 01 2011 12 04 30 124 01 01 2011 12 05 30 125 01 01 2011 12 06 30 126 LDR10 126 LDR11 125 LDR12 124 Copy ...

Page 987: ...ta is deleted in order to make room for the newest data MICRO I External device 12 05 00 12 10 00 12 15 00 D100 D101 D102 20 80 2 10 70 3 30 90 1 I O R C I M e h t n o d e r o t s a t a D Values of Device Addresses Time Value Sampling Time Value 3 a t a D 2 a t a D 1 a t a D 2 0 1 D 1 0 1 D 0 0 1 D 01 01 2011 12 01 00 10 70 3 01 01 2011 12 05 00 20 80 2 01 01 2011 12 02 00 20 80 2 01 01 2011 12 10...

Page 988: ...o Data Storage Area switches from 0 to 1 the fourth time the MICRO I stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102 Since the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3 the oldest data is deleted in order to make room for the newest data MICRO I External device D100 D101 D102 20 80 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 I O R C I M e h t n o d e r o t s a t a D Values of Device Addresses Time Value ...

Page 989: ...end on the Sampling Method setting For details refer to Sampling Method on page 14 15 4 Sampling time label When the sampled data is output as a CSV file this label is displayed in the label row for the sampling time column 5 Data label When the sampled data is output as a CSV file this label is displayed in the label row for the data number columns Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003 01 01 2011...

Page 990: ...od to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows On the Online tab in WindO I NV4 click the arrow under Clear and click All or Data Log Data For details refer to Chapter 24 4 Clear on page 24 25 In the System Mode on the Main Menu screen press Initial Setting Initialize Data Log in order Sample values of device addresses MICRO I External device Data Log data Sampling Time Data001...

Page 991: ...CSV file and use it on a computer For details refer to 4 3 Saving the Data as a CSV File on page 14 45 Display the data with the Numerical Input or the Numerical Display Copy the data to an internal device and display it with the Numerical Input or the Numerical Display For details refer to 4 2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values on page 14 36 Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003 01 01 2011 12 00...

Page 992: ...lways read When the condition of writing to the data storage area is satisfied the values that were read at that point in time are written to the data storage area While satisfying the condition of writing to data storage area The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are read when the condition of writing to the data storage area is satisfied and those values are written...

Page 993: ...alue of source device address each time the monitored bit device or the bit number of the word device changes from 0 to 1 If Event Bit is selected specify the device address to monitor as the condition for writing data in Device Address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Event Word Writes the va...

Page 994: ...the sampling time column when the data is output as CSV To use text registered in Text Manager select the Use Text Manager check box and specify the ID number of the text to use as the label Click to open Text Manager where you can edit the text 9 Click Add in the Output Data The Add Data dialog box is displayed 10 In Number of Data specify the amount of data to add to the channel The configured n...

Page 995: ... words of device addresses to read starting from the set device address and proceed to step 15 The set number of words of consecutive device addresses from the starting device address will be output as CSV 14 Under Display Type set the display type for numerical values when data is output as CSV Counting Method Select the display type as Decimal or Hexadecimal for numerical values Digits Specifies...

Page 996: ...egister Data Log settings for all of the channel numbers to use 18 Click OK The Data Log Settings dialog box closes This concludes configuring the sampling conditions and device addresses for sampling data Next configure the functions to execute using sampled data 4 1 Display the Data in the Line Chart on page 14 34 4 2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values on page 14 36 4 3 Saving the Data as a CSV...

Page 997: ... 16 Log function Shows whether or not the Data Log function is used Double clicking the cell switches between Enable and Disable If switched to Disable that channel s settings all return to the default settings Channel Name Shows the channel name Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings For details refer to 3 2 Individual Settings Dialog ...

Page 998: ...where you can edit the device address For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Monitor Shows the write destination device address when monitor count of writings to Data Storage Area Shows No when not monitoring Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings For details refer to 3...

Page 999: ...torage area While satisfying the condition of writing to data storage area The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are read when the condition of writing to the data storage area is satisfied and those values are written to the data storage area The total number of words of data that can be registered to the data log settings will depend on Sampling Method If Sampling M...

Page 1000: ...umber selected in Settings in the Data Log Settings dialog box General Tab Sets the channel name and device address values to write to the data storage area Log function Selects whether or not to use the Data Log function Channel Name Enter a name of the channel The maximum number is 40 characters Enable Samples values of device addresses and saves the data along with the sampling time Disable Doe...

Page 1001: ...device address to monitor as the condition for Writing data For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This option can only be set when Event Bit or Event Word is selected If this setting is different from other channels it cannot be displayed in the Line Chart Destination Device Address Specifies the destination word device For the d...

Page 1002: ...e Chart cannot be displayed If differing channels of data were displayed in the same chart the chart can no longer be displayed if the Data Log data is erased by channel units Status Device Address Specify the word device that will store the reading status For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Bit Function Description 0 Reading T...

Page 1003: ...ored in the following folder on the external memory device 1 External Memory Device folder DATALOG The default External Memory Device folder name is HGDATA01 For details refer to Chapter 31 1 6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder on page 31 15 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Data that is sampled after starting output to the ext...

Page 1004: ... Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition for batch output For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Data is output to file when the value of the Trigger Device Address changes from 0 to 1 File Name Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name The default is ...

Page 1005: ...files saved on the external memory device increases it may take some time for the data output processing or the output of the next data may not be processed normally When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both occur simultaneously the pictures may not be displayed When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device the ...

Page 1006: ... Data003 01 01 2011 12 00 30 20 120 201 01 01 2011 12 01 30 21 121 204 01 01 2011 12 02 30 22 122 206 01 01 2011 12 03 30 23 123 206 01 01 2011 12 04 30 24 124 210 01 01 2011 12 05 30 25 125 210 01 01 2011 12 06 30 26 126 218 Data to be output 3 minutes after operation starts Data to be output 3 minutes after that Data to be output after another 3 minutes 3 minute interval after operation starts E...

Page 1007: ...f the device address configured by File Name Device Address to the end of the file name for the output data File Name Device Address Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add to the file name For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This option can only be configured when the Add Device Address data to File N...

Page 1008: ... that exceed the limits in Specify File Name by Value of Device Address and file names configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows When the text of the file name exceeds the maximum number of device addresses no NULL the text stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start is configured When a character that cannot be used is set the text is...

Page 1009: ...les saved on the external memory device are as follows To erase files during operation using parts on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings dialog box select the Remove Files check box and the All Data Log data check boxes and then configure the trigger device address Assign that trigger device address to a part To erase files with WindO I NV4 click Clear on the Online tab and the...

Page 1010: ...y Add Device Address data to File Name YYMMDD The year month and day of the month set on Add Time Stamp hhmmss The hour minute and second of the time configured on Add Time Stamp Item Setting File Name LOGO01 Add value of Device Address to File Name File Name Device Address is LDR200 LDR200 value 123 Add Time Stamp YY MM Date when data was output September 2013 Item Setting Specify File Name by Va...

Page 1011: ...Manager ID number 1 to 32000 when text registered in Text Manager are used for labels Click to open Text Manager where you can edit the text This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box Label Enter the text to display in the label The maximum number is 40 characters Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared The registered text is displayed ...

Page 1012: ...lays Text Manager where you can edit the text Top Device Address Shows the starting device address of the word devices that will be read for sampling data Double clicking the cell displays the Edit Data dialog box where the device address can be edited For details refer to Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data Dialog Box on page 14 29 Data Type Shows the data type for numerical values when data is out...

Page 1013: ...is output as CSV The maximum number is 40 characters This is displayed only when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared When Number of Data is 2 or higher Data Number is automatically entered 1 Example Data001 Data002 Data003 Data Type Select the data type for numerical values when data is output as CSV For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 When Float32 F is selected the...

Page 1014: ...exadecimal display UBIN16 W 1 to 4 UBIN32 D 1 to 8 Display Floating Point Select this check box to display the decimal point When the Display Floating Point check box is selected and UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD4 B or BCD8 EB is selected for Data Type the source device is an integer but the value is output with the decimal point added at the configured floating digits However if Float32 F...

Page 1015: ... on the MICRO I copy this data to the specified internal device Copy Data Log Data Select this check box to copy data to a device address Destination Device Address Specifies the destination device address for copied data You can only specify an internal device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 ...

Page 1016: ... Settings on page 2 68 Data log data Sampling Time Value 2 Oldest Data read starting point 12 18 2011 17 44 10 20 12 18 2011 18 34 10 21 3 Specify by Value of Device Address read starting point source device address 3 12 19 2011 19 24 43 22 12 19 2011 20 01 54 24 12 19 2011 21 39 21 26 1 Newest Data read starting point 12 20 2011 05 57 06 28 Value Uses a constant value Specifies the amount to copy...

Page 1017: ...dress specify the source device address You can only specify an internal device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 When the Sampling Time check box is selected the data number is 1 This cannot be changed End Number Of the data to copy specifies the data number of the data to end copying If you select Value specify the data num...

Page 1018: ...s group click Charts and then click Line Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Line Chart 3 Double click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 On the General tab select Chart Type as Log Trend Normal or Log Trend Pen Recorder 4 Using the Data HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P ...

Page 1019: ...mber and the data number can be checked on the Data Log Settings dialog box When While ON is selected as Trigger Type displays the graph when the value of device address is 1 Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device in Device Address to serve as condition Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settin...

Page 1020: ...ss Data Read Start Position and Copy Order of Data to the Destination Device Address The data to copy and the order differs according to the Starting Point and the Stored Order for Data settings Example 1 Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log to the destination device address Data log data Sampling Time Value Destination Device Address Value 10 01 2011 12 01 30 20 Configured devic...

Page 1021: ...ured device address LDR10 LDR11 LDR12 24 Copy from oldest data 26 12 19 2011 19 24 43 22 28 12 19 2011 20 01 54 24 Newest data read starting point 12 19 2011 21 39 21 26 12 20 2011 05 57 06 28 Amount of data Item Setting Destination Device Address LDR10 Starting Point Specify by Value of Device Address value is 4 Number of Data 3 Stored Order of Data From Newest to Oldest Data log data Sampling Ti...

Page 1022: ...10 Starting Point Newest Data Number of Data 2 Stored Order of Data From Newest to Oldest Data log data Sampling Time Value Destination Device Address Value 12 18 2011 17 44 10 87654321 Hex Configured device address LDR10 3344 Copy from newest data LDR11 LDR12 1122 7788 12 19 2011 19 24 43 12345678 Hex LDR13 5566 12 19 2011 20 01 54 55667788 Hex Newest data read starting point 12 19 2011 21 39 21 ...

Page 1023: ...tored Order of Data From Oldest to Newest Target Data Sampling Time Value of Device Address Data No Start No 1 End No 3 When writing with the following settings Device range error is displayed Starting Point is 0 or a value larger than the amount of saved data Start Number is 0 or a value larger than Data Number End Number is 0 or a value larger than Data Number Start Number is a value larger than...

Page 1024: ...es that were read at that point in time are written to the data storage area While satisfying the condition of writing to data storage area The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are read when the condition of writing to the data storage area is satisfied and those values are written to the data storage area 3 Under Settings select the channel number for the data to di...

Page 1025: ... 9 Select the data that is the start point for copying data in Starting Point Newest Data Set the starting point to read as the newest data Oldest Data Set the starting point to read as the oldest data Specify by Value of Device Address Specifies which data from the oldest data to set as the starting point to read by value of device address and sets that data as the starting point to read Specifie...

Page 1026: ...he data to copy with Start Number If you select Value specify the data number 1 to 128 If you select Device Address specify the source device address You can only specify an internal device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 When the Sampling Time check box is selected the data number is 1 This ...

Page 1027: ...ere you wish to place the Numerical Display 21 Double click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 22 Select the display type for the copied data with Display Type on the General tab 23 Select the data type for the copied data in Data Type under Data Format 24 Specify the number of digits to display in Digits under Data Format The range of digits that can be se...

Page 1028: ...hree Numerical Displays with Display Device Address specified as LDR10 LDR11 LDR12 Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 26 Click OK The Properties dialog box closes 27 Repeat step 19 through 26 to configure the Numerical Displays for the amount of data to copy This concludes configuring the Numeri...

Page 1029: ...e data structure for files output with batch output and real time output is the same Bold items are replaced by the Data Log settings the sampled data the running project name and WindO I NV4 version number 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P 2 Only when the Header check box is selected on the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog b...

Page 1030: ...es LDR0 0x312C LDR1 0x3334 LDR2 0x0000 Output value 1 34 Stored values LDR0 0x310D LDR1 0x3334 LDR2 0x0000 Output value 1 CR 34 Stored values LDR0 0x3122 LDR1 0x3334 LDR2 0x0000 Output value 1 34 When Data Type is UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD4 B BCD8 EB or Float32 F The value is output according to the setting of Display Type The zeros in the value are suppressed If the stored value excee...

Page 1031: ...d turning on the MICRO I power Record switching the base screen Record changing the user Record changing the operation mode Chapter 15 Operation Log Function 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I Power ON MICRO I 130 12 00 Run Mode MICRO I MICRO I 130 Switch to Base Screen Full Tank 1 Base screen 1 12 01 Base screen 2 MICRO I 130 MICRO I 130 Change User...

Page 1032: ... the external memory device 1 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P MICRO I 130 12 04 Press touch switch MICRO I 100 100 100 D1 100 Write 100 Value External device 12 05 Press touch switch 100 D1 Output to External memory device Operation Log data CSV MICRO I External memory device USB flash drive SD memory card ...

Page 1033: ...Monitor on the WindO I NV4 Online tab Switched to Offline Mode from Monitor Mode by clicking Go Offline on the WindO I NV4 Online tab Switched to Monitor Mode from Offline Mode by clicking Go Online on the WindO I NV4 Online tab Press buttons This operation is recorded by the following events Pressing a Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Multi Button Selector Switch Potentiometer Numerical ...

Page 1034: ...M DD YYYY hh mm ss European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic 5 User Name The user name when the event occurred The user name is only recorded when the Use Security functions check box is selected on the General tab in the Security dialog box 6 Screen No The screen type and number that was displayed when the event occurred Base n Base screen n screen number Example Base 1 P...

Page 1035: ...ne Mode Write Data to any Device Addresses The value written to the device address by pressing the touch switch This value is handled as UBIN16 W For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 The value written to the device address is recorded as UBIN16 W regardless of the data type Example When 10 0xFFF6 is written to device address D0 If the written value is 2 words 32 bits each ...

Page 1036: ...User1 Base2 Change Users User2 12 01 2011 12 03 06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes System Mode 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Device Addresses LDR0 55 Opera on Log data storage amount Oldest data delete New data When there is no remaining battery power the data in the Operation Log is erased when the MICRO I is turned of...

Page 1037: ... 2011 12 01 23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen Base2 12 01 2011 12 02 45 User1 Base2 Change Users User2 12 01 2011 12 03 06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes System Mode 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Device Addresses LDR0 55 External memory device Operation Log data CSV Book1 Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 Sampling Time User Scre...

Page 1038: ...ems are recorded when the MICRO I power is turned on Time Screen Number Event Name Switch to Base Screen The following items are recorded when the base screen is switched Time User Name Screen Number Event Name Changed to Change Users The following items are recorded when the user is changed Time User Name Screen Number Event Name Changed to Change Operation Modes The following items are recorded ...

Page 1039: ... for Operation Log and click OK The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes 5 Select the condition to record events in Trigger condition Always Always records events Device Address Records events when the specified device address is 1 You can only specify an internal device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 6 Click OK ...

Page 1040: ...reen is switched Time user name screen number event name changed to Change Users The following items are recorded when the user is changed Time user name screen number event name changed to Change Operation Modes The following items are recorded when the operation mode is changed Time user name screen number event name changed to Press buttons The following items are recorded when a touch switch i...

Page 1041: ...65535 that is the basis for reporting Report Device Address Specifies the destination bit device or the bit number of the destination word device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Destination Device Address Specifies the destination word device to write the current usage of the amount of Operation Log data storage For the dev...

Page 1042: ...hen using text registered in Text Manager as the label This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box Sampling Time The label for the column to display the time the event occurred User Name The label for the column to display the user name when the event occurred Screen No The label for the column to display the screen type and number that was displayed when the event occ...

Page 1043: ...Text Manager check box is cleared Text ID Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number 1 to 32000 when using text registered in Text Manager as the event name This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box Power ON The event name when the MICRO I power is turned on Switch to Base Screens The event name when the base screen is switched Change Users The event...

Page 1044: ... the following folder on the external memory device 1 External Memory Device folder OPERATIONLOG The default External Memory Device folder name is HGDATA01 For details refer to Chapter 31 1 6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder on page 31 15 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Data recorded after starting output to the external mem...

Page 1045: ...tails about the error information refer to Chapter 33 HMI Special Data Register LSD on page 33 7 SD memory card USB flash drive LSD42 LSD33 Trigger Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition for batch output For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Data is output to file when t...

Page 1046: ... on the external memory device increases it may take some time for the data output processing or the output of the next data may not be processed normally When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both occur simultaneously the pictures may not be displayed When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device the blinking pe...

Page 1047: ...nged to 12 01 2011 12 00 10 Base1 Power ON 12 01 2011 12 01 23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen Base2 12 01 2011 12 02 45 User1 Base2 Change Users User2 12 01 2011 12 03 06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes System Mode 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Device Addresses LDR0 55 12 01 2011 12 07 30 User2 Base2 Switch to Base S...

Page 1048: ...configured by File Name Device Address to the end of the file name for the output data File Name Device Address Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add to the file name For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This option can only be configured when the Add Device Address data to File Name check box is sele...

Page 1049: ...the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation starts the number of files at that time is the limit From there the data is discarded in order from the oldest data and replaced with new data with each file output The following operations are as follows if the Realtime Output check box is selected Even if the data is outputted forcibly the real time output period 3 minute interv...

Page 1050: ...d by Add Device Address data to File Name YYMMDD The year month and day of the month set on Add Time Stamp hhmmss The hour minute and second of the time configured on Add Time Stamp Item Setting File Name OPLOGA Add value of Device Address to File Name File Name Device Address is LDR200 LDR200 value 123 Add Time Stamp YY MM Date when data was output September 2013 Item Setting Specify File Name by...

Page 1051: ... batch output and real time output is the same Bold items are replaced by the Operation Log settings the recorded data the running project name and WindO I NV4 version number 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P 4 Using the Data HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Headers Project Name Project name Version numbe...

Page 1052: ...4 Using the Data 15 22 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1053: ...Log data Chapter 13 Alarm Log Function on page 13 1 Data Log data Chapter 14 Data Log Function on page 14 1 Operation Log data Chapter 15 Operation Log Function on page 15 1 Chapter 16 Data Storage Area 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P When there is no remaining battery the data in the data storage area is erased when the MICRO I is turned off If you downl...

Page 1054: ...and maximum amount of data storage and the minimum and maximum number of addresses that can be configured for the data storage area is as follows Alarm Log data Operation Log data Data Log data HMI Keep Registers LKR HMI Keep Relays LK Free space Data storage area 235 520 bytes Alarm Log data Operation Log data Data Log data HMI Keep Registers LKR HMI Keep Relays LK Free space Data storage area 11...

Page 1055: ...age area in Number of Stored Data for Operation Log HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 0 to 8330 HG2G 5T HG1G 1P 0 to 3945 4 Specify the amount of Data Log data per device address to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device Address HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 0 to 29165 HG2G 5T HG1G 1P 0 to 13808 5 Specify the number of HMI Keep Register LKR addresses in Numb...

Page 1056: ...3G HG2G 5F 0 to 8330 HG2G 5T HG1G 1P 0 to 3945 Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device Address Specifies the amount of Data Log data per device address to save in the data storage area HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 0 to 29165 HG2G 5T HG1G 1P 0 to 13808 Data Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Enable is selected under Log function on the General Tab in the Individual Settin...

Page 1057: ...g or warning lights and count the operation time Report the replacement time for lighting and warning lights by the counted operation time Monitor device addresses connected to buttons and relays and count the operation count Report the inspection time for buttons and relays by the counted operation count Chapter 17 Preventive Maintenance Function 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G ...

Page 1058: ...e value of the monitored device address changes from 0 to 1 1 is added to the value of the device address operation count device address configured in Measure Operation Count The counted operation count is written to the device address configured in Measure Operation Count Example When the value of monitored device address M0 changes from 0 to 1 1 is added to the value of operation count device ad...

Page 1059: ...dress when the operation time and operation count reach the threshold Example When the value of Operation Time Device Address LKR0 reaches the threshold set for level 1 through level 3 1 is written to the Report Device Address configured for each level LM1 through LM3 Level Threshold Report Device Address Level 1 10 LM1 Level 2 15 LM2 Level 3 20 LM3 1 0 1 0 1 0 Operation Time Device Address LKR0 v...

Page 1060: ... display in Settings with Display Options Select Operation Time Operation Count The Operation Time and Operation Count settings are displayed in Settings 4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 5 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device Addres...

Page 1061: ... count leave the Measure Operation Count check box cleared and proceed to step 13 11 Specify the destination device address for the counted operation count You can only specify an HMI Keep Register LKR Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 12 Select the data type for the value of Measure Operation ...

Page 1062: ...he number of the preventive maintenance settings to manage Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box For details refer to 3 2 Individual Settings Dialog Box on page 17 8 Monitor Device Address Shows the bit device or the bit number of the word device to count the operation time or operation count Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor For the device address con...

Page 1063: ...on Count is selected in Display Options Operation Count Device Address Shows the destination device address for the counted operation count You can only specify an HMI Keep Register LKR Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Oper...

Page 1064: ...nt of devices configured by Number of Items in the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box Monitor Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to count the operation time or operation count Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Operation Time Device Address Speci...

Page 1065: ...it device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches or exceeds the level 2 threshold Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Threshold Specifies the time as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at level 3 For a constant the range ...

Page 1066: ...reaches or exceeds the level 1 threshold Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Threshold Specifies the count as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at level 2 For a constant the range that can be set varies based on the data type For a device address click to display ...

Page 1067: ...of device addresses to monitor in Number of Items 3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options Select Operation Count Operation count settings are displayed in Settings 4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 5 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to mo...

Page 1068: ... counted operation count 8 Select the data type for the value of Measure Operation Count device address with Data Type 9 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Display 10 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Display 11 Double click the dropped Numerical Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed ...

Page 1069: ...g box 14 Specify Digits for the value to display The digits that can be set varies based on the display type or data type 15 Under Display Method in Display Device Address specify the destination device address for the counted operation count Select the same device address as the device configured with Measure Operation Count on the Operation Count tab in the Preventive Maintenance settings Indivi...

Page 1070: ...o monitor in Number of Items 3 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device Address 5 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab and specify the destination device address for the ...

Page 1071: ...shold as a value of device address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 10 Configure Report Device Address for level 1 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when the threshold is reached or exceeded Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configur...

Page 1072: ...Report Device Address to and click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 16 Specify the level 1 Report Device Address in Source and select Store under Data Set Source to the level 1 Report Device Address configured on the Operation Time tab in the Preventive Maintenance settings Individual Settings dialog box 17 Select Enable under Alarm function select NO under NO NC and click OK ...

Page 1073: ...larm Log Settings dialog box switch the alarm function for all the unused channel numbers to Disable Select all the unused channels with the key click or the key click and click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed Under Channel Settings Alarm function select Disable and click OK ...

Page 1074: ...tions tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box 20 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box 21 Click OK The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes This concludes the configuration to notify with a beep when the counted operation time reaches the threshold ...

Page 1075: ...ch write the recipe values saved on the external memory device 1 to device addresses when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Batch read values of device addresses and save them to the external memory device 1 as a recipe file when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Chapter 18 Reci...

Page 1076: ...by the Recipe function is based on the top device address and the amount of data selected Example The top device address is D100 and the amount of data is 10 Value of Device Address D100 1111 D101 2222 D102 3333 D103 4444 D104 5555 D105 6666 D106 7777 D107 8888 D108 9999 D109 11111 ...

Page 1077: ... D100 D101 D102 D103 D104 600 700 800 900 1000 100 200 300 400 500 106 107 108 109 110 101 102 103 104 105 5 Data 4 Top Device Address 1 Number of blocks 2 Channel 0 to 15 3 Amount of data Recipe settings Data for recipes If there are many word devices for the data for the recipe it will take time to read and write them For example when using the Recipe function to configure initial values if othe...

Page 1078: ... recipe in Number of Blocks The operation using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks 0 to 64 1 channel is used for 1 item of data for the recipe 1 block is 16 channels The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks The maximum number of device addresses that can be configured for 1 channel is 8192 devices 3 Select the number of the data for the recipe to configure in S...

Page 1079: ...pe for the values to write with Data Type To read values of device addresses and save them as a recipe file specify the type of data for the read values 8 With Number of Data specify the number of destination device addresses starting with the device address configured by Top Device Address To read values of device addresses and save them as a recipe file specify the number of source device addres...

Page 1080: ...e value for the device address that can be configured varies based on Data Type and Display Type configured on the Channel tab When Read only is selected under Trigger Setting on the Block tab entering values of device addresses is unnecessary 12 Click the Block tab 13 Select the destination to save recipe data to under Access to This option is set by block External Memory Device 1 Use a recipe fi...

Page 1081: ...proceed to step 17 16 Specify the device address that triggers batch reading values of device addresses and saving them to the external memory device as a recipe file in Read Trigger This option is set by block Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This option can only be configured when Read Write...

Page 1082: ...gs Dialog Box on page 18 10 Access to Shows the save destination for the data for the recipe Double clicking the cell switches between Internal Memory and External Memory Device Trigger Setting Shows the operation using the data for the recipe When External Memory Device is selected for Access to double clicking the cell switches between Write only Read Write and Read only Shows Write only when In...

Page 1083: ...esses for values of device addresses Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 This option can only be configured when Recipe function is Enable Data Type Shows the data type of the values of source or destination device addresses Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settin...

Page 1084: ...pe file with the same name on the external memory device 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P External Memory Device 1 Uses a recipe file saved to the external memory device Requires an external memory device with a saved recipe file For details refer to 4 2 Creating Recipe Files on page 18 17 Internal Memory Uses recipe data saved to int...

Page 1085: ...esses to the external memory device as a recipe file This option can only be configured when External Memory Device is selected under Access to Write only Writes recipe values to device addresses If Float32 F is selected for Data Type on the Channel tab the values of device addresses that were read are saved to the recipe file in the floating point type However when a value that was read is 8 digi...

Page 1086: ...ipe values to write and values of device addresses that are read For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Number of Data Specifies the number of source or destination device addresses starting with the device address configured by Top Device Address The sequential device addresses from the start address for the number of configured device addresses is displayed in Settings on ...

Page 1087: ...n click Save to save the recipe file for the selected channel The saved recipe file can be edited using Notepad commercially available text editors and spreadsheet software Block Number Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings Channel Number Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings No Shows the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data ...

Page 1088: ...dO I NV4 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Recipe The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the channel number to export its recipe data in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Click the Data tab then click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V H...

Page 1089: ...e specified on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box is entered in File name 5 Open the exported recipe data file Use Notepad a commercially available text editor or spreadsheet software 6 Edit the values and save the file 7 Return to the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box and click Import The Open dialog box is displayed ...

Page 1090: ...cipes 18 16 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 8 Specify the file and click Open The recipe data is imported 9 Click OK The Individual Settings dialog box closes 10 Click OK The Recipe Settings dialog box closes This concludes editing recipe data ...

Page 1091: ...reating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box 1 Insert an external memory device in the computer To use an SD memory card insert it into the computer s memory card slot or use it via a memory card reader writer To use a USB flash drive insert it into the computer s USB port 2 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Recipe The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Clic...

Page 1092: ...al Memory Device Folder Specifies the folder to save the created recipe file Click to display the Project Settings dialog box You can specify the External Memory Device folder used as the save destination 5 Click OK The Recipe Settings dialog box closes The RECIPE folder is created in the External Memory Device folder used as the save destination and the recipe files for the channels configured wi...

Page 1093: ...MICRO I 2 On the Home tab in the Project group click the Download icon The Download dialog box is displayed If the project data was changed a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data 3 Select the Recipe Files check box under Download f...

Page 1094: ...th a Text Editor You can edit recipe files using Notepad commercially available text editors or spreadsheet software 1 Write the data for the amount of data in value of device address comma new line order If the amount of data in the recipe file is lower than the amount of data for the top device address configured on the Channel tab in the Individual Settings dialog box 0 is written in the rest o...

Page 1095: ...lay the data saved from the MICRO I to the external memory device 1 as a recipe file on a computer External Memory Device Book1 Recipe File 100 150 200 You can upload recipe files from the external memory device using WindO I NV4 On the Online tab click the arrow under Upload and click Stored Data in External Memory Device to display the Upload Data from External Memory Device dialog box Select th...

Page 1096: ...e tab in the MICRO I group click Clear and then click Stored Data in External Memory Device to display the Clear Data dialog box Select the Recipe Files check box and click OK To delete files on the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F go to the System Mode File Manager In the File Manager select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB fl...

Page 1097: ...en displaying parts and screens The text can be managed collectively including editing the registered text and adding or deleting text Text groups can perform the following functions Switch the displayed language by value of device address Use common text for parts Chapter 19 Text Group 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External device MICRO I 目標達成 D100 1 D...

Page 1098: ... Message Alarm Log Display Message Title Numerical Display Unit Charts Bar Chart X axis and Y axis scale labels Line Chart X axis and Y axis scale labels Alarm Log Messages displayed in data output as CSV Data Log Labels displayed in data output as CSV Operation Log Recorded item labels and event names displayed in data output as CSV When the text group is switched the displayed Base Screen is res...

Page 1099: ...1 On the Configuration tab in the Manager group click Text Manager Text Manager is displayed 2 In Number of Text Groups specify the number of text groups to create 1 to 32 The configured number of text groups are enabled 3 Double click Text Group Name The Text Group Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G...

Page 1100: ...llowing European Japanese Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic Windows 9 With Text Color select the color of the text to register color 256 colors monochrome 16 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette To use when the MICRO I power is turned on or switched to Run Mode select the Use this Text Group as Default check box The text grou...

Page 1101: ...er is 3750 characters The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Text on page 2 6 11 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to create the necessary text in each text group 12 Click OK This concludes creating text groups and registering text You can enter multi line text by inserting a newline The newline is counted as two characters Text ...

Page 1102: ...xport The Export dialog box is displayed 4 Enter the location to Location and then select the file format csv or txt as the Save as type The file name becomes TextGroup is the same number as the group 01 to 32 Example Save the text for text group 1 and text group 2 as a CSV file TextGroup01 csv and TextGroup02 csv files are saved in the specified location 5 Click OK This concludes saving a text li...

Page 1103: ...he project being edited 1 On the Configuration tab in the Manager group click Text Manager Text Manager is displayed 2 Select the Text of the Text Group to import 3 Click Import The Open dialog box is displayed 4 Select a saved text list and click Open To import multiple text lists select all of the text lists to import To select multiple text lists press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the...

Page 1104: ...ext list with the text of the displayed text ID and then to display confirmation to overwrite the next text ID Click Yes To All to overwrite all the text in the text list without displaying the Import dialog box subsequently Click No to display the next confirmation to overwrite without overwriting the text with the displayed Text Manager ID Click Cancel to stop importing text The imported text is...

Page 1105: ...rations on page 19 3 specify Number of Text Groups as 3 and under Text Group Name enter English for Group 1 Chinese for Group 2 and Japanese for Group 3 Set Change Text Group by Device Address to D100 Register the following text 2 Create a Bit Button On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Bit Button 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Button ...

Page 1106: ...and then select the Use Text Manager check box 6 Specify 1 for the Text ID under OFF 7 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK The Properties of Bit Button dialog box closes 8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 and create a Bit Button to use text ID 2 for the registration text This concludes configuring the settings to switch the displayed language by a value of device address ...

Page 1107: ...pboard contents to that cell Delete Unused Texts Deletes the text with Text ID numbers that are registered in the Text Manager but are not used in the project 3 Text Manager HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Text Messages List Text ID Font Text Color Windows Font Text Text Group Name To select multiple items of Text press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the spe...

Page 1108: ...ile Click this button to display the Open dialog box For details refer to Importing Text from a Text List on page 19 7 Export Saves the text for the text group being edited as a CSV file or as a text file This file is called a text list The types of files that can be saved are as follows CSV file comma delimited csv CSV file semicolon delimited csv Unicode text file tab delimited txt Click this bu...

Page 1109: ...r spacing 0 to 100 and the line spacing 0 to 100 To change the settings other than the character spacing and line spacing click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box For details refer to Chapter 2 Windows Font on page 2 13 Text Messages List The attributes for the registered text are displayed in this list When the value of device address is 0 the text group switches to the text group set...

Page 1110: ...e default Text Group Name Enters the names of the text groups The maximum number for the Text Group Name is 20 characters Use this Text Group as Default Select this check box to setup the group to use when the MICRO I power is turned on and when switching to run mode The text group set as the default is displayed with next to Text Group Name ...

Page 1111: ...LM101 By using the Script Editor conditional expressions operators and functions can be described by selecting them from a list and an error in the script can also be determined The script can also be exported as a text file so the script can be edited by a text editor such as Notepad and the edited script can be imported back into the Script Editor by saving it as a text file For details refer to...

Page 1112: ...y and output delay of the expansion module can be kept to a minimum by this script Only one cyclic script can be set to a project For details refer to Chapter 30 4 Cyclic Script on page 30 28 Trigger condition of the script Trigger conditions that can be set for the script are as follows Rising edge Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Script is executed ...

Page 1113: ...ut the data types refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Data type is set by the Script Editor For the setting method refer to 2 3 Script Editor on page 20 12 Types of the data type Required word count Range that can be processed UBIN16 W 1 0 to 65 535 BIN16 I 1 32 768 to 32 767 UBIN32 D 2 0 to 4 294 967 295 BIN32 L 2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 BCD4 B 1 999 to 9 999 BCD8 EB 2 9 999 ...

Page 1114: ...er to Chapter 4 System Area on page 4 30 Beginning device address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 System Area 1 System Area 2 System Area 3 System Area 4 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1st word 2nd word 11th bit 3rd word 4th word 5th word 6th word 8th word 7th word 10th word 9th word Types of script error Cause Processing error Dividend was divided by 0 for division and residue calculation Data types are...

Page 1115: ...gistered script can be used in a Multi Button Script Command Multi Command Global Script and Cyclic Script 1 On the Configuration tab in the Manager group click Script Manager Script Manager opens 2 Click Add Script Editor opens 3 Specify Script ID When creating a new script enter the script ID 1 to 32000 2 Editing and Management of the Script HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G ...

Page 1116: ...s contained in a script select Float32 F for the Data Type of the script If there are only integer values from 0 to 65 535 select UBIN16 W To create a script using the samples provided by WindO I NV4 under Function List select Category and Function and then click Insert Format The sample shown in Format is inserted at the cursor position in Script When you are in the following dialog boxes clickin...

Page 1117: ...project or parts it cannot be deleted Reduce Deletes the scripts that are registered in the script list but are not used in the project Import Imports a saved script file with Export Click this button to display the Open dialog box For details refer to Importing script on page 20 10 Export Saves a selected script in Script List as a file Click this button to display the Browse For Folder dialog bo...

Page 1118: ...istered script as a file 1 On the Configuration tab in the Manager group click Script Manager Script Manager opens 2 Select the script in Script List and then click Export The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed The operation of the script used in the project can be checked with the debug function of the simulator For details refer to Chapter 26 3 5 Script Debugger on page 26 15 To export mu...

Page 1119: ... file extension If the number of the script ID is less than 5 digits 0 is written in the rest of the digits It is omitted if the script name is not configured Example 1 In Script List on the Script Manager dialog box Script ID is 12345 and Script Name is sample Script12345_sample txt Example 2 In Script List on the Script Manager dialog box Script ID is 6 and Script Name is blank Script00006_ txt ...

Page 1120: ...h a script ID already registered on the Script Manager an overwrite confirmation message is displayed Click Yes to overwrite the script displayed in the confirmation message Click Yes To All to overwrite all the scripts Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the script displayed in the confirmation message Click Cancel to stop importing scripts To import multiple scr...

Page 1121: ...WindO I NV4 User s Manual 20 11 2 Editing and Management of the Script 20 Script 4 Click OK The imported script is displayed on the Script Manager This concludes importing script ...

Page 1122: ... be processed by the script For details about the data type refer to 1 3 Data Type of the Script on page 20 3 Script Enter the script Single script limitation is 240 characters per line with up to 1024 lines Error Check The script being edited is checked for errors Description When you add a descriptive text to the written script or invalidate it add at the beginning of the line to comment out it ...

Page 1123: ...icking on the Save button the script being edited is saved in text format txt A saved script can be inserted in the script using the Import button Options The Options dialog box is displayed The fonts and color of the text tab indents etc used in the Script text box are set in the Options dialog box For details refer to Options Dialog Box on page 20 15 Find The Find dialog box is displayed Enter t...

Page 1124: ...the Script text box it will only search and replace within the selected range The size of the script edit box can be changed by dragging the right bottom corner of the Script Editor By hiding the Function List and Script Compilation Output the script editing area text box will become larger making the editing of script easier Category Lists the categories of the functions Function Lists the functi...

Page 1125: ...ed or selected Size The font size dots for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected Sample Displays a sample of the text with the Font and Size as specified in the Script text box Color Displays each of the text colors for Comment Keyword and Device Address To change the text color click on the right of the color to display the Color Palette and select the color Text other than comm...

Page 1126: ...the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Global Script The Global Script Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Under Settings select the script ID to configure and then click Edit The Global Script dialog box is displayed 3 On the General tab select the Use Global Script check box 3 Global Script HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P With Global Script you canno...

Page 1127: ...ice Address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Falling edge Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 1 to 0 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for Device Address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Ch...

Page 1128: ...he list Down Shifts the selected Global Script settings down the list Delete Deletes the registered settings from the list Order Displays the number 1 to 16 for the order to execute the Global Script Script Displays whether or not to use the Global Script Double clicking the cell switches between Enable and Disable Script ID Specify the script ID 1 to 32 000 of the script to execute Script Name Di...

Page 1129: ...e Script Manager is displayed when the button is clicked The script can be selected from the script list of the Script Manager For details refer to 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script specified by the script ID Script Displays the contents of the script specified by the script ID With Global Script you cannot do indirect read and indirect write of the extern...

Page 1130: ... Falling edge is selected in Trigger Type Period sec Specify the scan frequency in seconds 1 to 3 600 This is enabled only when Fixed Period is selected in Trigger Type Rising edge Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 1 to 0 Always Enabled The script is executed on every scan of the MICRO I Fixed...

Page 1131: ... expression 2 is determined if conditional expression 1 is not satisfied and execution line 2 is executed if conditional expression 2 is satisfied Execution line 3 is executed if conditional expression 2 is not satisfied too switch case default switch case constant 1 break case constant2 break default break Execution line 1 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches constant 1 Exec...

Page 1132: ...e determination of constant 2 by break after executing execution line 1 and process will move to execution line 3 return return It will exit the script and execute the next parts or script Cond expr 1 Cond expr 2 Exe line 1 Exe line 2 Exe line 3 Cond expr Exe line 1 Exe line 2 Exe line 3 a b Expr Expr 1 Expr 2 Operator Format Description Compares if is equal to Compares if is not equal to Compares...

Page 1133: ...t reset RST Turns bit device to 0 It will be same result as 0 Bit reverse REV Reverses the 1 and 0 of bit device It will be same result as a a a a a a a a a a Function Format Description Maximum value MAX Maximum value out of is returned This can be used for all data types Up to 15 arguments can be defined Minimum value MIN Minimum value out of is returned This can be used for all data types Up to...

Page 1134: ...an and the value is returned This can only be used for data type Float32 F Conversion from Radian to Angle DEG Value of is converted from radian to degree and the value is returned This can only be used for data type Float32 F Function Format Description Conversion from BCD to Binary BCD2BIN BCD value of is returned in binary value This can be used with data types UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D and BIN...

Page 1135: ...ing device address of copy target Range of copy in words Values of device address from for words are copied to for words respectively Specified range is copied in word unit Up to 64 words can be copied Function Format Description Character string copy STRCUT Beginning device address of copy target Beginning device address containing copy source character string Start location of copy 0 127 Number ...

Page 1136: ... pattern is 2 Continued to next page Function Format Description Drawing of straight line LINE Straight line connecting the start coordinate and end coordinate is drawn Start coordinate X Start coordinate Y End coordinate X End coordinate Y Line width Line type Line color Line width Line type Line color can be omitted Specification of Line width is as follows It will be set to 1 1 dot when omitted...

Page 1137: ...other than 1 1 dot Foreground color Background color is specified by the color data It will be set to 255 white when omitted For color data refer to Appendix Color Data Correspondence Table on page A 1 Specification of Pattern is as follows It will be set to 0 None when omitted Specification of Rounded corner type is as follows It will be set to 0 None when omitted Rounded corner radius is specifi...

Page 1138: ... Description Indirect specification OFFSET Reference device address Device address to store the indirect value 0 to 32767 Specify the device address words from Indirect read Specify OFFSET function to the right of the assignment statement Format example OFFSET Operation Stores the value of device address in words from into Indirect write Specify OFFSET function to the left of the assignment statem...

Page 1139: ...gle byte Double byte characters can be used after Definition of comment Sample definition 1234 Define the numeric value directly 1234 Define the negative number with a minus symbol at the beginning 12 34 Decimal number can be defined for real numbers Float32 F Define a period between the whole numbers and decimal numbers 0x12AB Define 0 zero and x lower case x at the beginning of the value 12ABh A...

Page 1140: ... value is stored in LDR200 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is also not 0 then 0x1234 is stored in LDR300 If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is 0 then nothing is executed If the value of LDR100 is 0 then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR200 5 Script Coding Examples HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2...

Page 1141: ...0 or 1 then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200 Script Operation description If the values of LDR100 LDR200 and LDR300 are all not 0 then 100 is stored in LDR400 If the values of LDR100 and LDR200 are not 0 and the value of LDR300 is 0 then 200 is stored in LDR400 If either the value of LDR100 or LDR200 is 0 then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR300 Example 5 1 4 Conditional branching if 0...

Page 1142: ...hile statement repeats Inside the while statement if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal the while statement will terminate and after LM 0 changes to 1 execution breaks out of the while statement In the script example above the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice and after LM0 changes to 1 execution breaks out of the while statement loop After executi...

Page 1143: ...s added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 2 Repeats in this manner for the third to ninth iterations Tenth iteration loop The value of LDR0 is 9 so the condition LDR 0 10 is true and the statements inside while are executed The value of LDR19 9 words from LDR10 is stored in LDR109 9 words from LDR100 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 10 ...

Page 1144: ...ecimal to octal conversion using a while statement Convert a decimal value to octal For example convert 10 Dec to 12 Oct 16 Dec to 20 Oct Convert a value to octal up to 4 digits max 1 0 while counter 2 LDR 100 gets original data 3 1 decimal base 4 0 calculation results repeat four times while 1 4 Extract 1st octal digit from original data Store working result in 10 10 2 8 Convert the extracted res...

Page 1145: ...tion description If the value of LDR100 is not 0x1234 then 0 is stored in LDR300 If the value of LDR100 is 0x1234 then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and the script terminates The return statement does not break out of a function like the break statement it terminates the script and executes the next part or script Example 5 1 11 Conditional branching with switch switch LDR 100 case 10 LDR 200 0x1234 ...

Page 1146: ...the value of LDR300 is 5 and the value of LM0 is 1 5 2 Relational Operators Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is not equal to the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is less than the value of LDR200 then ...

Page 1147: ...n If the value of LDR100 is greater than the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is greater than or equal to the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Example 5 2 4 Less than or equal to if LDR 100 LDR 200 LDR 300 0xl00 Example 5 2 5 Greater than if LDR 100 LDR 200 LDR 300 0xl00 Example 5 2 6 Greater than or equal to if LDR 10...

Page 1148: ...f LDR100 is not 0 or the value of LDR200 is not 0 then 100 is stored in LDR300 If either is true the processing in the brackets is executed Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is not equal to 0x1234 then 100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is 0 then 100 is stored in LDR300 This is the same as the code if 0 LDR 100 Example 5 3 1 Logical AND if...

Page 1149: ...ues of LDR100 and LDR200 are multiplied together and the result is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the remainder is stored in LDR300 Example 5 4 1 Addition LDR 300 LDR 100 LDR 200 Example 5 4 2 Subtraction ...

Page 1150: ...e values of LM100 and LM101 is 1 LM200 changes to 1 If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0 LM200 changes to 0 The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram Script Operation description The logical XOR operation on the value of LDR100 and each bit in 0xFF is stored in LDR200 For example if the value of LDR100 is 15 0x0F then LDR200 is 240 0xF0 Example ...

Page 1151: ...to 0 The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is shifted left by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300 For example if the value of LDR100 is 1 and the value of LDR200 is 3 1 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the result 8 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is shift...

Page 1152: ...o 1 The result is the same as LM 100 1 Script Operation description Turns LM100 to 0 The result is the same as LM 100 0 Script Operation description Flips LM100 1 and 0 The result is the same as LM 100 LM 100 Example 5 6 1 Set a bit SET LM 100 Example 5 6 2 Reset a bit RST LM 100 Example 5 6 3 Invert a bit REV LM 100 ...

Page 1153: ...ithm of the value of D20 and the result is stored in D10 Only the data type Float32 F can be used Script Operation description Calculates the logarithm of the value of D20 with 10 as the base and the result is stored in D10 Only the data type Float32 F can be used Script Operation description Calculates the power of a value For example when the value of D20 is 10 and the value of D30 is 5 the func...

Page 1154: ...can be used Script Operation description Calculates the tangent of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10 Only the data type Float32 F can be used Script Operation description Calculates the arcsine of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10 Only the data type Float32 F can be used Script Operation description Calculates the arccosine of the value of D20 and stores t...

Page 1155: ...ation description Converts the value of D20 from degrees to radians and stores the result in D10 Only the data type Float32 F can be used Script Operation description Converts the value of D20 from radians to degrees and stores the result in D10 Only the data type Float32 F can be used Example 5 7 13 Arctangent D 10 ATAN D 20 Example 5 7 14 Convert angle to radians D 10 RAD D 20 Example 5 7 15 Con...

Page 1156: ...example if the floating point value 1234 0x449A4000 as a binary value is stored in LDR100 1234 binary value is stored in LDR200 If the floating point value 1234 56 0x449A51EC as a binary value is stored in LDR100 the value after the decimal point is discarded and 1234 binary value is stored in LDR200 Script Operation description Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a floating point value and sto...

Page 1157: ...ils refer to Chapter 4 3 1 System Tab on page 4 25 A NULL terminating character 0x00 is added to the end of the string Device address Stored value Device address Stored value Upper byte Lower byte 2 3 x 0 2 1 3 x 0 1 LDR100 4 3 2 1 LDR200 LDR101 3 0x33 4 0x34 LDR102 0x00 0x00 Terminating character Terminating character Device address Stored value Device address Stored value Upper byte Lower byte 1...

Page 1158: ...stem tab in the Project Settings dialog box Depending on the setting the upper and lower bytes are stored in the reverse of the following explanation For details refer to Chapter 4 3 1 System Tab on page 4 25 Device address Stored value Upper byte Lower byte Device address Stored value 4 3 2 1 LDR100 2 3 x 0 2 1 3 x 0 1 LDR200 LDR201 3 0x33 4 0x34 LDR202 0x00 0x00 Terminating character Terminating...

Page 1159: ...ed in LDR0 If even a single one is not equal 0 is stored Example 5 7 22 Word unit data comparison LDR 0 MEMCMP LDR 100 LDR 200 10 LDR100 LDR101 LDR102 LDR108 LDR109 LDR200 LDR201 LDR202 LDR208 LDR209 Compare each LDR107 LDR207 Even if the data type is set to UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD8 EB or Float32 F the comparison is performed from the start device address in word units Example 5 7 23 Bit unit data co...

Page 1160: ...copy MEMCPY LDR 100 LDR 200 10 LDR100 LDR101 LDR102 LDR108 LDR109 LDR200 LDR201 LDR202 LDR208 LDR209 Copy each LDR107 LDR207 Even if the data type is set to UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD8 EB or Float32 F the data is copied from the start device address in word units Example 5 7 25 Bit unit data copy MEMCPY LM 0 LDR 100 2 10 3rd bit of LDR100 3rd bit of LDR101 3rd bit of LDR102 3rd bit of LDR108 3rd bit of ...

Page 1161: ... can be specified in the range from 1 to 128 STRCUT LDR 100 LDR 200 1 4 Device address Stored value Start position Character count Device address Stored value LDR200 Upper byte A 0x41 0 LDR100 Upper byte C 0x43 Lower byte B 0x42 1 Lower byte D 0x44 LDR201 Upper byte C 0x43 2 LDR101 Upper byte E 0x45 Lower byte D 0x44 3 Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character LDR202 Upper byte E 0x45 4 Lower byte F 0...

Page 1162: ... The terminating character is not included in the string length Device address Stored value Device address Stored value LDR200 Upper byte A 0x41 LDR100 7 Lower byte B 0x42 LDR201 Upper byte C 0x43 Lower byte D 0x44 LDR202 Upper byte E 0x45 Lower byte F 0x46 LDR203 Upper byte G 0x47 Lower byte 0x00 Device address Stored value Device address Stored value LDR200 Upper byte A 0x41 LDR100 3 Lower byte ...

Page 1163: ...ng The terminating character is not included in the string length Device address Stored value Device address Stored value LDR100 Upper byte A 0x41 LDR100 Upper byte A 0x41 Lower byte B 0x42 Lower byte B 0x42 LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 Lower byte 0x00 Lower byte D 0x44 LDR102 Upper byte E 0x45 Device address Stored value Lower byte F 0x46 LDR200 Upper byte D 0x44 LDR103 Upper...

Page 1164: ...e D 0x44 LDR100 Upper byte A 0x41 0 LDR0 3 Lower byte E 0x45 Lower byte B 0x42 1 LDR201 Upper byte F 0x46 LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 2 Lower byte G 0x47 Lower byte D 0x44 3 LDR202 Upper byte 0x00 Terminating character LDR102 Upper byte E 0x45 4 Lower byte 0x00 Lower byte F 0x46 5 LDR103 Upper byte G 0x47 6 Lower byte H 0x48 7 LDR104 Upper byte I 0x49 8 Lower byte J 0x4A 9 LDR105 Upper byte K 0x47 10...

Page 1165: ...200 Upper byte E 0x45 LDR100 Upper byte A 0x41 0 LDR0 4 Lower byte 0x7E Lower byte B 0x42 1 LDR201 Upper byte 0x3F LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 2 Lower byte G 0x47 Lower byte D 0x44 3 LDR202 Upper byte H 0x48 LDR102 Upper byte E 0x45 4 Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character Lower byte 0x3F 5 LDR103 Upper byte G 0x47 6 Lower byte H 0x48 7 LDR104 Upper byte I 0x49 8 Lower byte J 0x4A 9 LDR105 Upper byte ...

Page 1166: ...es of the rectangle s lower right corner X 150 Y 100 on the screen where the script is running The line width line type foreground color background color pattern rounding type and rounding radius are omitted so the rectangle s line width is 1 1 pixel line type is 1 solid line foreground color and background color is 255 white pattern is 0 none rounding type is 0 none and rounding radius is 0 0 pix...

Page 1167: ...8 words from LDR10 is read and stored in LDR200 Script Operation description When the value of D20 is 3 the constant 1234 is stored in LDR13 the device address 3 words from LDR10 Example 5 7 36 Indirect read LDR 200 OFFSET LDR 10 D 20 Read 0000 LDR10 0008 D20 8 1234 LDR18 1234 LDR200 Example 5 7 37 Indirect write OFFSET LDR 10 D 20 1234 Write 0000 LDR10 0003 D20 3 1234 LDR13 1234 ...

Page 1168: ...ingle script continues for more than the time limit due to a while definition etc an execution time over error occurs and that script will be halted Define the script so the execution time for one script does not exceed 3 000 milliseconds For details refer to 1 4 Script Error on page 20 4 Do not write into the external device address When it is written into an external device address in the while ...

Page 1169: ...ript 6 3 About the Priority of the Operator As a basic rule operators are calculated in order from left of the line but when multiple calculations are combined they are calculated in following priority Priority Operator High Negative number Subtraction Low ...

Page 1170: ...6 Important Notes 20 60 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1171: ...s to 1 Play a sound file when the screen is pressed instead of a beep 1 2 Supported Sound Files Sound files that meet the following specifications can be played with MICRO I Chapter 21 Sound Function 1 Function and Settings HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P LM0000 LM0000 0 1 MICRO I HG4G HG3G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V MICRO I HG4G HG3G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V Item Description...

Page 1172: ...n a value of device address changes from 0 to 1 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Sound The Sound Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Double click the cell in the File Name column to register a sound file The Open dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the sound file to register and click Open 2 Sound Function Configuration Procedure HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G...

Page 1173: ... Device Address Settings on page 2 68 7 Configure Repeat Change Volume Level and any other options and then click OK The Sound Settings dialog box closes This concludes the configuration to play a sound file when a value of device address changes to 1 To play a sound file as a touch sound instead of a beep 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Sound The Sound Settings dialog b...

Page 1174: ... under Trigger Condition and select None 6 Click OK The Sound Settings dialog box closes 7 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed The procedures to save the sound file to the external memory device are as follows On the Home tab click the arrow under Download and click Project Data to display the Download dialog box Select the ...

Page 1175: ...eck box 9 Select Sound File and specify the ID of the sound file to play in Sound ID Enter a sound ID number or click to specify the sound ID number with the displayed Sound Settings dialog box 10 Click the OK button The Sound Settings dialog box closes This concludes the configuration to play a sound file as the touch sound ...

Page 1176: ...tton to delete the contents of that row Sound file play Select an ID and click the button to play that row s sound file Sound file stop Stops playing the sound file 3 Sound Settings Dialog Box HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P For HMI Special Data Register and HMI Special Internal Relay related to the sound function refer to Chapter 33 Internal Devices on page 33 1 Se...

Page 1177: ...s Int Memory or External Memory Device Double click the cell to change The external memory device to be saved is the SD memory card Trigger Condition Select Device Address or None for the condition to play the sound file Double click the cell to change Device Address Plays the sound file according to the value of device address None Select when playing a sound file as a touch sound Trigger Device ...

Page 1178: ... continues playing without making a sound Enter the Device Address in the text box or click to specify the address in the displayed Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Individual Settings Dialog Box Register or change the settings of the selected ID ID Shows the Sound ID 1 to 1024 of the sound file to be played If th...

Page 1179: ...e Address Specify the device address that will be the condition for playing the sound file Click to display Tag Editor and specify the device address For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Repeat Select this check box to play the sound file repeatedly The file will play repeatedly until the Trigger Condition is no longer met When ...

Page 1180: ...The touch sound s beep and a sound file can be played simultaneously When touch panel is touched twice before sound from first touch has finished playing For the same touch sound file the one played later has priority If the touch panel is pressed twice before the sound has finished playing from the first touch playback of the sound file stops and the same sound file plays again from the beginning...

Page 1181: ...g device addresses For sound files set by trigger device addresses the one played first has priority If both change to 1 simultaneously the smaller sound ID has priority When multiple trigger device addresses change to 1 simultaneously the smaller sound ID has priority and the sound files play in order For example when playing sound ID1 when trigger device address 1 is 1 and sound ID2 when trigger...

Page 1182: ...Enabled no other sound IDs will play until the trigger condition for this sound ID is no longer satisfied For example when playing sound ID1 when trigger device address 1 is 1 and sound ID2 when trigger device address 2 is 1 even if sound ID2 s trigger device address changes to 1 while sound ID1 is set to Repeat Enabled and repeatedly playing sound ID1 playback continues When sound ID1 s trigger d...

Page 1183: ... the movie files on the Video Display Save video camera images and microphone audio 1 to the external memory device before and after an event occurs 1 Recording sound function is for HG4G 3G only 2 HG5G 4G 3G V only 3 This is applicable for HG4G 3G with a video interface only Chapter 22 Multimedia Function 1 Function and Settings HG3G HG2G 5F HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2...

Page 1184: ...V Video Camera Images Channel 1 Images Channel 2 MICRO I HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V 再生 停止 前へ 次へ CH1 再生 停止 前へ 次へ CH2 The MICRO I can play movie files display video and output audio using the Video Display Chapter 10 4 Video Display on page 10 81 The MICRO I can record and play video and audio using the key buttons Chapter 8 Recording Images and Sound on page 8 101 Chapter 8 Playing Recorded Images and So...

Page 1185: ...ll and enter the file path of the movie file The maximum number is 250 alphanumeric characters Example When specifying the movie file sample01 mp4 that has been saved to the MOVIE folder in the External Memory Device folder HGDATA01 Enter sample01 3 Repeat steps 2 to add all the movie files to play 1 to 64 4 Click OK The Multimedia Settings dialog box closes This concludes the configuration to reg...

Page 1186: ...the Video Display 2 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Video Display 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display 4 Double click the dropped Video Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed 5 On the General tab under Action select Play the Movie File List This option plays all the movies registered in Movie File List in the...

Page 1187: ...y when the Play button is pressed Click to display the Multimedia Settings dialog box Select the ID number from the movie file list The movie files registered in the movie file list are played in order from the specified ID number 7 Click OK The Properties of Video Display dialog box closes This concludes the configuration to play a movie file list on the Video Display ...

Page 1188: ...ecify the bit device that will trigger the start of recording in Trigger Device Address Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 6 Specify the recording time before and after the event occurs Recording Time Before Event With the point in time when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1 as the...

Page 1189: ...e Video Display to play the recorded images On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Video Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display 3 Double click the dropped Video Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed 4 On the General tab under Action select Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen This option selects...

Page 1190: ...re you wish to place the Goto Screen Button 8 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 9 On the General tab select Open File Screen for Movie Files for Action Mode 10 Specify the display location in coordinates for the movie file screen to open above the base screen with Coordinates X Y With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the uppe...

Page 1191: ... images Press to select 20110313 and then press Select The contents of the 20110313 folder will be displayed Movie files that meet the following specifications can be played with the MICRO I HG5G 4G 3G V AVI file avi HG4G 3G MP4 file mp4 For details refer to Chapter 2 1 6 Available Movie Files on page 2 37 Restore RepeatON RepeatOFF Full REW FF Next Back Stop Play Pause MICRO I Video Display Press...

Page 1192: ... 000 512 000 000 Folder Up Update Page Up Page Down Select 1 2 Restore RepeatON RepeatOFF Full REW FF Next Back Stop Play Pause MICRO I Video Display Press Play While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function while data is being recorded with a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the recording function or while data is being saved to the ex...

Page 1193: ... is displayed 2 Click the Video Input tab 3 Select NTSC or PAL for the signal standard of the device connected to the MICRO I 4 Click OK The Multimedia Settings dialog box closes This concludes configuring the video input The adopted format for the signal standard differs according to the country or region NTSC Japan Korea Taiwan North America Central America South America others PAL Europe China ...

Page 1194: ...G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P ID Displays the movie file list ID File Path Displays the file path of the movie file Click the cell and then enter the file path of a movie file Maximum number is 250 alphanumeric characters To specify a movie file saved in the MOVIE folder in the External Memory Device folder configured on the External Memory Device tab in the Project Settings dialog box ...

Page 1195: ...click this button Up Shifts the selected movie file upward on this list Down Shifts the selected movie file downward on this list Import Imports an exported movie file list Existing movie file lists will be overwritten Export Exports a movie file list with the file name movie lst Even if the file path of a movie file is deleted from the movie file list the movie file itself will not be deleted ...

Page 1196: ... page 2 68 Recording Time Before Event Specifies the amount of time 1 to 15 sec to record before the value of trigger device address changes from 0 to 1 This option can only be set when Use Event Recording is selected Recording Time After Event Specifies the amount of time 1 to 15 sec to record after the value of trigger device address changes from 0 to 1 This option can only be set when Use Event...

Page 1197: ...hat will connect to the MICRO I Input Signal Select from NTSC or PAL for the signal standard of the device connected with the MICRO I The adopted format for signal standards will differ depending on the country or region NTSC Japan Korea Taiwan North America Central America South America etc PAL Europe China The Middle East South East Asia etc ...

Page 1198: ... 4 Checking the Status of the Function HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Bit position Description 0 While data is recording after an event occurs and while recorded data is being saved to the external memory device the value changes to 1 1 to 15 Reserved Function name Description Parameters Multimedia Function Error Information Stores error information for the multime...

Page 1199: ...ccurs When data was recorded with a part it takes approximately 1 second after the data is finished being saved to the external memory device until the event recording function resumes operating When a movie file was played it takes approximately 1 second from stopping playback until the event recording function resumes operating While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event re...

Page 1200: ...5 Restrictions 22 18 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1201: ...ypes of security groups provided security groups Administrator Operator and Reader and user created security groups One or more of these security groups can be assigned to users One or more users must always be assigned to Administrator A user name and password are associated with a user account and up to 15 user accounts can be created Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function 1 Overview...

Page 1202: ...O I Password screen or the WindO I NV4 Enter Password dialog box Password screen Enter Password dialog box CAN User A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password You can set a dedicated password when opening the project In the Security dialog box on the Options tab select the Use Password to open a Project check box and then set the password If a password...

Page 1203: ...ly 3 This is applicable for models with a video interface only The Enter Password dialog box is displayed Opening project data Computer MICRO I The Enter Password dialog box is displayed Download Download Project data Recipe files Picture files Sound files Custom Web Page files Movie files Movie file list USB flash drive SD memory card External memory device 2 3 3 1 The Password screen is displaye...

Page 1204: ...oad Screenshot data Alarm Log data Data Log data Operation Log data Recipe files Picture files Sound files Movie files Movie file list Project data USB flash drive SD memory card External memory device 1 3 2 3 The Password screen is displayed CAN User Up Down A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enter the appropriate password for Data Transfer Function Pa...

Page 1205: ...e Monitor Adjust Brightness CAN User Up Down A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password MICRO I MICRO I The Password screen is displayed Device Monitor CAN User Up Down A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 System Mode Adjust Brightness Maintenance Password MICRO I MICRO I The Password screen is displayed CAN U...

Page 1206: ...p can partially change project data by changing values of device addresses This security group download data to external memory device and copy files from USB flash drives to SD memory cards Reader The Reader group can read data stored on external memory device copy files from SD memory cards to USB flash drives and read values of device addresses with the Web Server function Web Browser Terminal ...

Page 1207: ...external memory device 2 YES NO NO NO Deleting files in external memory device 2 YES NO NO NO Formatting external memory device 2 YES NO NO NO Copying files to an SD memory card 3 YES YES NO NO Copying files to a USB flash drive 3 YES YES YES NO Switching to the System Mode YES NO NO NO Use Device Monitor YES YES NO NO Remotely monitoring the MICRO I state from a web browser terminal YES YES YES N...

Page 1208: ... I MICRO I MICRO I Base screen 2 Cannot be displayed Base screen 2 Can be displayed Switch user account The Password screen is displayed Line Chart is displayed Goto Screen Button Open password screen Line Chart that can only be displayed with User2 User2 User2 No user CAN User2 Up Down A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I...

Page 1209: ...er None Goto Screen Button Open password screen No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted 2 Operator Permitted Permitted 3 Reader Permitted Permitted 4 GroupA Permitted Permitted Line Chart and Bar Chart No Group Name Display 1 Administrator Prohibited 2 Operator Permitted 3 Reader Permitted 4 GroupA Permitted Button No Group Name Display Input 1 Administrator Prohibited Perm...

Page 1210: ...d and switch to User3 999 999 999 CAN User Up Down A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password 999 Cannot be operated Can be operated Displayed Not displayed Parts that are not displayed on the screen cannot be operated regardless of the input security group MICRO I MICRO I MICRO I User4 For User4 parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for A...

Page 1211: ... in the Protect group click User Accounts The Security dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Use Security functions check box The settings related to user accounts are displayed The user account already provided with WindO I NV4 is as follows 3 Click Add The New User Account dialog box is displayed 2 Security Function Configuration Procedure HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1...

Page 1212: ...nter the password in Confirm Password that was entered in step 6 8 Click the Group Membership tab Assign the security groups to the user being created Administrator Operator and Reader have already been provided in Security Group If you will not add a new security group proceed to step 17 If you will not assign a security group proceed to step 18 You cannot use the following characters in the user...

Page 1213: ...The Security Settings dialog box is displayed 10 Click Add The New Security Group dialog box is displayed 11 Specify the Security Group number 4 to 15 in Number 12 Enter the name for the new group in Group Name The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters Japanese None English and Chinese cannot be used for the group name ...

Page 1214: ... to 3 Double clicking the Permission cells switches between Permitted and Prohibited 14 Click OK The group added is displayed in Security Group 15 Repeat steps 10 to 14 and create all of the necessary user accounts 16 Click OK The group added is displayed in Security Group Permitted and Prohibited cannot be changed for the operations subject to password protection in No 4 to 15 ...

Page 1215: ...proceed to step 20 19 Repeat steps 3 to 18 and create all of the necessary user accounts 20 Click OK The Security dialog box closes This concludes creating a user account User3 User4 User2 User1 Created security groups 12 max GroupA GroupB GroupC GroupC GroupB GroupB GroupC Multiple user accounts can use the same security groups To select multiple security groups press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while...

Page 1216: ...ialog box is displayed 2 Select the user account to edit and click Edit The Change User Account dialog box is displayed 3 On the General tab change User Name and New Password 4 Enter the password in Confirm Password that was entered in step 3 To display the content of the password for New Password and Confirm Password select the Show Passwords check box in the Security dialog box ...

Page 1217: ...The security groups are copied to To If you will not delete a security group proceed to step 8 7 Select the security groups assigned to the user to delete in To and click Delete The security groups are deleted from To To select multiple security groups press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items To select multiple security groups press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the...

Page 1218: ...x This concludes editing a user account Deleting a User Account 1 On the Configuration tab in the Protect group click User Accounts The Security dialog box is displayed 2 Select the user account to delete and click Remove The user account is deleted 3 Click OK The Security dialog box closes This concludes deleting a user account ...

Page 1219: ...the Security Function 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups Adding a Security Group 1 On the Project window double click Security Settings The Security Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Click Add The New Security Group dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the Security Group number 4 to 15 in Number ...

Page 1220: ...characters 5 Under Permission set whether or not to permit the operations subject to password protection in No 1 to 3 Double clicking the Permission cells switches between Permitted and Prohibited Japanese None English and Chinese cannot be used for the group name Permitted and Prohibited cannot be changed for the operations subject to password protection in No 4 to 15 ...

Page 1221: ...2 Security Function Configuration Procedure 23 User Accounts and the Security Function 6 Click OK The group added is displayed in Security Group 7 Click OK The Security Settings dialog box closes This concludes adding a security group ...

Page 1222: ... Rename The Change Security Group Name dialog box is displayed 3 Change the name of the security group to the new group name in New Name The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters 4 Click OK The Change Security Group Name dialog box closes 5 Click OK The Security Settings dialog box closes This concludes changing the name of a security group The group name for Administrator Operator an...

Page 1223: ...der Security Group select the security group for which the operation privileges will be changed and under Permission set whether or not to permit the operations subject to password protection in No 1 to 3 Double clicking the Permission cells switches between Permitted and Prohibited 3 Click OK The Security Settings dialog box closes This concludes creating a user account Permitted and Prohibited c...

Page 1224: ...e security group in Security Group to delete and click Delete The security group is deleted 3 Click OK The Security Settings dialog box closes This concludes deleting a security group To select multiple security groups press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items Security groups configured for user accounts screens and parts cannot be deleted Administrator Operator and Reader ca...

Page 1225: ...automatically display the Password screen when the user attempts to switch to a base screen they cannot access with the current user account using the Goto Screen button select the Change Screen check box and the Change Screen automatically after entering Password check box in Open Password Screen automatically by the following operations on the Options tab of the Security dialog box For displayin...

Page 1226: ...ton 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button 4 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed 5 Select Switch to Base Screen for Action Mode 6 Specify the screen number of the base screen to switch to with Screen Number under Goto Screen 2 is specified here 7 Click OK Close the Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog ...

Page 1227: ... 9 Specify the screen number of the base screen to switch to with Number on the General tab This is the same screen number as the screen number specified in step 6 2 is specified here 10 Click the Security tab 11 Change Display to Permitted for the security group that will be permitted to display the base screen Set Display to Permitted for GroupA 12 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary...

Page 1228: ...ess Down and select User2 3 Enter the password and press ENT If the correct password is entered the user account changes to User2 and the Password screen closes Base screen 2 is displayed Press the Goto Screen Button Base screen 1 No user MICRO I CAN User2 A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password CAN User2 A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T ...

Page 1229: ...ount on page 23 11 create the following user account 2 Create a Line Chart and configure the display security group On the Home tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Line Chart 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Line Chart 4 Double click the dropped Line Chart and the Properties dialog box is displayed Goto Screen Button Open password screen User2 No user M...

Page 1230: ...e Chart Set Display to Permitted for GroupA 7 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and click OK The Properties of Line Chart dialog box closes 8 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the base screen On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Goto Screen Button 9 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button ...

Page 1231: ...ode 12 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the base screen with Coordinates X Y With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates 13 Click OK The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes This concludes configuring the project to protect the display of a part X 0 to base scree...

Page 1232: ...yed 2 Press Down and select User2 3 Enter the password and press ENT If the correct password is entered the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen closes The Line Chart is displayed Press the Goto Screen Button No user MICRO I CAN User2 A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password CAN User2 A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR ...

Page 1233: ...r account 2 Create a Numerical Input and configure the input security group On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Input 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Input 4 Double click the dropped Numerical Input and the Properties dialog box is displayed Goto Screen Button Open password screen User2 No user 999 999 999 MICRO I...

Page 1234: ...Input Set Input to Permitted for GroupA 7 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and click OK The Properties of Numerical Input dialog box closes 8 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the base screen On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Goto Screen Button 9 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button ...

Page 1235: ...de 12 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the base screen with Coordinates X Y With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates 13 Click OK The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes This concludes configuring the project to protect the operation of a part X 0 to base scre...

Page 1236: ...s Down and select User2 3 Enter the password and press ENT If the correct password is entered the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen closes The Numerical Input can be operated Press the Goto Screen Button No user 999 MICRO I CAN User2 A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password CAN User2 A B C D E F G H I J K L CL...

Page 1237: ...s and operations by accounts The settings related to user accounts are displayed When this check box is cleared the switching to the System Mode monitor display or downloading or uploading data are protected by a single password Note the MICRO I is not password protected if Password is left blank 3 Security Dialog Box HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P User Name Enter ...

Page 1238: ...ration mode is changed Screens and parts cannot be displayed or operated that are protected by a security group Confirm Password Re enter the same password This option is only displayed when the Show Passwords check box is cleared No Displays the number 1 to 15 used when switching the user account via the value of device address Double clicking the cell displays the Change User Account dialog box ...

Page 1239: ...alue of device address When Edit was clicked and the Change User Account dialog box was displayed this item displays the selected user account number User Name Enter the name for the user account The maximum number is 8 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used New Password Enter the password The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15 Only uppercase alphabetic chara...

Page 1240: ...splays a list of all the security groups The provided security groups Administrator Operator and Reader are grayed out if assigned to another user account Add This button adds a security group You can create a maximum of 12 Click this button to display the Security Settings dialog box New security groups are added in the Security Settings dialog box For details refer to Adding a Security Group on ...

Page 1241: ...ge 23 19 Delete Deletes the security groups selected for Security Group For details refer to Deleting a Security Group on page 23 24 Rename Select a security group in Security Group and click this button to display the Change Security Group Name dialog box Change the name of the security group in the Change Security Group Name dialog box For details refer to Changing the Name of a Security Group o...

Page 1242: ... Name Displays the file name of the Custom Web Page created by the Web Page Editor For details about the Web Page Editor refer to Chapter 28 Web Page Editor on page 28 14 Security Group Name Displays the name of the security group Access Permission Displays whether or not to permit the display and operation of the Custom Web Page of the MICRO I from the web browser Double clicking the cell switche...

Page 1243: ...curity group selected under Security Group Japanese None English and Chinese cannot be used for the group name No Displays the number of the operations subject to password protection 1 to 17 Operation Displays details about the operations subject to password protection Permission Displays whether or not there is permission to use the operation Only operations set to Permitted can be used Only oper...

Page 1244: ...as User1 The user account switches according to the value of device address Confirm Password Re enter the password that was entered in Use Password to open Project Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place Trigger Device Address Specifies the word device to write the number Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer...

Page 1245: ...or the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Bit position Function Parameters 0 This bit stores the information when the correct password was entered on the Password screen and ENT was pressed 0 Password being entered 1 Correct password entered 1 This bit stores the information when an incorrect password was entered on the Password scree...

Page 1246: ...and Downloading or uploading project data or PLC programs with a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command Executing the USB Autorun function 4 Password Input HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Operations where the Password screen is not displayed are as follows Switching the base screen using the System Area Displaying the alarm screen for the alarm log Opening the key...

Page 1247: ...red password and cancels input The Password screen closes CLR Clears the entered password and continues input ENT Confirms the entered password and starts verifying the user name and password If the entered password is correct the Password screen closes If the entered password was incorrect the password entered on the Password screen is deleted and the screen returns to input mode CAN User A B C D...

Page 1248: ...a to an external memory device 1 Downloading data to an external memory device 1 while the MICRO I is running Uploading a project data Uploading data from an external memory device 1 Deleting all data Deleting data in external memory device 1 Formatting external memory device 1 Enter Password Dialog Box User Name Selects the user name This item can only be selected when multiple user accounts are ...

Page 1249: ...CRO I Edit Add Delete X Detail Reader Operator Admin Security Group Password User1 1 User Name User ID User Account Setting Screen Edit Add Delete X Detail Reader Operator Admin Security Group Password User1 1 User Name User ID Allocate a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the User Account Setting Screen to the MICRO I For details refer to Chapter 8 3 Goto Screen Button on pa...

Page 1250: ...een Command or Multi Command The User Account Setting Screen will be displayed 2 Press or to change the user number of the user account to edit 3 Press Edit 4 Change the user name If you will not change the user name proceed to step 5 1 Press the User Name input frame Edit Add Delete X Detail Reader Operator Admin Security Group Password User1 1 User Name User ID X GroupA User2 2 Edit Add Delete D...

Page 1251: ...he password If you will not change the password proceed to step 6 1 Press the Password input frame 2 Enter the password and press ENT CAN CLR BS 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 1 SP 5 0 ENT Test02_ Sign Alpha bet 1 2 編集 追加 削除 X GroupA Test02 2 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID CANCEL OK Edit User CAN CLR BS 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 1 SP 5 0 ENT Sign Alpha bet Password02_ 1 2 ...

Page 1252: ...Close 編集 追加 削除 X GroupA Password02 Test02 2 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID CANCEL OK Edit User Security groups are selected and cleared each time the names are pressed Press Gr 1 5 Gr 6 10 and Gr 11 15 to switch between the different sets of five security groups Close Administrator Gr 1 Operator Gr 2 Reader Gr 3 GroupA Gr 4 GroupB Gr 5 Gr 1 5 Gr 6 10 Gr 11 15 Close Administrator ...

Page 1253: ...y group assignments will be changed This concludes editing a user account 編集 追加 削除 X GroupA Admin Password02 Test02 2 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID CANCEL OK Edit User 編集 追加 削除 X 変更 GroupA Admin セキュリティ グループ Password02 Test02 2 Password User Name User ID OK Succeed X GroupA Admin Test02 2 Edit Add Delete Detail Security Group Password User Name User ID ...

Page 1254: ...and The User Account Setting Screen will be displayed 2 Press Add 3 Enter the User Name 1 Press the User Name input frame 2 Enter the user name and press ENT X Reader Operator Admin User1 1 Edit Add Delete Detail Security Group Password User Name User ID 編集 追加 削除 X 5 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID Add User CANCEL OK User ID displays the lowest user number 1 to 15 of all free numb...

Page 1255: ...e Password input frame 2 Enter the password and press ENT 5 Assign the security groups 1 Press Change 編集 追加 削除 X User5 5 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID Add User CANCEL OK CAN CLR BS 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 1 SP 5 0 ENT Pass05_ Sign Alpha bet 1 2 編集 追加 削除 X Pass05 User5 5 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID Add User CANCEL OK ...

Page 1256: ...6 10 and Gr 11 15 to switch between the different sets of five security groups Close Administrator Gr 1 Operator Gr 2 Reader Gr 3 GroupA Gr 4 GroupB Gr 5 Gr 1 5 Gr 6 10 Gr 11 15 Close Administrator Gr 1 Operator Gr 2 Reader Gr 3 GroupA Gr 4 GroupB Gr 5 Gr 1 5 Gr 6 10 Gr 11 15 編集 追加 削除 X GroupB Pass05 User5 5 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID Add User CANCEL OK 編集 追加 削除 X 変更 GroupA A...

Page 1257: ...hat has been set to Open User Account Setting Screen or execute the Goto Screen Command or Multi Command The User Account Setting Screen will be displayed 2 Press or to change the user number of the user account to delete 3 Press Delete X GroupB User5 5 Edit Add Delete Detail Security Group Password User Name User ID Edit Add Delete X Detail Reader Operator Admin Security Group Password User1 1 Us...

Page 1258: ...ount will be deleted This concludes deleting the User Account 編集 追加 削除 X GroupB User5 5 Change Security Group Password User Name User ID Delete User CANCEL OK 編集 追加 削除 X 変更 GroupA Admin セキュリティ グループ 5 Password User Name User ID OK Succeed X 5 Edit Add Delete Detail Security Group Password User Name User ID ...

Page 1259: ...Group Displays the security groups assigned to the loaded user account Detail Change Detail is displayed when the user account is loaded Press Detail to display the security group details screen where you can check details about the assigned security groups Change is displayed when the user account is edited or added Press Change to display the change security groups screen You can change the secu...

Page 1260: ...5 Editing User Accounts on the MICRO I 23 60 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1261: ...r Download MICRO I Project data When project data is downloaded using the online function the Alarm Log data Data Log data and Operation Log data in the data storage area are deleted All internal devices except for the HMI Keep Register LKR and HMI Keep Relay LK are cleared The following functions can be executed with downloading of project data Download optional fonts and Kanji dictionary data Do...

Page 1262: ...F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P 2 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only Computer Upload MICRO I Project data It is possible to upload recipe files picture files sound files 2 and Custom Web Page files from the External Memory Device folder in the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I together with uploading of project data For details on reading project data...

Page 1263: ...nd changing values of device addresses and switching screens using the monitor function Computer External device Screen monitor LDR1 0 130 MICRO I 130 Computer Switches to Base Screen 2 MICRO I Full Tank 1 130 External device External device Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 For details about monitor function refer to Chapter 25 1 Monitoring with WindO I NV4 on page 25 1 ...

Page 1264: ...Screen or Start Menu and refer to How to install USB driver The USB driver does not have to be installed for subsequent connections Note the connection must use the same USB port that was connected to when installing the USB driver The computer will not recognize the MICRO I immediately if the USB cable is connected to a different USB port Multiple MICRO I connections using different USB ports on ...

Page 1265: ...ication Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK Communicate with Select the device to communicate with from the following items MICRO I Communicate with the MICRO I connected to the computer For details refer to Using the online function for Ethernet communication on page 24 7 External Memory Device Read or write data to the external memory...

Page 1266: ...MICRO I 0 minute to 20 minutes USB Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB interface on the MICRO I Ethernet Connect the Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet interface on the MICRO I The port number is 2537 when connecting from WindO I NV4 to the MICRO I via Ethernet The default network settings configured on the MICRO I are as follows IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 25...

Page 1267: ...gs for the MICRO I to which you are downloading Delete Deletes download destinations from the Target List Browse Open IP Address Manager Specify the IP address for the target MICRO I with IP Address Manager For details refer to IP Address Manager on page 24 11 It is necessary to configure the MICRO I according to the local network that is used On the Communication Interface tab in the Project Sett...

Page 1268: ...et mask to register in the project data Default Gateway Enter the default gateway to register in the project data Port Number Enter the port number to register in the project data Regarding TCP port number of MICRO I note the following points The numbers that cannot be used 2538 for pass through 2101 for FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass through Duplicate numbers cannot be configured i...

Page 1269: ...h MICRO I dialog box IP Address Displays the IP address of the MICRO I MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the MICRO I Type Number Displays the part number of the MICRO I Port Number Displays the port number of the MICRO I If there is a MICRO I of the IP address already registered in the Target List on the Target IP Address dialog box an overwrite confirmation message is displayed Click Yes to...

Page 1270: ...n the internal memory Delete data from or formatting an external memory device inserted in the MICRO I Display information about runtime system and project data Monitor the MICRO I Specifies the IP address of the MICRO I used for communication Target IP Address Specify the IP address for the target MICRO I to execute this function Click to display IP Address Manager Specify the IP address for the ...

Page 1271: ...er in the project data Default Gateway Enter the default gateway to register in the project data Port Number Enter the port number to register in the project data Comment Enter comment to register in the project data Add New Adds IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Port Number and Comment to the list Delete Deletes the selected IP address from the list Select Closes IP Address Manager and apply...

Page 1272: ...ect data Modified Data Only Downloads files modified since the previous download If download fails select All to download 2 Downloading HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P To download a project without opening it on the Home tab in the Project group click the Download icon The Open dialog box is displayed Select a file then click Open The Download dialog box is displaye...

Page 1273: ...ject the Enter Password dialog box is displayed Enter the password For details refer to Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 23 1 Do not turn off the MICRO I while project data is downloading Turn the power of the MICRO I off and on and download the project data once again if the following conditions occur The project data downloading failed then WindO I NV4 cannot communicat...

Page 1274: ...ionary Data For details refer to Chapter 4 3 16 Font Kanji Dictionary Data Tab on page 4 75 Communicate with Available computer devices are displayed Port Available communication ports on the computer are displayed Change Changes communication settings Click this button to display the Communication Settings dialog box For details refer to 1 3 Change Communication Settings on page 24 5 All All proj...

Page 1275: ...emory device inserted in the MICRO I when downloading projects Only on channels for which Save to in the Recipe Settings dialog box is set to External Memory Device and Recipe Function is set to Use When Download Data is set to All recipe files are created for all channels for which recipe data is set When Download Data is set to Modified Data Only only recipe files on channels where recipe data h...

Page 1276: ...ect group click the arrow under Download 4 Select the method for downloading the file to the external memory device The Open dialog box is displayed Files to External Memory Device Stops operation of the MICRO I and downloads the file to the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I When the file download is complete operation resumes Files to External Memory Device while running Downloads th...

Page 1277: ...e IP address of the MICRO I and then click OK to start the download For details refer to To execute any function except project data download on page 24 10 6 Click Yes The Download dialog box is displayed and downloads the file When finished downloading a completion message is displayed 7 Click OK If security is enabled in the MICRO I project the Password Screen is displayed Select the user name a...

Page 1278: ...ice Maintenance dialog box To create a recipe file on an external memory device inserted in the computer use Save Recipe Files in External Memory Device in the Recipe Settings dialog box For details refer to Chapter 18 Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box on page 18 17 ...

Page 1279: ...d then click OK to start the upload For details refer to To execute any function except project data download on page 24 10 3 Uploading HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P While editing project data project data can be uploaded from the MICRO I even by clicking the Upload icon in the Transfer group on the Online tab If project data is being edited project data will be c...

Page 1280: ...essage is displayed Project Name The project is saved with the currently displayed name To change the project name enter a new name for the file The maximum number is 50 characters Location The uploaded project file is saved to the currently displayed location To change the location of the saved file click The Browse folders dialog box is displayed Select a location and then click OK 4 Click OK 5 ...

Page 1281: ...e Use Password to open a Project found under the Options tab in the Security dialog box When this check box is selected enter the password for Use Password to open a Project When this check box is cleared enter the password for the user account assigned to the Administrator security group For details refer to Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 23 1 For details on reading pr...

Page 1282: ...indO I NV4 Location Specifies the location for saving uploaded project files Click to display the Browse folders dialog box Select the location for saving then click OK Upload files used in this project from the External Memory Device To upload files located on an external memory device inserted in the MICRO I that are used by the project together with project data select the file to be uploaded f...

Page 1283: ...ter and the MICRO I In the Communication Settings dialog box select MICRO I from Communicate with For details refer to 1 3 Change Communication Settings on page 24 5 3 On the Home tab in the Project group click the arrow next to Upload 4 Click Stored Data in External Memory Device The Upload from External Memory Device dialog box appears 5 Select the items to be uploaded and then specify the desti...

Page 1284: ...Device Maintenance dialog box 1 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only 2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only If security is enabled for the project on MICRO I a dialog appears for you to enter a user name and password For details refer to Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 23 1 Click to call up the Select a Folder dialog box and spe...

Page 1285: ...ll Device Addresses Clears the values of all device addresses Stored Data in External Memory Device After stopping operation deletes data saved to the External Memory Device folder on an external memory device Click this to display the Clear Data dialog box For details refer to 4 2 Deleting Data from an External Memory Device Inserted in the MICRO I on page 24 27 When Communicate with is set to MI...

Page 1286: ...4 Clear 24 26 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 4 Click Yes 5 Click Close This concludes clearing data ...

Page 1287: ...e data items to be deleted from the External Memory Device folder Screenshot Alarm Log files Data Log files Operation Log files and Recipe Files 5 Click OK When Communicate with is set to MICRO I and Port to USB deletion of the data starts When Communicate with is set to MICRO I and Port is set to Ethernet the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed Specify the IP address of the MICRO I and then...

Page 1288: ...4 Clear 24 28 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 6 Click Yes 7 Click Close This concludes clearing data on the external memory device ...

Page 1289: ...s set to MICRO I and Port is set to USB a formatting confirmation message is displayed When Communicate with is set to MICRO I and Port is set to Ethernet the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed Specify the IP address of the MICRO I and then click OK to display the formatting confirmation message For details refer to To execute any function except project data download on page 24 10 4 Click ...

Page 1290: ...tails refer to 1 3 Change Communication Settings on page 24 5 2 On the Home tab in the Project group click Target Info When Communicate with is set to MICRO I and Port is set to USB the System Information dialog box is displayed When Communicate with is set to MICRO I and Port is set to Ethernet the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed Specify the IP address of the MICRO I and then click OK t...

Page 1291: ...ayed For details refer to Font Kanji Dictionary Data Information Dialog Box on page 24 33 To check information about the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I click External Memory Device Information The External Memory Device Information dialog box is displayed For details refer to External Memory Device Information Dialog Box on page 24 33 To check the communication driver set for the p...

Page 1292: ...ton to display the External Memory Device Information dialog box For details refer to External Memory Device Information Dialog Box on page 24 33 Project Name Shows the project name of projects downloaded to the MICRO I Modified Displays the time that project data downloaded to the MICRO I was last saved in WindO I NV4 Project Version Displays the version of WindO I NV4 used to create the project ...

Page 1293: ...uropean Baltic Cyrillic External Memory Device Information Dialog Box Checks the state of an external memory device 1 inserted in the MICRO I its total capacity used capacity and available capacity 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Status Shows the state of the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I Memory Capacity Shows the to...

Page 1294: ...ks the communication driver configured in the project downloaded to the MICRO I External Device Communication 1 to 4 Manufacturer Displays the manufacturer of the external device Communication Driver Displays the communication driver Communicate Driver Version Displays the communication driver version ...

Page 1295: ...unction in WindO I NV4 can be performed as follows Checking values of device addresses used on the screen of the MICRO I Checking values of specified device addresses Checking values of device addresses of sequential address numbers Chapter 25 Monitor Function 1 Monitoring with WindO I NV4 HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Computer MICRO I 130 External device Screen M...

Page 1296: ...fying conditions Object List window Script Editor Computer MICRO I 130 Disconnect Connect External device External device External Device Monitor External Device ID 0 External Device ID 1 External Device ID 0 External Device ID 1 Popup Popup Highlighted Trigger Condition While satisfying the condition LM0 1 LM0 0 1 Condition Condition Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied S...

Page 1297: ...project data offline Computer MICRO I Switches to Base Screen 2 Full Tank 1 External device External device Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 130 Computer MICRO I Opens Base Screen 2 Full Tank 1 Full Tank 1 External device External device Base Screen 2 Base Screen 2 Click Computer MICRO I 100 150 200 Disconnect External device Custom Monitor in the Offline mode D100 D102 D101 D100 0 D101 0 D102 0 100 15...

Page 1298: ... First Screen Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data Previous Screen Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed If the screen numbers are not sequential switches to the screen of next lowest number Specified Screen Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number Next Screen Switches to the screen with s...

Page 1299: ... on page 25 18 Custom Registers monitored device addresses individually and displays the value of device addresses For details refer to Custom Monitor on page 25 7 Batch Registers monitored device address as a batch for sequential address numbers and displays the value of device addresses For details refer to Batch Monitor on page 25 15 External Devices Displays the state of external devices conne...

Page 1300: ...String Data on the System tab in the Project Settings For details refer to Chapter 4 Storage Method of String Data on page 4 28 Value Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Hexadecimal Binary Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format To ch...

Page 1301: ...ails refer to Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts on page 25 9 Import Imports the device addresses from a device address list saved as a CSV text file Click this button to display the Device Address List dialog box For details refer to Importing Device Addresses from a Device Address List on page 25 13 Export Saves the device addresses displayed in Monitor as a CSV text file This file is...

Page 1302: ...storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method of String Data on the System tab in the Project Settings For details refer to Chapter 4 Storage Method of String Data on page 4 28 Value Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN...

Page 1303: ...ddresses to monitor individually Click Device Address Or double click a cell under Device Address in Monitor and then click The Tag Editor is displayed For details on configuring device address settings refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts 1 Click Script Script Manager is displayed ...

Page 1304: ...ing with WindO I NV4 25 10 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 2 Select the script ID of the script for the device address to be batch saved and then click Select All the device addresses used by the script are registered ...

Page 1305: ...he device addresses can be called from the List to be reutilized 1 Click Add to List The Device Address List Name Setting dialog box is displayed 2 Enter a name for the device address list The maximum number is 40 characters 3 Click OK The device address list is added to the List 4 Saving project data The following characters cannot be used for names of device address list If a project file is clo...

Page 1306: ...To use a device address list registered device addresses list in another project save it as a CSV text file This file is called a Device Address List 1 Click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 2 Select the save location enter a File name and then click Save This concludes saving device address list ...

Page 1307: ...a Device Address List Imports the device addresses from a device address list saved as a CSV text file into custom monitor 1 Click Import The Device Address List dialog box is displayed 2 Click The Open dialog box is displayed 3 Select a saved device address list and then click Open The device addresses are listed ...

Page 1308: ...s to overwrite the device address displayed in the confirmation message Click Yes To All to overwrite all the device addresses Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the device address displayed in the confirmation message Click Cancel to stop importing device addresses The device address is added to Monitor To select multiple items of text press and hold SHIFT or CT...

Page 1309: ...or details refer to Chapter 4 3 4 Communication Driver Network Tab on page 4 50 Device Type Selects the device type The list only shows device types that can be used Address Number Specify the address The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected Bit Number Specify the bit 0 to 15 of the word device when a word device is selected in Device Length Specifies the number of device...

Page 1310: ...Available Data on page 2 1 UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD4 B BCD8 EB Float32 F Displays the current value of device address in decimal format To change a value double click a cell and then enter a value The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Click to toggle display of HEX and BIN format To display HEX and BIN values click to di...

Page 1311: ...cted to the MICRO I If a red cross appears over the icon of an external device communication is stopped Clicking the External Device icon enables switching between connection and disconnection External Device ID Displays the External Device ID of all external device addresses used in the project External Device Name Displays the name of external devices used in the project Connection status Extern...

Page 1312: ... are being satisfied are highlighted in the Object List window Popup viewing of values of device addresses in the Object List window works only if the screen displayed in the Object List window matches the screen displayed on the MICRO I Popup viewing of values of device addresses in Script Editor works only if the script during editing is being used by a global script command or a script command ...

Page 1313: ...If the screen numbers are not consecutive numbers this command switches to the closest number Specified Screen Switches to the Base Screen of a specified number Next Screen Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed If the screen numbers are not consecutive numbers switches to the closest number Last Screen Switches to the Base Screen of highes...

Page 1314: ...Checking and changing the value of specified device address 2 Monitoring on the MICRO I HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P MICRO I 130 Device Monitor LDR1 LM0 Device LM LDR Data Del Select 0 00000 0 1 Device Monitor Dec Hex Device LM LDR Data Del Select 0 00000 0 1 Device Monitor Dec Hex Device Monitor can be used in offline mode The values of the external device addre...

Page 1315: ...device address range depends on types and settings of external devices Selecting unavailable device address Communication error happens and it can not be back in without reboot For details refer to Chapter 36 1 1 Errors Displayed on the Screen on page 36 1 If three Popup Screens are displayed on the screen or if two Popup Screens are displayed in the Alarm Log Settings in order to use Device Monit...

Page 1316: ... to select the device type For Internal Device proceed to step 4 3 Enter the External Device ID as a hexadecimal value and press Device Data Del Select 0 Device Monitor Dec Hex LM bit 0 Select Device Address 0 CLR CAN ENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 7 8 9 E A B C D ID The next address of the device address entered previously is automatically displayed in the Select Device Address screen ID ...

Page 1317: ... Press CAN to stop registering device addresses The device address is registered to Device Monitor 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to register all device addresses to be monitored LM bit 1 Select Device Address 0 CLR CAN ENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 7 8 9 E A B C D ID 1 2 If a device address is invalid pressing ENT will not return to Device Monitor LM Data Del Select 0 1 Device Monitor Dec Hex Device ...

Page 1318: ...of Device Address 1 Press or to select the device address to be changed the value 2 Press Data on Device Monitor The Write Data screen is displayed LM LDR Data Del Select 0 00000 1 2 Device Monitor Dec Hex Device LM LDR Data Del Select 0 00000 1 2 Device Monitor Dec Hex Device ...

Page 1319: ...e entered value of device address Press CAN to stop entering the value of device address The value of device address is changed Write Data 0 CLR CAN ENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 7 8 9 E A B C D Dec Hex Current word 0 0H LDR 1 2 1 2 If a value of device is invalid pressing ENT will not return you to Device Monitor If the display type is decimal A to F cannot be used LM LDR Data Del Select 0 00001 1 2 Device M...

Page 1320: ...cus up by one line Moves the focus down by one line Data Changes the value of the selected device address Press to display the Write Data Screen For details refer to Changing Value of Device Address on page 25 24 Del Deletes the selected device address Select Registers a selected device address Press to display the Select Device Address screen For details refer to Device Address Registration on pa...

Page 1321: ...e and Offline Mode is displayed at the bottom left of the screen 4 Monitor and change the values of device addresses with Device Monitor to check the operation of project data If there are any errors edit the project data with WindO I NV4 and then download the edited project data to the MICRO I To exit offline mode switch to System Mode with the operations in steps 1 and 2 and then press Run on th...

Page 1322: ...2 Monitoring on the MICRO I 25 28 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1323: ...ices 1 1 How the Simulator Function is Used Simulator function in WindO I NV4 can be performed as follows Check the operation of parts Save the screen displayed in the simulator as an image Check the values of device addresses used on screens displayed Chapter 26 Simulator Function 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Computer Simulator Computer Simulator Save...

Page 1324: ...creen displayed in the simulator Check the operation of Script Computer Custom Monitor Simulator Select device address Computer Simulator Batch Monitor Sequential address numbers LSD10 LSD11 LSD12 Length 3 Starting address number Computer Computer Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 Simulator Simulator Switches to Base Screen 2 Computer Script Debugger LSD8 LSD9 LSD10 LSD11 ...

Page 1325: ...es on the external device HMI keep relays LK and HMI keep registers LKR will be loaded when the project data is loaded Clear Value of Device Address External Device LK LKR and Run The saved values of device addresses on the external device HMI keep relays LK and HMI keep registers LKR will be cleared when the project data is loaded 2 Using the Simulator HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2...

Page 1326: ...een was switched using Back First Screen Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data Previous Screen Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed If the screen numbers are not sequential switches to the screen of next lowest number Specified Screen Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number Next Screen Sw...

Page 1327: ...dresses and edit project data if there is an error If the monitored screen is switches repeat steps 1 4 If you have edited the project data click Reload project data to update the project displayed in the simulator The Reload Project dialog box is displayed If the Save Value of Device Address External Device LK LKR check box is cleared proceed to step 6 Click Settings to save the values of device ...

Page 1328: ...ear Saved Value of Device Address External Device LK LKR The saved values of device addresses on the external device HMI keep relays LK and HMI keep registers LKR will be cleared when the project data is loaded 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 and click when you have finished debugging This terminates the simulator 2 3 Saving the Displayed Screen as an Image You can save the screen displayed on the simulator...

Page 1329: ... displays the value of device addresses For details refer to 3 3 Custom Monitor on page 26 11 Batch Registers monitored device address as a batch for sequential address numbers and displays the value of device addresses For details refer to 3 4 Batch Monitor on page 26 13 Back You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched Forward Advances to the ...

Page 1330: ...t Screen Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data Script Debugger Check the operation of the script used in the project For details refer to 3 5 Script Debugger on page 26 15 Reload project data Reloads the edited project data Settings Click this button to display the Simulator Settings dialog box For details refer to Simulator Settings Dialog Box on page 26 9 Funct...

Page 1331: ...external device HMI keep relays LK and HMI keep registers LKR that were input in the simulator The values of device addresses will be saved in the project data The Reload Project dialog box will be displayed when the simulator is next started or when the project is reloaded For details refer to 2 2 Debugging in Simulator on page 26 4 Screen Size Select 100 or 200 for the screen size magnification ...

Page 1332: ... Data on the System tab in the Project Settings For details refer to Chapter 4 Storage Method of String Data on page 4 28 Value Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Hexadecimal Binary Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format To change a...

Page 1333: ...pter 25 Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts on page 25 9 Import Imports the device addresses from a device address list saved as a CSV text file Click this button to display the Device Address List dialog box For details refer to Chapter 25 Importing Device Addresses from a Device Address List on page 25 13 Export Saves the device addresses displayed in Monitor as a CSV text file This fi...

Page 1334: ...he System tab in the Project Settings For details refer to Chapter 4 Storage Method of String Data on page 4 28 Value Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD4 B BCD8 EB Float32 F Displays the current value of device address in decimal for...

Page 1335: ...ails refer to Chapter 4 3 4 Communication Driver Network Tab on page 4 50 Device Type Selects the device type The list only shows device types that can be used Address Number Specify the address The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected Bit Number Specify the bit 0 to 15 of the word device when a word device is selected in Device Length Specifies the number of device addre...

Page 1336: ...ge 4 28 Value Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 UBIN16 W BIN16 I UBIN32 D BIN32 L BCD4 B BCD8 EB Float32 F Displays the current value of device address in decimal format To change a value double click a cell and then enter a value The value range depends on the data typ...

Page 1337: ...e Executes the script paused at the breakpoint up to the next breakpoint If there is no next breakpoint execute the script to the end and exit Step Over Executes the script while pausing each step one line at a time If there is no next step the script execution is terminated Script Breakpoint Script ID Displays the script ID 1 to 32000 of the registered scripts Script Name Displays the script name...

Page 1338: ...ress to display a popup menu then click Comment and select the check box Data Type Selects the data format of the displayed value For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Words Specify the number of word devices 1 to 16 stored the display value 2 single byte characters can be displayed by 1 word This option can only be configured String European String Japanese String Chinese ...

Page 1339: ...ress in hexadecimal and binary format To change a value double click a cell and then specify a value The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Comments are displayed only after you click next to Value to display a popup menu and then select the HEX and BIN check box ...

Page 1340: ...ACnet Communication functions Displaying the Maintenance Screen The function to save log data of the Alarm Log Function to the external memory as a CSV file The function to save log data of the Data Log Function to the external memory as a CSV file The function to save log data of the Operation Log Function to the external memory as a CSV file The function to save values of device addresses for th...

Page 1341: ... Through Function is Used The Pass through function downloads or uploads a PLC program from a computer or an external device via the MICRO I Chapter 27 Pass Through Function 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Computer MICRO I 130 External device Device Link Communication Pass Through Communication Read Write Read Write PLC programming software ...

Page 1342: ...SEC FX2N CPU FX3U FX3UC MELSEC FX3UC CPU QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU MELSEC Q CPU The corresponding device type differs depending on the communication driver which be used For FC6A type please select MICROSmart FC6A RS232C 485 driver If use OpenNet MICROSmart SmartAXIS Pro Lite RS232C485 driver the device type is partially different For details refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual Series ...

Page 1343: ...owing conditions The MICRO I is in the Run mode or Monitor mode A communication driver that supports the Pass through operation In the Project Settings dialog box on the Communication Driver tab the Enable Pass Through check box is selected MICRO I Computer USB cable Ethernet cable Serial cable External device Use the WindO I NV2 Utility software Pass through Tool if you have the following A compe...

Page 1344: ...Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Communication Driver tab 3 Select the external device communication from the Function to make the Pass through function is enabled 4 Under External Device select the Enable Pass Through check box This option is accessible if the Communication Driver is supported For details refer to 1 2 Supported External Devices on page 27 2 5 Click OK This concludes t...

Page 1345: ...the System Mode 3 Press Main Menu The Main Menu screen is displayed Press and hold 3 or more seconds MICRO I Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness If a password has been configured for the project data the Password Screen is displayed Select user name and enter password For details refer to Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 23 1 BRIGHTNESS 31 MAC Address...

Page 1346: ...cation 1 to External Device Communication 4 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F or press Ext Device 1 to Ext Device 4 HG2G 5T HG1G 1P 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 56 44 Main Menu Offline Run Initial Setting Clock Setting Top Page Self Diagnosis System Information File Manager Initial Setting Main Menu Ext Device O I Link System Op Initialize Communication I F Ext Device Ext Device 3 Ext Device 4 Ext Device 1 Ex...

Page 1347: ...nd press Save HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F or SAVE HG2G 5T HG1G 1P When the setting is saved The value was updated is displayed This concludes the configuration to enable the Pass through function Trans Wait Pass Through Retry Cycles Time Out Parameter3 Parameter4 Parameter2 Parameter1 Ext Device 1 Ext Device Initial Setting Main Menu Save Cancel Enable PassThrough The value was updated Ext Dev...

Page 1348: ...nd Programming software at the same time If the communication via Pass through fails change the settings such as Baud Rate Timeout Transfer Mode etc on PLC programming software If one of the following problems occurs while using the Pass through function and a communication error is displayed turn power off and on to the MICRO I again The communication cable between the computer and MICRO I was di...

Page 1349: ...P Chapter 28 Maintenance 1 Web Server Function HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Custom web pages are downloaded to external memory 1 The external memory 1 must be inserted before downloading 1 Access the MICRO I from a web browser connected to the local network to use the web server function 2 When the local network is connected to an external network configure the w...

Page 1350: ...settings Refer to Web Server Function Configuration Procedure on page 28 4 3 Connect the MICRO I Start the web browser on the web browser terminal and connect the following URL http MICRO I IP address In the example above the web page configured by Default Showing Page on Web Server tab in Project Settings dialog box is displayed OS Recommended Web Browsers Windows 10 8 7 Vista XP Google Chrome 47...

Page 1351: ... I IP address Port number viewer view htm pagepath File name Example The MICRO I s IP address is 192 168 0 1 and the Page1 page is displayed http 192 168 0 1 viewer view htm pagepath Page1 page User name The user name configured in the running project Default User Password The alphanumeric password of 4 to 15 characters long configured in the running project If a password is not set leave the pass...

Page 1352: ...e display speed of custom web pages is slow Port Number Specifies the port number to use for the web server function Default 80 Default Showing Page Select the web page to display first when accessing the MICRO I from a web browser terminal Default System Information 3 Click the OK button 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only 2 HG2G 5T HG1G 1P only Data Type Remote Control and Monitoring Select t...

Page 1353: ...te functions Accesses the MICRO I from a web browser terminal to browse it Page configuration The MICRO I web pages have the following page configuration There are links to each page from the homepage http IP address of MICRO I System Information Page http MICRO I IP address Port number top html System Detailed Information Page Remote Functions Page Remote Monitoring Page Remote Operation Page ...

Page 1354: ... this menu frame Right frame Shows the function page Except for the full screen remote monitoring screen and remote operation screen all of the pages shown in the right frame have a Maximize link Menu link and Home link When using a web browser that does not support frames the display position of items changes but the content is the same Left Frame Right Frame Maximize Link Menu Link Home Link Max...

Page 1355: ... Data Transfer Mode Error Shows the following errors Communication Error No Screen Data Waiting for Default Screen No Processing Error Backup Data Lost Network Off Line Device Range Error Script Error System Type Number Shows the MICRO I model number Project Name Shows the project name When characters other than alphanumeric characters are included on the English page the project name is shown as ...

Page 1356: ...ink communication speed O I Link Station Shows the O I link master station or slave station number Slave Registration Settings Shows the slave registration setting register for the O I link communication master Slave Online Status Shows the slave online information register for the O I link communication master Display item Description For details about error messages refer to Chapter 36 1 1 Error...

Page 1357: ...ormation page is listed below Display item Description Mode Shows the system s current mode Run Mode System Mode Monitor Mode Offline Mode Data Transfer Mode Error Shows the following errors Communication Error No Screen Data Waiting for Default Screen No Processing Error Backup Data Lost Network Off Line Device Range Error Script Error System Type Number Shows the MICRO I type model number System...

Page 1358: ...mmunication error of the External Device Communication 1 to 4 Time Out msec Shows the response waiting time from the External Device Communication 1 to 4 Transmission Wait msec Shows the transmission interval for a communication command of the External Device Communication 1 to 4 O I Link Baud Rate bps Shows the O I link communication speed O I Link Station Shows the O I link master station or sla...

Page 1359: ...t displayed in a web browser If JavaScript is prohibited in the web browser settings the web page will not operate correctly Please enable JavaScript The screen image cannot be displayed on web browsers that do not support the bitmap or JPEG format The display may not be updated depending on the web browser s cache settings 65536 Color JPEG Format Slow Capable of showing the screen image displayed...

Page 1360: ...e left frame is displayed click the Control link in the left frame to display the remote control page An image of the screen displayed on the MICRO I is shown You can also control the MICRO I by clicking on the displayed screen image This screen is an example If JavaScript is prohibited in the web browser settings the web page will not operate correctly Please enable JavaScript The screen image ca...

Page 1361: ...ed to 256 colors The screen image displayed on the MICRO I is somewhat degraded but the update speed of the display on the web browser speeds up and the impact on the MICRO I screen update speed is reduced The screen update speed of the 256 color bitmap format tends to be faster than the 65536 color JPEG format but it may be slower depending on the screen s displayed content Disable Control From O...

Page 1362: ...f pressing the Switch 1 turns on the Lamp 1 In this case the HMI Internal Relay LM0 have been used in the current project To browse the Custom Web Page on the web terminal select the Use Custom Web Page check box under the Web Server tab of the Project Settings dialog box If the display speed of custom web pages is slow change the value of Execute Interval on the Web Server tab in the Project Sett...

Page 1363: ...d drop it on the editing area The switch will be placed on the area with the predefined size 3 Click the switch placed on the work area and on the Property tab for Link Box click The Device Tree dialog box is displayed If the Windows Security Alert dialog box is displayed click Allow access To place a switch on the area with the desired size click Switch in the Components list and then drag the cr...

Page 1364: ... devices of the MICRO I are displayed in the Device Tree dialog box To display an address number it needs to be configured in the project being edited before Web Page Editor opens For device addresses not displayed in the Device Tree dialog box input them directly into the text box below Link Box of the Property tab The format of the device address to edit directly in text box is as follows Exampl...

Page 1365: ... name is displayed in Web Page Editor on the Project window For details on Web Page Editor refer to the Web Page Editor help that is displayed by clicking Help of Help on the menu bar The image files and movie files that have been added with the Web Page Editor are displayed in Web Page Editor on the Project window To edit the Custom Web Page double clicking a file name displayed in Web Page Edito...

Page 1366: ... V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P 1 Access the MICRO I from a FTP client connected to the local network to use the FTP server function and read or write the file contained in the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I 2 When the local network is connected to an external network configure the FTP client connected to the remote network with the local network s gateway router and...

Page 1367: ...MICRO I FTP client function IDEC PLC FTP client function Example A B HGDATA01 The root folder of the SD memory card The root folder of hte FTP server The root folder of the USB flash drive RECIPE When no external memory device is inserted in the MICRO I or when no folder is specified to Target the root folder of the FTP server is displayed SFTP and FTPS are not supported For the settings and how t...

Page 1368: ... on page 28 21 3 Login to the MICRO I Start the web browser and go to the following URL After the user name and password are successfully verified the folder of external memory device inserted in the MICRO I is displayed ftp User Name Password MICRO I IP address 4 Read or write the file An Administrator or Operator user account is required to login the MICRO I Example 1 The MICRO I s IP address is...

Page 1369: ...period of time the MICRO I will disconnect the FTP client Default 15 minutes Specify Target Specify the folder and the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I to be accessed from the FTP client When the Target is specified you cannot access the level higher than the specified folder 3 Click the OK button Data Type The timeout period to login the MICRO I is 1 minute If Device Address is sele...

Page 1370: ...d connect to a local network Configures the target FTP server to the MICRO I When the trigger condition for the FTP client function File Transfer Settings is satisfied the following prosess is executed Copying or moving files from the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I to the FTP server Copying files from the FTP server to the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I 1 Only USB f...

Page 1371: ...on MICRO I FTP server function IDEC PLC FTP server function 3 5 FTP Client Function Configuration Procedure This section describes the configuration procedure for the FTP server and the FTP client function Configure the FTP Server Configures the target FTP server 1 On the Configuration tab in the Manager group click FTP Server Manager The FTP Server Manager is displayed 2 Select the number to conf...

Page 1372: ...tands for a numeric value from 0 to 255 User Name Enter the name of the user account for the FTP server The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used Password Enter the password for the FTP server The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used Port Number Specifies the port numb...

Page 1373: ... 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click File Transfer The File Transfer Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the number to configure the File Transfer Settings in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box for the selected number is displayed 3 Configure the items on the General tab Settings ...

Page 1374: ...ters Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Files cannot be copied or moved from the FTP server to the FTP server When transferring files from external memory to external memory and HMI special internal relay LSM67 is 0 subfolders can be copied and moved up to five folders deep When HMI special inte...

Page 1375: ...Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Files cannot be copied or moved from the FTP server to the FTP server When transferring files from external memory to external memory and HMI special internal relay LSM67 is 0 subfolders can be copied and moved up to five folders deep When HMI special internal ...

Page 1376: ...ed as Trigger Type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 1 Available Data on page 2 1 Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Se...

Page 1377: ... 16 for managing the FTP server settings Server Name Displays the name of the FTP server Host Name IP Address Displays the Host Name or IP address of the FTP server User Name Displays the user name of the FTP server Password Displays the password of the FTP server as asterisks Port Number Displays the port number of the FTP server Transfer Mode Displays the transfer mode of the FTP server Connecti...

Page 1378: ...iguration on page 4 40 User Name Enter the name of the user account for the FTP server The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used Password Enter the password for the FTP server The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used Port Number Specifies the port number for the FTP se...

Page 1379: ...You can only specify an internal device Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Copy the settings as default value to Device Address Select this check box to copy the settings in the FTP Server Settings to device addresses as default Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the wo...

Page 1380: ...R 125 LKR 126 LKR 127 LKR 128 LKR 129 to LKR 141 String ASCII t e s t _ u s e r 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Value Hexadecimal 7465h 7374h 5F75h 7365h 7230h 3031h 0000h 0000h Password Device Address LKR 142 LKR 143 LKR 144 LKR 145 LKR 146 LKR 147 LKR 148 LKR 149 to LKR162 String ASCII t e s t _ p a s s w o r d 0 0 0 Value Hexadecimal 7465h 7374h 5F70h 6173h 7377h 6F72h 6400h 0000h Port Number Device Address LKR ...

Page 1381: ...The configured content for the selected number is reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box For details refer to Individual Settings Dialog Box on page 28 34 Delete Deletes the settings for the selected number from the Settings Up Shifts the selected settings upward in the list Down Shifts the selected settings downward in the list Settings No Displays the number for managing File Transfer S...

Page 1382: ...server can be added or changed Click this button to display the FTP Server Manager For details refer to FTP Server Manager on page 28 29 Location Selects the method to specify the save location of source files to copy or move Fixed Specify the save location of the target folder or file path as a string The maximum number is 247 characters Example Copy or move files to the ALARMLOG folder under HGD...

Page 1383: ...age 2 68 Files cannot be copied or moved from the FTP server to the FTP server When transferring files from external memory to external memory and HMI special internal relay LSM67 is 0 subfolders can be copied and moved up to five folders deep When HMI special internal relay LSM67 is changed from 0 to 1 subfolders cannot be copied or moved The following single byte characters cannot be used in the...

Page 1384: ...External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings dialog box Click on to the right on the External Memory Device Folder button and then select the item on the list to enter the subfolder Example The External Memory Device Folder in the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings dialog box is HGDATA01 Selection Entered Text Alarm Log Files HGDATA01 ALARMLOG Data Log Files HGDATA01 DATALOG ...

Page 1385: ...ocation by Value of Device Address and folder or file path configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows When the text of the folder or file path exceeds the maximum number of device addresses no NULL the text stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start is configured When a character that cannot be used is set the text is up to that charac...

Page 1386: ...ible external memory device Mount the external memory device 1 External Memory Device Reading or Writing Error The folders and files in the external memory device specified as the source or the destination cannot be read Creating folders writing to files and deleting files in the external memory device specified as the source or the destination cannot be executed Insert an external memory device r...

Page 1387: ...configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expressions configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 71 Rising edge Copy o...

Page 1388: ...C2822 LOGIN for the SMTP Authentication SMTPs SSL communications 4 E mail Function HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P 1 When the trigger condition for the E mail function is satisfied MICRO I connected to the local network sends the e mail to the outgoing mail server SMTP 2 The outgoing mail server SMTP sends the e mail received from MICRO I to the incoming mail server...

Page 1389: ... has been sent the e mail number 2 starts to be sent When the trigger condition is satisfied during the other e mail is being sent When sending an e mail is in progress and the trigger condition to send another e mail is satisfied triggered e mail will be in Waiting status Such e mail is sent after all the e mails in sending or waiting status have been sent For example if the trigger condition for...

Page 1390: ...sent is stored Only the latest e mail number is stored Parameter Cause 0 Successfully Completed 1 Parameter error The value of the device address allocated to the following setting is 0 IP address of the Outgoing mail server SMTP Sender E mail Address Sender Name Account Name and Password When the Required authentication LOGIN to send E mail check box is selected The preferred DNS server and alter...

Page 1391: ... When an E mail Group is set the number of e mail addresses in the E mail Group is counted If the same e mail address is used in multiple destination the number of destination addresses will be counted for each destination Subject 256 bytes Body 4 096 bytes Screenshot 1 max Alarm Log file 1 max Data Log file 20 max Operation Log file 1 max If a period of time or the maximum number of items are not...

Page 1392: ...erver SMTP The maximum number is 40 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used IP Address Specifies the IP address of the outgoing mail server SMTP The format is xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255 Outgoing mail server SMTP port number Specifies the port number for the outgoing mail server SMTP 0 to 65535 Sender E mail Address Enter an e mail address o...

Page 1393: ...ils refer to Chapter 4 Authentication Setting on page 4 69 Advanced Setting Specifies the General Setting and the Authentication Setting by the values of the device addresses The settings for both the General Setting and the Authentication Setting can be used as initial values For details refer to Chapter 4 Advanced Setting on page 4 69 3 Click OK This concludes configuring the outgoing mail serve...

Page 1394: ...n Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following Rising edge An e mail is sent when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Falling edge An e mail is sent when the val...

Page 1395: ...e E mail Address The maximum number is 60 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used Select the Use Reference Device Address check box to specify the e mail address with the value of the device address and then specifies the word device to use it The e mail addresses are sequentially configured starting from the specified device address You can only specify an internal device ...

Page 1396: ...Log files and the Operation Log files to an e mail configure them in the Attach Files dialog box displayed by clicking Attach Files For details refer to Attach Files Dialog Box on page 28 62 To insert the value of the device address in the body text of the e mail configure it in the Insert Value of Device Address dialog box displayed by clicking Insert Value of Device Address For details refer to ...

Page 1397: ...e right of New E mail Address then click New E mail Group The New E mail Group dialog box is displayed 3 Enter the name for the E mail Group in the Group Name The maximum number is 60 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 4 Enter the comment for the E mail Group in the Comment The maximum number is 80 characters 5 Select the e mail address as the member from the E mail ad...

Page 1398: ... OK to close the E mail Group dialog box The created E mail Group is added to the E mail Address List on the E mail Address Book dialog box 7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create the necessary E mail Groups 8 Click OK to close the E mail Address Book dialog box ...

Page 1399: ...e E mail Address Book as a file and then import it to a project Note the E mail Groups and the device addresses to specify the e mail address are not supported Save the E mail Address Book settings as a file 1 On the Configuration tab in the Manager group click E mail Address Book The E mail Address Book dialog box is displayed 2 Click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 3 Select the save l...

Page 1400: ...layed 2 Click Import The Open dialog box is displayed 3 Select a file for the E mail Address Book and then click Open The e mail addresses are added to the E mail Address Book dialog box The e mail address is overwritten when there is the same one When the e mail address exceeds 60 characters it is not imported When the comment exceeds 80 characters it is not imported and only the e mail address i...

Page 1401: ...e as follows Notepad Microsoft Excel E mail Address Comment Tab Line Feed E mail Address Comment The maximum number for the e mail address is 60 characters The maximum number for the comment is 80 characters Notepad Save as type Text Documents txt Encoding Unicode Microsoft Excel Save as type Unicode Text txt The format of the text file txt that can be imported by the E mail Address Book is UTF 16...

Page 1402: ...number and click this button to delete the contents of that row Settings Displays a list of the E mail settings Number Displays the number of the e mail selected from Settings Settings Body No Displays the number of the E mail E mail Function Displays whether or not the e mail function is used Subject Displays the subject of the e mail Trigger Type Displays the trigger type for sending an e mail T...

Page 1403: ... Report Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when the e mail has been sent Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Trigger Condition is satisfied Value of Device Address LM100 when Trigger Condition is Rising edge 1 0 Value of Report Device Addres...

Page 1404: ...on page 2 1 Device Address Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition You can only specify the internal device Can only be set if Rising edge or Falling edge is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 68 Condition Sets the condition formu...

Page 1405: ... Cc in the E mail Address Book dialog box When multiple e mail addresses and E mail Groups are allocated they are separated by semicolons Bcc Specify the sending destination which is not to be known by the destinations specified as To and Cc Click this button to display the E mail Address Book dialog box For details refer to E mail Address Book Dialog Box on page 28 58 E mail address for Bcc Displ...

Page 1406: ...l Address Dialog Box on page 28 60 Select an E mail Group in People and then click this button to display the E mail Group dialog box For details refer to E mail Group Dialog Box on page 28 61 Delete Deletes the selected e mail address and E mail Group in People Import Imports the file in the E mail Address Book saved by the Unicode text format txt Click this button to display the Open dialog box ...

Page 1407: ... the cell of the e mail address displays the E mail Address dialog box For details refer to E mail Address Dialog Box on page 28 60 Double clicking the cell of the E mail Group displays the E mail Group dialog box For details refer to E mail Group Dialog Box on page 28 61 Assigns e mail address and the E mail Group displayed in the People List to the To the Cc or the Bcc Deletes the e mail address...

Page 1408: ...heck box to specify the e mail address with the value of the device address Top Device Address Specifies a word device to use an e mail address The e mail address is set by reading the values sequentially from the starting device address specified with the Top Device Address and handling those values as character data up to the character before NULL 0x00 The maximum number of device addresses is 3...

Page 1409: ...ail addresses assigned to the Members Members Find The text entered is searched for People in the E mail address list People The e mail addresses registered in the E mail Address Book dialog box are displayed in this list To select multiple e mail addresses press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items Comment Displays the comment for the e mail address Find The text entered is s...

Page 1410: ...ion outputs to the external memory device in real time For details refer to Chapter 13 Real Time on page 13 40 Range of Blocks Specifies the range of block numbers that will output in the collected alarm log data All Outputs the data for all blocks Specify block number Outputs only the data for the specified blocks Individual block numbers can be specified by separating the num bers with continuou...

Page 1411: ... time Select this check box to specify the period of data log output data Outputs the specified period of the data log data after the Trigger Condition is satisfied Specify the maximum number of items Select this check box to specify the maximum amount of data log output data Outputs the specified number of the data log data after the Trigger Condition is satisfied When the Specify a period of tim...

Page 1412: ...setting can only be configured when Decimal or Hexadecimal is selected for Display Type Digits Specifies the digits to display The range of digits that can be set varies based on the display type and data type The digits that can be set are as follows Display Type Data Type Digits Decimal display UBIN16 W BIN16 I 1 to 5 UBIN32 D BIN32 L 1 to 10 BCD4 B 1 to 4 BCD8 EB 1 to 8 Float32 F 1 to 10 Hexade...

Page 1413: ...he number of digits specified by Digits This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on the display type and data type The range of digits that can be set is as follows Display Type Data Type Floating Digits Decimal display UBIN16 W BIN16 I 1 to Digits UBIN32 D BIN32 L 1 to Digits B...

Page 1414: ...4 E mail Function 28 66 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1415: ... a project ZNV Project File for project transfer and save it on an external memory device 1 And then download the ZNV Project File saved on the external memory device to the MICRO I Uploading a project Uploads the project used to operate the MICRO I and saves it to an external memory device 1 1 Only USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Chapter 29 Data Transfer Function 1 Project Transfer Functi...

Page 1416: ... Autorun function For details refer to Chapter 31 2 USB Autorun Function on page 31 22 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands For details refer to 1 4 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands to Transfer Project Data on page 29 6 Using the File Manager in the System Mode on the MICRO I 1 For details refer to 1 5 Using File Manager on the MICRO I to Transfer Project Data on page...

Page 1417: ... port 2 Open the project to transfer using WindO I NV4 3 On the Home tab in the Project group click the Download icon The Download dialog box is displayed 1 Only USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P The Project Transfer function supports the project which name is used alphanumeric characters only Computer Through an external memory card reader writer SD memory card USB flash drive SD memory car...

Page 1418: ...g box You can specify a drive on the network External Memory Device Folder Specify the folder where the project data is to be downloaded Click the button to display the Project Settings dialog box You can specify an External Memory Device folder as the download destination 6 Click the Yes button A Download dialog box is displayed and the project data is now being saved When this process is complet...

Page 1419: ...box The project data for transfer is created in the External Memory Device folder on an external memory device For details about the created data folder and file structure refer to Chapter 31 External Memory Devices on page 31 1 If the folder or file structure on the External Memory Device folder is modified the MICRO I and WindO I NV4 will not be usable ...

Page 1420: ... 1 Insert an external memory device 1 in the MICRO I 2 Press the Key Button or Multi Button or execute the Multi Command configured with Upload Project under Data Transfer on the Key Browser dialog box 1 Only USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Allocate a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the project transfe...

Page 1421: ... The maintenance screen is now displayed 4 Press System Mode MICRO I displays the Top Page in the System Mode HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I USB flash drive SD memory card External Memory Device Press and hold 3 or more seconds HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I Maintenance System Mode Device ...

Page 1422: ... SD memory card is selected Run Offline Main Menu BRIGHTNESS 31 MAC Address 00 03 7B F0 12 A8 IP Address 192 168 0 1 DHCP 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 56 44 IDEC HG G SERIES SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE ENG JPN Main Menu Offline Run Initial Setting Clock Setting Top Page Self Diagnosis System Information File Manager 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 57 17 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DR...

Page 1423: ...RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT HGDATA00 DIR HGDATA01 DIR HGDATA02 DIR MICROI ZNV 1 2 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DIR DIR NVDATA DIR PICTURE DIR SOUND DIR MICROI ZNV 1 2 The NVDATA folder is automatically created when the External Memory Device folder is crea...

Page 1424: ...nager MICROI ZNV is always displayed This is not the project name downloaded to the MICRO I Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DIR DIR HG3G_DEMO_1 ZNV MICROI ZNV YES NO Copy This File HG3G_DEMO_1 ZNV Clear Keep Devices Select the Clear Keep Devices check box to clear keep devices after the project data is downloaded How...

Page 1425: ...rd screen is displayed Select a user name and enter its password For details refer to Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 23 1 Download MICRO I Project Function The following function completed Result Ack MICRO I USB flash drive SD memory card External Memory Device HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Press and hold 3 o...

Page 1426: ...DHCP 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 56 44 IDEC HG G SERIES SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE ENG JPN Main Menu Offline Run Initial Setting Clock Setting Top Page Self Diagnosis System Information File Manager 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 57 17 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DRIVE SD card FORMAT MICROI ZNV HGDATA01 DIR 001 DIR 002 DIR When MICRO I is selected with DRIVE i...

Page 1427: ...he cursor to the transfer destination on the SD memory card 2 Press to select 001 and then press ENT Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DRIVE SD card FORMAT MICROI ZNV HGDATA01 DIR 001 DIR 002 DIR Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DRIVE SD card FORMAT MICROI ZNV HGDATA01 DIR 001 DIR...

Page 1428: ... the results screen You are returned to the Top Page of System Mode Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DRIVE SD card FORMAT DIR DIR MICROI ZNV YES NO Copy This File MICROI ZNV MICROI ZNV is shown on the confirmation message but the project file name after uploading is Project name Extension znv Upload MICRO I Project Function The following ...

Page 1429: ...ct name alphanumeric characters Note the file name must not contain the following characters While running the project transfer function using a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command if a data transfer function project transfer PLC program transfer or file copy is initiated the only function that will work is the currently running function If two or more data transfer functions are configured t...

Page 1430: ...art SmartAXIS Pro Lite Ethernet The corresponding device type differs depending on the communication driver which be used For FC6A type please select MICROSmart FC6A RS232C 485 MICROSmart FC6A Ethernet driver If use OpenNet MICROSmart SmartAXIS Pro Lite RS232C485 OpenNet MICROSmart SmartAXIS Pro Lite Ethernet driver the device type is partially different For details refer to the WindO I NV4 Extern...

Page 1431: ...run function For details refer to Chapter 31 2 USB Autorun Function on page 31 22 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands For details refer to 2 5 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands to Transfer PLC Programs on page 29 19 Using the File Manager in the System Mode on the MICRO I 2 For details refer to 2 6 Using File Manager on the MICRO I to Transfer PLC Programs on page 29 ...

Page 1432: ...t must be converted to a ZLD Project File zld 1 Open the PLC program to to be transferred using WindLDR 2 Click to the right of Save As on the application menu and click PLC Program The Save As dialog box is displayed 3 Enter a file name and click Save When using a PLC program with the PLC program transfer function always enter the file name as alphanumeric characters ...

Page 1433: ...i Button or execute the Multi Command configured with Download PLC Program under Data Transfer on the Key Browser dialog box 1 Only USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Allocate a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the PLC program transfer function to the MICRO I For details refer to Chapter 8 5 Key Button on page 8 72 For details refer to Chapter 8 6 Multi Button on page ...

Page 1434: ...emory device 1 in the MICRO I 2 Press the Key Button or Multi Button or execute the Multi Command configured with Upload PLC Program under Data Transfer on the Key Browser dialog box 1 Only USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P PLC MICRO I USB flash drive SD memory card External Memory Device ...

Page 1435: ...ice 3 Insert an external memory device in the MICRO I 4 Press the upper left edge of the MICRO I screen for three seconds or more The maintenance screen is displayed HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Save Computer ZLD Project File zld USB flash drive SD memory card External Memory Device HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V PLC MICRO I USB flash drive SD memo...

Page 1436: ... project configured with security to the MICRO I the password screen is displayed Select a user name and enter its password For details refer to Chapter 23 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 23 1 Run Offline Main Menu BRIGHTNESS 31 MAC Address 00 03 7B F0 12 A8 IP Address 192 168 0 1 DHCP 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 56 44 IDEC HG G SERIES SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE ENG JPN Main Menu Offline Run Init...

Page 1437: ...destination and select PLC Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT HGDATA01 DIR PLOGRAM01 zld MICROI ZNV Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT HGDATA01 DIR PLOGRAM01 zld MICROI ZNV Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTE...

Page 1438: ...starts When the download finishes the results are displayed 13 Press Ack to close the results screen You are returned to the Top Page of System Mode Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE PLC FORMAT HGDATA01 DIR PLOGRAM01 zld PLC ZLD YES NO Copy This File PLOGRAM01 zld Comm I F Slave Number Communication port Slave number or External Devi...

Page 1439: ... V HG2G V PLC MICRO I USB flash drive SD memory card External Memory Device Press and hold 3 or more seconds HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness When downloading a project configured with security to the MICRO I the password screen is displayed Select a user name and enter its password For details refer to Chapter 23 User A...

Page 1440: ... Initial Setting Clock Setting Top Page Self Diagnosis System Information File Manager 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 57 17 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE PLC FORMAT DRIVE SD card FORMAT PLC ZLD HGDATA01 DIR 001 DIR 002 DIR When PLC is selected with DRIVE in the file manager PLC ZLD is always displayed This is not the program file name for the PLC connected to th...

Page 1441: ...hen press ENT 9 Press COPY A process confirmation message is displayed Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE PLC FORMAT DRIVE SD card FORMAT PLC ZLD HGDATA01 DIR 001 DIR 002 DIR Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE PLC FORMAT DRIVE SD card FORMAT PLC ZLD HGDATA01 DIR 001 DIR 002 DIR 1 2 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELO...

Page 1442: ... displayed 11 Press Ack to close the screen You are returned to the Top Page of System Mode YES NO Copy This File PLC ZLD Comm I F Slave Number Communication port Slave number or External Device ID 0 0 0 SERIAL 1 PLC ZLD is displayed in the confirmation message but the ZLD Project File name after uploading is Model name_Port number_Station number_Year month day hours minutes seconds File extension...

Page 1443: ...unction cannot be run when the MICRO I is in Offline Mode Switch to Run Mode Monitor Mode or System Mode before running the PLC program transfer function If a file exists with the same name in the save destination when uploading a PLC program the file is overwritten with the uploaded file without displaying an overwrite confirmation message While running the PLC program transfer function using a K...

Page 1444: ... copy files on an SD memory card Internally copy files on an SD memory card inserted in the MICRO I Internally copy files on a USB flash drive Internally copy files on a USB flash drive inserted in the MICRO I 3 File Copy Function HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Copy USB flash drive File SD memory card MICRO I HG3G HG2G ...

Page 1445: ...files on an SD memory card or on a USB flash drive Using the USB Autorun function For details refer to Chapter 31 2 USB Autorun Function on page 31 22 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands For details refer to 3 3 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi Commands to Copy Files on page 29 32 Using the File Manager in the System Mode on the MICRO I For details refer to 3 4 Using File Man...

Page 1446: ...h File Copy under Data Transfer in the Key Browser dialog box Allocate a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the file copy function to the MICRO I For details refer to Chapter 8 5 Key Button on page 8 72 For details refer to Chapter 8 6 Multi Button on page 8 108 For details refer to Chapter 12 6 Multi Command on page 12 38 HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I...

Page 1447: ... HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I USB flash drive SD memory card External Memory Device Press and hold 3 or more seconds HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V MICRO I Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness When downloading a project configured with security to the MICRO I the password screen is displayed Select a user name and enter its password For details refer ...

Page 1448: ...the External Memory Device folder HGDATA01 is selected 1 Press to select HGDATA01 and then press ENT Main Menu Offline Run Initial Setting Clock Setting Top Page Self Diagnosis System Information File Manager 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 57 17 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT HGDATA01 DIR MICROI ZNV Main Menu File Manager DEL R...

Page 1449: ...ive is selected Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DIR DIR NVDATA DIR PICTURE DIR SOUND DIR MICROI ZNV 1 2 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT DIR DIR AUDIO2 WAV AUDIO1 WAV MICROI ZNV Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER...

Page 1450: ...age is displayed Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE USB memory FORMAT DIR DIR AUDIO2 WAV AUDIO1 WAV 001 DIR 002 DIR Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE USB memory FORMAT DIR DIR AUDIO2 WAV AUDIO1 WAV 001 DIR 002 DIR 1 2 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION ...

Page 1451: ...ss YES The file is being copied When complete the file is shown in the save destination YES NO Copy This File AUDIO1 WAV Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE SD card FORMAT DRIVE USB memory FORMAT DIR DIR AUDIO2 WAV AUDIO1 WAV DIR DIR AUDIO1 WAV ...

Page 1452: ...ct such as log data When copying a file used by the running project use File Manager on the MICRO I under the System Mode While running the file copy function using a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command if a data transfer function project transfer PLC program transfer or file copy is initiated the only function that will work is the currently running function If two or more data transfer func...

Page 1453: ... modules may be installed For the HG2G V HG2G 5F up to two IDEC MICROSmart PLC expansion I O modules may be installed Expansion I O modules can be used to configure a display and I O control system for small equipment with only a few I O or for applications with simple I O control requirements Chapter 30 Expansion Modules 1 Overview HG3G HG2G 5F HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V ...

Page 1454: ... Output FC4A R081 Removable Terminal Block 90 0 23 5 70 0 30 40 NO NO YES YES 16 points Relay Output FC4A R161 90 0 23 5 70 0 45 75 NO NO YES YES 8 points Transistor Sink Output FC4A T08K1 90 0 23 5 70 0 10 20 NO NO YES YES 8 points Transistor Source Output FC4A T08S1 90 0 23 5 70 0 10 20 NO NO YES YES 16 points Transistor Sink Output FC4A T16K3 MIL Connector 90 0 17 6 70 0 10 40 NO NO YES YES 16 ...

Page 1455: ...G HG1G HG1P Type Model No Input Type Voltage Current Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Thermistor 2 points Input FC6A J2C1 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 points Input FC6A J4A1 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 8 points Input FC6A J8A1 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 points Input FC6A J4CN1 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA K J R S B E T N C Pt100 Pt1...

Page 1456: ...taching an expansion module Use the expansion module clamp sold separately when using expansion modules Order the module clamp by referring to the width of the module shown in the dimensions of each module When connecting more than 2 expansion modules note the limits shown below S N XXXXX XXXXX V100 Version Number Type No Quantity of Applicable Analog I O Modules Total width when connecting more t...

Page 1457: ...decimal Binary 0x00 0000 0000 Normal 0x81 1000 0001 Communication error An error has occurred in the communication between MICRO I and an expansion module 0x82 1000 0010 Unknown device detected 0x83 1000 0011 Device setting error No device is connected or the connected device is different from that set in the project 0x84 1000 0100 Device writing error The attempt to set the operation of the devic...

Page 1458: ...play process will slow the control time down and result in delayed input response Priority on control processing This mode places priority on control processing speed It can be used for screens where parts operation is minimal but have many data processing parts Use the Cyclic Script to read and write to the Input I D and LEX and Output Q D and LEY Refer to 4 Cyclic Script on page 30 28 for progra...

Page 1459: ...ut delay When an external input occurs on the expansion module the delay time until that input is reflected to the Input I D and LEX is as follows Minimum 5 milliseconds Maximum 15 milliseconds the scan time HMI Special Data Register LSD4 The longer display processing takes the longer the delay Control processing Expansion module input Input refresh Input External input External input 10 ms Input ...

Page 1460: ...follows Minimum 1 millisecond Maximum 11 milliseconds This does not affect the display processing Control processing Expansion module output Output refresh Output Output External output External output 10 ms Output refresh 10 ms Output refresh 10 ms Scan time Output delay Output delay Start of scan Display processing 1 scan Q D LEY Q D LEY End of scan The maximum output delay is 11 ms which is the...

Page 1461: ...refresh Output refresh Input Output External input I O control Sleep Display processing executed End of processing for part at bottom of screen Start of processing for part at top of screen Execution Period Execution Period External output I D LEX Q D LEY Input delay Output delay Execution Period The HG5G 4G 3G 2G V also performs output refresh when input refreshing When an input occurs in the exp...

Page 1462: ...e longest because the processor waits for the output refresh in the next scan before reflecting the output to the Output Q D and LEY Output External output Input refresh Output refresh I O control Sleep Display processing executed Input refresh Output refresh I O control Output delay maximum Q D LEY Only internal devices can be used in the Cyclic Script The actual execution time of the Cyclic Scri...

Page 1463: ...an be from 5 to 105 ms and the output delay can be from 1 to 101 ms Since the sleep time is 100 12 88 ms display processing takes place every 88 ms of each scan Cyclic Script Display processing 88 ms Input refresh 1 ms Output refresh 1 ms Input Output I O control 10 ms Sleep Display processing executed Execution interval 100 ms Execution interval 100 ms I D LEX Q D LEY Input delay 5 to 105 ms Outp...

Page 1464: ...1 However if a unit has four input output ports address numbers 0 to 3 are assigned to each and address numbers 4 to 7 cannot be used 2 Digital I O Modules HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Type No Device Name Symbol HG5G 4G 3G 2G V Expansion Inputs I Expansion Outputs Q HG4G 3G HG2G 5F Digital Input LEX Digital Output LEY When entering the control device inputs befor...

Page 1465: ...y connecting them to the back of the MICRO I Analog I O module inputs support voltage current thermocouples resistance thermometers and thermistors Analog I O module outputs support voltage and current To use Analog I O modules configures the settings on the Module Configuration dialog box For details on configuration methods refer to 5 Module Configuration Dialog Box on page 30 29 For details on ...

Page 1466: ... page 30 29 Analog Input Type The following parameters are for configuring the analog inputs on the analog input modules and the mixed analog I O modules YES Parameters NO No parameters Parameter FC6A J2C1 FC6A J4A1 FC6A J8A1 FC6A J4CN1 FC6A J4CH1Y FC6A J8CU1 FC6A L06A1 FC6A L03CN1 Signal Type YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Data Type YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Minimum and maximum values Data...

Page 1467: ... 10 V YES YES YES YES NO NO YES YES 10 to 10 V YES YES YES YES NO NO YES YES 0 to 20 mA YES YES YES YES NO NO YES YES 4 to 20 mA YES YES YES YES NO NO YES YES Type K thermocouple NO NO NO YES YES YES NO YES Type J thermocouple NO NO NO YES YES YES NO YES Type R thermocouple NO NO NO YES YES YES NO YES Type S thermocouple NO NO NO YES YES YES NO YES Type B thermocouple NO NO NO YES YES YES NO YES T...

Page 1468: ...s can be used with the following versions FC6A J8A1 Hardware version 200 or later Refer to Checking the Hardware Version Number on page 30 4 If a FC6A J8A1 that does not correspond to the above version numbers is set to binary data 16 bits or optional range 16 bits an error will occur and the module will operate as binary data 12 bits Data Type FC6A J2C1 FC6A J4A1 FC6A J8A1 FC6A J4CN1 FC6A J4CH1Y ...

Page 1469: ... 65 535 32 768 to 32 767 2 000 to 13 000 3 280 to 23 720 Type J thermocouple 0 to 65 535 32 768 to 32 767 2 000 to 10 000 3 280 to 18 320 Type R thermocouple 0 to 65 535 32 768 to 32 767 0 to 17 600 320 to 32 000 Type S thermocouple 0 to 65 535 32 768 to 32 767 0 to 17 600 320 to 32 000 Type B thermocouple 0 to 65 535 32 768 to 32 767 0 to 18 200 320 to 33 080 Type E thermocouple 0 to 65 535 32 76...

Page 1470: ...ms Description 0 The value is not filtered 50 to 50 000 The analog input filter can be set in 50 ms increments The analog input is filtered so that approximately 99 of the analog input is reached in the specified filter 20 0 Elapsed time ms Filter 100 ms Analog input data after filtering 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Reaches approximately 99 of the analog input in the set fi...

Page 1471: ... be more easily affected by commercial power supply noise 50 60 Hz noise and fluctuations in input values may become larger If there are large fluctuations in input values change the sampling time to 120 ms 2 Information are described in the instruction sheet for the thermistor to use FC6A J4CN1 0 to 10 V 100 ms 10 ms 10 to 10 V 100 ms 10 ms 0 to 20 mA 100 ms 10 ms 4 to 20 mA 100 ms 10 ms Thermoco...

Page 1472: ... out of minimum range error 7 Reserved 8 When the analog input value is greater than 20 mA and less than the upper limit value 1 9 When the analog input value is greater than the lower limit value and less than 4 mA 2 10 to 65 535 Reserved Signal Type Lower Limit Value Upper Limit Value 0 to 10 V 0 2 V 10 2 V 10 to 10 V 10 4 V 10 4 V 0 to 20 mA 0 4 mA 20 4 mA 4 to 20 mA 3 68 mA 20 32 mA Type K the...

Page 1473: ...t supported 1 Channels that are set to unused are not scanned A channel set to unused always outputs 0 V The circuit is setup the same as when signal type is selected 0 to 10 V Parameter FC6A K2A1 FC6A K4A1 FC6A L06A1 FC6A L03CN1 Signal Type YES YES YES YES Data Type YES YES YES YES Minimum and Maximum values YES YES YES YES Data YES YES YES YES Status YES YES YES YES CAUTION The device connected ...

Page 1474: ...Min and the Max is stored in the data registers in the END progressing of each scan The actual analog output data is not guaranteed when the analog output Status is a value other than 0 Status The status of the analog output Data is stored in data registers 1 The minimum and maximum values can be set only when the data type is set to optional range Set the minimum and maximum values between 32 768...

Page 1475: ...ach parameter of the analog I O module is written Multiple words are used starting from the configured data register The number of words of data registers that are used varies based on the analog I O module model Used Data Registers words FC6A J2C1 FC6A J4A1 FC6A J8A1 FC6A J4CN1 FC6A J4CH1Y FC6A J8CU1 FC6A K2A1 FC6A K4A1 FC6A L06A1 FC6A L03CN1 4 8 16 8 8 16 4 8 12 6 ...

Page 1476: ... 0 Analog input status R 1 1 1 1 1 1 CH1 Analog input data R 2 2 2 2 2 2 Analog input status R 3 3 3 3 3 3 CH2 Analog input data R 4 4 4 4 4 Analog input status R 5 5 5 5 5 CH3 Analog input data R 6 6 6 6 6 Analog input status R 7 7 7 7 7 CH4 Analog input data R 8 8 Analog input status R 9 9 CH5 Analog input data R 10 10 Analog input status R 11 11 CH6 Analog input data R 12 12 Analog input status...

Page 1477: ...1 2 or 4 Filter The setting value is rounded by 50 When 50 001 to 65 535 is stored for the setting value the filter operates as the maximum value of 50 000 ms Thermistor constant 17 Ni1000 18 NTC thermistor 19 PTC thermistor 20 PTC thermistor threshold 21 Resistance measurement 22 Expansion 0 to 20 mA 23 Expansion 4 to 20 mA Setting Value Signal Type Setting Value Data type 0 Binary data Binary da...

Page 1478: ...is 2 to 65 535 a parameter setting error will occur Minimum and maximum values The minimum and maximum values can be set only when the data type is set to optional range Set the minimum and maximum values between 32 768 and 32 767 Channel Parameter R W FC6A K2A1 FC6A K4A1 No Address Number Address Number CH0 Analog output data R 0 0 Analog output status R 1 1 CH1 Analog output data R 2 2 Analog ou...

Page 1479: ...eter Setting Values on page 30 24 For analog outputs refer to Analog Output Parameter Setting Values on page 30 26 Channel Parameter R W FC6A L06A1 FC6A L03CN1 No I O Address Number I O Address Number CH0 Analog data R Input 0 Input 0 Analog status R 1 1 CH1 Analog data R 2 2 Analog status R 3 3 CH2 Analog data R 4 Output 4 Analog status R 5 5 CH3 Analog data R 6 Analog status R 7 CH4 Analog data ...

Page 1480: ...Script Follow these steps to program a Cyclic Script 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box appears 2 On the Expansion Module tab select the Use Cyclic Script check box 3 Specify the Script ID and Execution Interval Script ID Specify the script ID to use from 1 to 32000 as the Cyclic Script Execution Interval x 10msec Specify the interval...

Page 1481: ...le Configuration Dialog Box The module configuration can be created by selecting the expansion modules to use in the expansion modules list and dragging and dropping them to the module configuration area 5 Module Configuration Dialog Box HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P Module Configuration Area Displays the configuration of connected expansion modules Expansion Modu...

Page 1482: ...ialog Box Open the Module Configuration dialog box 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Expansion Module tab in the Project Settings dialog box and then click Module Configuration The Module Configuration dialog box is displayed ...

Page 1483: ... insert in the Expansion Module List and then drag and drop it to the Module Configuration Area 2 Click the inserted expansion module in the Module Configuration Area and then click Configure The configuration dialog box that corresponds to the expansion module is displayed Expansion Module List Module Configuration Area Inserted expansion module ...

Page 1484: ...5 Module Configuration Dialog Box 30 32 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 3 In the configuration dialog box configure the parameters for the expansion module ...

Page 1485: ...odule to remove in the Module Configuration Area 2 Right click the expansion module to delete and then click Remove The selected expansion module is deleted and all of the extension modules placed on the right side of the deleted extension module are automatically shifted to the left Module Configuration Area Expansion module to delete ...

Page 1486: ...resses configured in the editing project are not changed Example When swapping the digital input modules reassign the device addresses as follows However the device address of the part Pilot Lamp configured in the project is not changed Input Module 1 Quantity of Inputs 8 I0030 to I0037 Part Pilot Lamp Part Pilot Lamp Input Module 2 Quantity of Inputs 16 I0040 to I0057 Input Module 1 Quantity of I...

Page 1487: ...G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P Chapter 31 External Memory Devices 1 External Memory Devices HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P External Memory Device HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F HG2G 5T HG1G 1P SD memory card YES NO USB flash drive 1 YES YES Functions HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F HG2G 5T HG1G 1P Reference SD memory card USB flash drive ...

Page 1488: ... letters must not contain the following characters File and directory names must not contain the following characters USB flash drive Models support USB flash drives with the following specifications Max capacity 32 GB Compatible with FAT16 or FAT32 formatted USB flash drives The maximum file size that can be read and written is 256 MB Character set support only for alphanumeric characters File na...

Page 1489: ...signed automatically ALARMLOG user defined CSV Default file name Batch ALMHTO CSV Real time ALMHTA CSV Alarm Log data DATALOG user defined CSV Default file name Batch LOGO CSV Real time LOGA CSV Data Log data corresponds to the data number OPERATIONLOG user defined CSV Default file name Batch OPLOGO CSV Real time OPLOGA CSV Operation Log data RECIPE user defined CSV Default RCP CSV Recipe data cor...

Page 1490: ... computer and the Ethernet interface on the MICRO I Communication settings Follow these procedures to configure the communication device and port to allow reading and writing to the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I 1 On the Home tab in the Project group click Comm Setup The Communication Settings dialog box appears 2 Select MICRO I under Communicate with 3 Select the type of connecti...

Page 1491: ... downloads files to the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I MICRO I resumes running when files have been downloaded Files to External Memory Device while running This function downloads files to the external memory device inserted in the MICRO I without stopping the MICRO I 3 Specify the file name and click Open A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The External Memory Device Maint...

Page 1492: ...1 External Memory Devices 31 6 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 5 Click OK 6 Click Close on the External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box ...

Page 1493: ...iles Recipe Files Picture Files Sound Files 1 Movie File List 2 Movie Files 2 4 Click OK The External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box appears and the data upload begins A message box appears when the data upload is complete 1 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only 2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only If security is enabled for the project on MICRO I ...

Page 1494: ...1 External Memory Devices 31 8 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 5 Click OK 6 Click Close on the External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box ...

Page 1495: ...and write to the external memory device inserted in the computer using WindO I NV4 the external memory device must be specified as the communication device Configure the communication settings as follows before downloading or uploading 1 On the Home tab in the Project group click Comm Setup The Communication Settings dialog box appears 2 Under Communicate with select External Memory Device then cl...

Page 1496: ... Select Drive dialog box appears 4 Select the external memory device drive then click OK A confirmation message appears Drive Specify the computer s drive assigned as the external memory device drive Network Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box This dialog allows you to specify a drive on the network External Memory Device Folder Specify the destination folder for downloading project d...

Page 1497: ...1 1 External Memory Devices 31 External Memory Devices 5 Click Yes The Download dialog box appears and the file download begins When the download is complete a message box appears 6 Click OK 7 Click Close on the Download dialog box ...

Page 1498: ...al memory device drive then click OK The Upload dialog box appears External Memory Device folder Displays the folder specified in the Folder tree described next Folder Specify the source folder for uploading the project data Drive Specify the computer s drive assigned as the external memory device drive Network Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box This dialog allows you to specify a dr...

Page 1499: ...nder the External Memory Device folder For the picture files that can be used with the MICRO I refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Available Image Files on page 2 20 For the sound files that can be used with the MICRO I refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Sound Files on page 2 37 If a password has been configured for the project data the Enter Password screen will be displayed The password to enter varies based o...

Page 1500: ... error occurs try downloading or uploading the project again When data exists in the file output buffer When attempting to switch to the System Mode while reading writing to the external memory device When downloading or uploading project data SD memory card access status SD Memory Card Access Lamp state LSM21 state Status generation conditions Operation Read write access stopped OFF 0 No SD memor...

Page 1501: ... box appears 2 On the External Memory Device tab enter the desired name in the External Memory Device Folder text box Use only alphabetic characters A to Z and numbers 0 to 9 and the maximum is 8 characters 3 Click OK 1 SD memory card for HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G and HG2G 5F USB flash drive for HG2G 5T and HG1G 1P It is not possible to change folder names and file names other than the External Memo...

Page 1502: ...in the CAPTURE folder All Alarm Log files Deletes all files in the ALARMLOG folder All Data Log files Deletes all files in the DATALOG folder All Operation Log files Deletes all files in the OPERATIONLOG folder 4 In Trigger Device Address specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the condition for deleting files Click to display the Tag Editor For the device address c...

Page 1503: ...log box appears and formatting begins 3 Click Close Always format the external memory device before using it HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F SD memory card HG2G 5T HG1G 1P USB flash drive In Communication Settings Communicate with must be set to MICRO I in advance and Port must be set to USB in advance For details on how to configure these settings refer to Communication settings on page 31 4 If a...

Page 1504: ...stem Mode MICRO I switches to the Top Page in the System Mode 4 Press the Main Menu The Main Menu appears MICRO I USB flash drive SD memory card External memory device Press and hold 3 or more seconds MICRO I Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness If security is enabled for the project on MICRO I a dialog appears for you to enter a user name and password For details refer to Chap...

Page 1505: ...y card and USB memory for a USB flash drive 7 Press FORMAT A confirmation message appears Main Menu Offline Run Initial Setting Clock Setting Top Page Self Diagnosis System Information File Manager 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 57 17 Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD ENT COPY DIRECTION FILTER ALL FILTERS DRIVE USB memory FORMAT DRIVE MICRO I FORMAT MICROI ZNV HGDATA01 DIR Main Menu File Manager DEL RELOAD EN...

Page 1506: ...nal Memory Devices 31 20 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 8 Press YES MICRO I starts formatting the external memory device When formatting is completed The format completed is displayed YES NO Format USB Flash Drive ...

Page 1507: ...ta Register LSD33 for a USB flash drive are set with the error status For details about the error refer to Chapter 33 HMI Special Data Register LSD on page 33 7 Manually delete the files by using a computer or the File Manager function If an unusable external memory device is inserted the following error message appears If your computer does not have an SD memory card slot an external memory card ...

Page 1508: ...rogram Copy MICRO I program to USB flash drive Replace sound data Copy PLC program to USB flash drive Production line A replace PLC program Run All Cancel Confirmation Press the command to execute USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini MICRO I This allows operators to change project and PLC programs without using a computer These defined processes are called commands and the file that contains the...

Page 1509: ...sh drive or an SD memory card 1 1 HG5G 4G 3G 2G V HG4G 3G HG2G 5F only Save Upload Computer ZNV Project File znv USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini SD memory card USB flash drive MICRO I Refer to Chapter 29 1 Project Transfer Function on page 29 1 for important notes and limitations Save Save Download PLC Computer SD memory card USB flash drive MICRO I ZLD Project File zld ZLD Project File zld...

Page 1510: ...flash drive Copies files saved on the SD memory card inserted in the MICRO I to the USB flash drive HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Save Copy Computer USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini File File SD memory card USB flash drive MICRO I HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Save Copy Computer USB Autorun defini...

Page 1511: ... For details refer to 2 3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File on page 31 28 If the USB Autorun function of the MICRO I is not enabled the menu screen will not be displayed even if a USB flash drive is inserted into the MICRO I Once the USB Autorun function of the MICRO I is enabled the function will remain enabled until either a project with the Enable USB Autorun check box unchecked is downloa...

Page 1512: ...ve into the MICRO I The menu for the USB Autorun function appears Save Computer ZNV Project File znv ZLD Project File zld File Copy files Only when downloading SD memory card USB flash drive USB flash drive MICRO I If the menu screen does not appear follow these troubleshooting tips Correct the problem and re insert the USB flash drive Cause USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini does not exist on...

Page 1513: ...cute Pressing Run All causes all commands defined in the USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini to execute one by one If security is enabled for the project on MICRO I a dialog appears for you to enter a user name and password For details refer to 2 4 USB Autorun Function Security on page 31 36 When uploading or downloading IDEC PLC program to a password protected PLC a dialog appears for you to e...

Page 1514: ...tton_command Enable button_runall Enable language English COMMAND section required Specify the command to execute and its parameters Create buttons to execute the number of commands specified in the AUTORUN section from COMMAND_1 to COMMAND_5 in that order COMMAND_1 command PRO_DOWNLOAD src_path B NV4DATA HG_PROJECT ZNV reset_keep_device Enable title Production line A replace MICRO I program COMMA...

Page 1515: ...ble the execution buttons for Run All Enable enables the button Disable disables the button If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value the MICRO I assumes Enable Specify the language to use for the button labels and messages Japanese Shift JIS European English Chinese GB2312 Taiwanese BIG5 Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value ...

Page 1516: ... Configuration on page 4 35 dst_net_no required when specifying the destination as a slave number or External Device ID If the communication interface that connects the PLC for downloading is the serial interface specify the slave number If the communication interface is the Ethernet interface specify the External Device ID Specify the same number set as the slave number or External Device ID for ...

Page 1517: ...xternal Device ID for the PLC src_plc_ip required when specifying the destination as an IP address Specify the IP address of the upload source PLC Example src_plc_ip 192 168 0 1 src_plc_port Specify the port number of the upload source PLC Example src_plc_port 2101 When specifying the destination as an IP address and this item is left blank or contains an illegal value the MICRO I assumes that the...

Page 1518: ... and up to the line feed will be treated as a non executable comments Restrictions The maximum number of characters per line is 512 single byte characters including line feed codes All the text on the line will be ignored if there are more than 512 single byte characters on the line Each item must be described as a single line If a line feed occurs before the end of the description all characters ...

Page 1519: ...rror wav source path dst_path A HGDATA01 SOUND destination path title Replace sound data button label 4 COMMAND_3 command LDR_DOWNLOAD download a ZLD Project File src_path B LDRDATA LDR_PROGRAM ZLD source path dst_port COM1 destination port number dst_net_no 0 destination slave number title Production line A replace PLC program button label 5 COMMAND_4 command PRO_UPLOAD upload a project dst_path ...

Page 1520: ...n line A replace MICRO I program as the button label COMMAND_2 Defines the command assigned to execution button COMMAND_2 This is the second command that executes when Run All is pressed command FILE_COPY Executes File Copy src_path B Error wav Copies the sound file Error wav saved on the root directory of the USB flash drive B to the SOUND folder under HGDATA01 on the SD memory card A inserted in...

Page 1521: ...pload a PLC program dst_path B Uploaded_Program Uploads the PLC program running on the PLC slave number 0 connected to the MICRO I s COM1 port and saves it as the ZLD Project File in the folder Uploaded_Program on the USB flash drive B src_port COM1 src_net_no 0 title Copy PLC program to USB flash drive Displays the text Copy PLC program to USB flash drive as the button label COMMENT Defines the n...

Page 1522: ...ired Enter the appropriate password for Data Transfer Function CAN User A B C D E F G H I J K L CLR M N O P Q R S T U V W X ENT Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Password Command Security Group Administrator Operator Reader Downloading a project ZNV Project File YES NO NO Uploading a project YES NO NO Downloading a PLC program ZLD Project File YES NO NO Uploading a PLC program YES NO NO Copying files USB fl...

Page 1523: ...Popup Screen when a USB Flash Drive is Inserted Configuration Procedure 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click the Project The Project Settings dialog box appears 2 On the Autorun tab select the Open Popup Screen when USB flash drive is inserted check box 3 Specify the Screen Number of the Popup Screen to display and the Coordinates then click OK For details refer to Chapter 4 ...

Page 1524: ...creen If security is enabled for the Popup Screen that is displayed by the USB Popup Screen function a dialog appears for you to enter a user name and password For details refer to 2 4 USB Autorun Function Security on page 31 36 When the USB Popup Screen function is enabled if the USB flash drive contains a definition file hgauto ini for use with the USB Autorun function both functions will appear...

Page 1525: ...r with a USB cable 1 3 Supported Printers The following printers can be used Chapter 32 Printer 1 Functions and Connections HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P HG3G HG2G 5F HG4G HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V USB1 Printer USB cable To USB port To USB interface Mini B plug A plug MICRO I Do not disconnect the cable between the MICRO I and printer while printing Do not use a...

Page 1526: ...nter is printing bit 9 at the system area address number 2 will turn ON 2 Setting and Monitoring the Printer HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P If the printer does not support the paper size selected on the Printer tab in the Project Settings dialog box printing is performed with the paper size selected in the printer s settings When the edge of the data is not printed...

Page 1527: ...or details refer to Chapter 30 2 1 Using Digital I O Modules on page 30 12 HMI Temporary Relay LBM This is a bit unit device for temporarily storing values The value of this device switches between screens and text groups and user accounts and it becomes 0 if the screen is reset It can store 128 addresses HMI Expansion Input LI HMI Expansion Output LQ Input or output bit devices used with HG1P For...

Page 1528: ...ched after the values of all external device addresses being used are read and remains 1 until there is a switch to another screen It also operates when switching text group or user account or resetting the display screen LSM12 When Popup Screen is closed a value of this bit is 1 only on the first scan LSM13 Value becomes 0 when Popup Screen is opened and then changes from 0 to 1 after the values ...

Page 1529: ...ice ID IP address and port number LSD204 to 209 are written to the MICRO I then it automatically resets After the MICRO I is reset value becomes 0 LSM55 When a value of this bit changes from 0 to 1 it cancels sending of all the e mails in Waiting status Even if the value of LSM56 is 1 this function can be executed LSM56 While a value of this bit is 1 it pauses sending of all the e mails in Waiting...

Page 1530: ...r to the MICRO I has been turned on LSM1 2 3 and 11 also operates when switches the Text Group Once a value of LSM18 20 and 22 changes from 0 to 1 it remains at a value of 1 until MICRO I is reset or 0 is written then the value is 0 A scan refers to a period during which all parts placed on a screen are processed It is not related to the period of reading values of external device addresses ON OFF...

Page 1531: ...page 30 12 and Chapter 3 7 BACnet Communication on page 3 94 Internal relays M This is a bit unit device for the BACnet communication For details refer to Chapter 3 7 BACnet Communication on page 3 94 1 The last digit of the address number is 0 to 7 in octal notation Device Name Symbol R W Address Range Base Expansion Inputs I R 30 to 107 10 1 Expansion Outputs Q R W 30 to 127 10 1 Internal relays...

Page 1532: ...nts are available HMI Link Register LLR An area that stores the data of the registered device addresses for the external device during Sub Host Communication 64 points are available This register can also be used as an internal register like LDR when Sub Host Communication is not used HMI Expansion Input Word WLI HMI Expansion Output Word WLQ These registers handle the expansion input or the expan...

Page 1533: ...eek 1 BCD digit 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday LSD20 When a value of 1 is written into this special register the Internal clock in MICRO I is updated according to the data stored in LSD21 26 It automatically resets to 0 after the update LSD21 Write a Year value to store in the MICRO I internal clock 2 BCD digits LSD22 Stores set value for Month in MICRO I in...

Page 1534: ...s LSD45 6 SD memory card total memory capacity Lower word Kbytes LSD46 6 SD memory card total memory capacity Upper word Kbytes LSD47 Reserved for Communication drivers LSD48 Reserved LSD49 Stores the O I Link slave station number Read only LSD50 The sequence value of the message number or channel number if the alarm function is being used selected by the cursor in the Alarm List Display is stored...

Page 1535: ...ver for the User Communication set to the Ethernet interface are forcibly disconnected Bit 0 User Communication 1 Bit 1 User Communication 2 Bit 2 User Communication 3 LSD69 to 71 Reserved LSD72 7 Stores the currently played sound file number LSD73 7 Stores the sound ID which could not be played by any errors LSD74 to 78 Reserved LSD79 Quantity of Expansion I O Modules LSD80 to 96 Reserved LSD97 R...

Page 1536: ... Example When the IP address is 192 168 0 1 LSD192 192 LSD193 168 LSD194 0 LSD195 1 LSD196 to 199 The preset value for subnet mask of the MICRO I When the value of LSM53 changes from 0 to 1 the values of these device addresses are written to the MICRO I When the power is turned on the set values of the project are read to these device addresses Example When the subnet mask is 255 255 254 0 LSD196 ...

Page 1537: ... error 3 Authentication error 4 None of the above LSD223 E mail Number which has been sent LSD224 to 229 Reserved LSD230 Number of the FTP server connected to using the FTP client function LSD231 Number of file transfer successes The register is set to 0 at the start of file transfers 1 is added to the register when a file transfer ends without any errors LSD232 Number of file transfer failures Th...

Page 1538: ...communication status Stores the status for BACnet communication Bit 0 Stopped Bit 1 Ready Bit 2 Operating Bit 3 Stopped by error LSD261 3 BACnet Communication Error Information Stores the last error information that has occurred in BACnet communication Bit 0 Normal Bit 1 Invalid device ID Bit 2 Invalid IP address Bit 3 Invalid BBMD IP address Bit 4 BBDM registration failure LSD262 to 269 3 Reserve...

Page 1539: ...Screen No Format in Project Settings BCD BIN This data format for LSD32 is the same as Screen No Format in Project Settings BCD BIN If the screen number is not exist in the project No Screen Data message will appear If 0xFFFF Hex is written to LSD32 MICRO I will display the Top Page of System Mode In case that the current screen is changed by System Area1 and LSD32 at the same instant the screen n...

Page 1540: ...used for analog I O module and BACnet communication 1 Multiples of 20 only Device Name Symbol R W Address Range Base Expansion Inputs WI R 30 50 70 90 10 Expansion Outputs WQ R W 30 50 70 90 110 10 Internal relays WM R W 0 to 780 1 10 Data register D R W 0000 to 2999 10 HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1G HG1P R W is an abbreviation of Read Write R W indicate that both readi...

Page 1541: ...nged to its initial settings and data can be initialized For details refer to 2 System Mode Overview on page 34 3 Device Monitor Shows the Device Monitor This screen can be used to register device addresses and monitor and change values of device addresses For details refer to Chapter 25 2 2 Device Monitor on page 25 21 Adjust Brightness Shows the adjust brightness screen This screen is used to ad...

Page 1542: ...Brightness screen is displayed Also press or to adjust to your preferred brightness Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness Maintenance Adjust Brightness Screen brightness can be adjusted using methods other than the ones listed above or buttons on the Top Page in System Mode Changing the values for HMI Special Data Register LSD51 ...

Page 1543: ... HG1P Top Page Main Menu screen Press Main Menu to display the Main Menu screen shown in the right figure Run Simulate Offline Save BRIGHTNESS 31 SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE ENG JPN MAC Address 00 03 7B F0 12 A8 IP Address 192 168 0 1 DHCP 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 56 44 Offline For information on accessing the MICRO I System Mode refer to 1 2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen on page 34 1 Design may change sligh...

Page 1544: ...setting of the internal clock of the MICRO I Page 34 11 Offline Offline Goes to Offline mode Page 34 11 Run Run Goes to Run mode Page 34 11 System Information System Info Displays information relating to the type No projects as well as system software of the current MICRO I Page 34 12 File Manager Manage the files saved in SD memory cards USB flash drives and the internal memory of the MICRO I Pag...

Page 1545: ...al Device 2 External Device 3 External Device 4 External Device Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Parameter1 Pass Through Setting Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Parameter1 Pass Through Setting Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Parameter1 Pass Through Setting Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Parameter...

Page 1546: ...Out Trans Wait Parameter1 Pass Through Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Parameter1 Pass Through Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Parameter1 Pass Through Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Parameter1 Pass Through Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 RS232C IP Address RS422 485 Default Gateway Misc Setting E...

Page 1547: ...n Backlight Backlight 2 Press the left right buttons to select the item and then enter the time until the backlight brightness is reduced automatically with the numeric keys 3 Press the left right buttons to select the item and then enter the time until the backlight automatically turns off with the numeric keys 4 Press SAVE SAVE button to save the settings Start Time Start Time This item sets the...

Page 1548: ... registered in the security group from the touchscreen From the Main Menu screen press Initial Setting Initial Setting System Operation System Op and then Password Password Press CHG to change the user account Press Change Password Change Password to display the password input screen Use the password input keys to enter a password from 4 to 15 characters Pressing ENTER ENT applies the entered pass...

Page 1549: ...ternal Device 3 Ext Device 3 or External Device 4 Ext Device 4 to display the menu screen for the external device communication To specify settings press the button to select a choice External Device Communication setting items vary based on the currently connected hardware For details about settings refer to the WindO I NV4 External Device Setup Manual If Not Use are selected from the Communicati...

Page 1550: ...g procedure to set the IP address and Subnet mask settings From the Main Menu screen press Initial Setting Initial Setting Communication I F Comm I F and then Ethernet IP Address IP Address Press the left right buttons to select an item then use the Keypad to enter the IP address and subnet mask values Press SAVE SAVE to save the settings Ethernet Default Gateway Default Gateway Specify the defaul...

Page 1551: ...o save the settings 3 2 Clock Setting Press Clock Setting Clock Setting in the Main Menu screen to display the clock settings screen Use this screen to set MICRO I s internal clock To return to the Main Menu screen press Main Menu Main Menu at the top of the screen Procedure 1 Press the left right buttons to select an item then use the Keypad to enter the date or time 2 Press SAVE SAVE to save the...

Page 1552: ...em software version To return to the system information screen press System Info System Info at the top of the screen System 2 From the Main Menu screen press System Information System Info and then press System 2 System 2 Displays the following settings Project name External Device Communication 1 to 4 and Communication Interface External device manufacturer Communication driver name Communicatio...

Page 1553: ...aded or uploaded Refer to Chapter 29 1 Project Transfer Function on page 29 1 Delete Select the files you want to delete and then press DEL 3 7 Ext Mem Device From the Main Menu screen press Ext Mem Device and then Format to format the USB flash drive To return to the Main Menu screen press Main Menu at the top of the screen 3 8 Top Page Press Top Page Top Page in the Main Menu screen to return to...

Page 1554: ...3 Settings 34 14 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1555: ...truction Sheet x 1 x 1 Mounting clips Communication plug for external devices Attached to the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V USB Cable Lock Pin USB Clamp Band Screw lock bracket Metric Screw Thread M2 6 x 0 45 x 1 x 1 x 6 x 4 x 4 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 2 x 2 LCD size AUDIO IN VIDEO IN Bezel color Type No 15 0 inch With Black HG5G VFXT22MF B 12 1 inch With Black HG4G VCXT22MF B 10 4 inch With Light gray HG3G V...

Page 1556: ...35 2 WindO I NV4 User s Manual 1 3 Part Names HG5G V 15 0inch HG4G V 12 1inch HG3G VA 10 4inch 2 1 3 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 15 2 1 3 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 15 2 1 3 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 15 ...

Page 1557: ...ini Jack φ3 5mm Except for HG2G V 8 Ethernet Interface LAN IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Connector RJ 45 With Auto MDI MDI X function 9 USB Interface USB1 USB2 0 Device Connector Mini B 10 USB Interface USB2 USB2 0 Host Connector Type A Output current 5V 500mA 11 Memory Card Interface SD For SD memory card 12 SD Memory Card Access Lamp 13 Expansion Module Interface EXT For IDEC MICROSmart Expansi...

Page 1558: ...of the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V Wire only the interface used Note that the serial interface COM2 can be used as the RS232C and RS422 485 interfaces at one time Interface Specification RS232C RS422 485 Connector D sub 9 pin Plug Screw lock bracket Inch Screw Thread 4 40 UNC No Name I O Function Communication type 1 RDA IN Receive Data RS422 485 2 RD IN Receive Data RS232C 3 SD OUT Send Data RS232C 4 SDA OUT...

Page 1559: ... be installed Interface Specification RS232C RS422 485 Connector Detachable Terminal Block 9 pin Applicable cable AWG20 to AWG22 Recommended Pressure Terminal AI 0 34 8 TQ AI 0 5 8 WH AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH Phoenix Contact Tightening Torque 0 22 to 0 25 N m No Name I O Function Communication type 1 SD OUT Send Data RS232C 2 RD IN Receive Data 3 RS OUT Request to Send 4 CS IN Clear to Send 5 SG Signa...

Page 1560: ...rom corrosive gases Type No HG5G V HG4G V HG3G VA HG3G V8 HG2G V Rated Voltage 24V DC Power Consumption 27W maximum 25W maximum 22W maximum 18W maximum When not using USB Interface USB2 and Expansion Module Interface EXT 20W maximum 15W maximum 12W maximum 8W maximum When backlight is turned off 7W maximum 4W maximum Power Voltage Range 20 4 to 28 8V DC Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 ms...

Page 1561: ...ea W H 304 1 228 1 mm 245 76 184 32 mm 210 4 157 8 mm 170 496 127 872 mm 115 2 86 4 mm Display Resolution W H 1024 768 dots 640 480 dots View angle Left Right Bottom 80 Top 60 Left Right Top Bottom 85 Left Right Top Bottom 80 Brightness of LCD only 650 cd m2 600 cd m2 700 cd m2 800 cd m2 800 cd m2 Brightness Adjustment 48 levels Backlight LED Backlight Life 2 Approx 100 000 hours Touch Panel Switc...

Page 1562: ...xpansion module installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 33 0 6 0 48 8 54 8 351 5 278 5 69 5 11 4 291 5 364 5 278 5 351 5 50 30 55 ...

Page 1563: ...he expansion module installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 11 4 44 4 227 0 6 0 48 1 54 1 32 3 314 0 240 0 301 0 227 0 301 0 10 50 30 55 ...

Page 1564: ... module installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 44 4 11 4 199 5 6 0 46 7 52 7 212 0 270 0 257 5 30 9 212 0 257 5 50 30 55 10 ...

Page 1565: ...xpansion module installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 32 6 176 0 231 0 218 5 15 2 11 4 54 4 48 4 6 0 163 5 163 5 218 5 20 40 30 35 50 30 55 ...

Page 1566: ...odule installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 134 7 167 2 152 5 33 6 120 0 5 0 49 4 54 4 50 120 0 152 5 40 49 4 40 35 55 40 ...

Page 1567: ...eat sources Allow at least 100mm between the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V and walls or other equipment Do not install the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V where the ambient temperature exceeds the rated operating ambient temperature range When mounting the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V in such locations provide a forced air cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the ambient temperature within the rated temperature range The HG5G 4G 3G 2G V ...

Page 1568: ...ause wrinkle on the display or impair the waterproof characteristics If the mounting clips are tightened obliquely to the panel the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V may fall off the panel When installing the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V into a panel cut out make sure that the gasket is not twisted Especially when re installing take special care because any twists in the gasket will impair the waterproof characteristics B A Uni...

Page 1569: ...les Orientation Operating Temperature w o expansion modules w expansion modules Vertical Portrait Counter Clockwise HG5G V 20 to 60 C 10 to 50 C HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Portrait Clockwise HG5G V 20 to 60 C unavailable HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Landscape HG5G V 20 to 60 C unavailable HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Horizontal HG5G V 20 to 60 C unavailable HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V When installing the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V in a ...

Page 1570: ...ower supply from the external noise source device Insert an isolator on the communication line of the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V and the non isolated communication device i e PLC to prevent damage CAUTION Turn off the power supply before wiring Make the wiring as short as possible and run all wires as far away as possible from high voltage and large current cables Follow all the procedures and precautions wh...

Page 1571: ... USB cable into the USB2 port 2 Strain the Edge part of the USB Cable Lock Pin and insert the Edge part to the 2 holes upper the USB2 port 3 Fasten the USB Clamp Band around the USB cable and the Clamp part secure them tightly Clamp part Edge part HG5G 4G 3G V HG2G V Upper Holes Upper Holes HG5G 4G 3G V HG2G V Fasten the USB Clamp Band without the space between the Clamp part and it and the inclin...

Page 1572: ...battery at customer s expense Contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation Display Wipe any stain of the display using a soft cloth slightly dampened with neutral detergent or alcoholic solvent Do not use solvents such as thinner ammonia strong acid and strong alkaline Terminals Connectors Check the terminals and connectors to make sure of no loose screws incomplete insertion or disconnected lines Moun...

Page 1573: ...ountry or local regulation Maintenance Screen Turn on the power to the HG5G 4G 3G 2G V then press and hold the touch panel on the upper left corner of the screen for three seconds or longer The Maintenance Screen appears on the screen Permission to show the Maintenance Screen can be set using the configuration software Refer to Chapter 4 3 1 System Tab on page 4 25 for details The Maintenance Scre...

Page 1574: ... 2 Press the and at the bottom the Adjust Brightness Screen to adjust the contrast to the optimal setting 3 Press the X to close the Adjust Brightness Screen Run Offline Main Menu BRIGHTNESS 31 MAC Address 00 03 7B F0 12 A8 IP Address 192 168 0 1 DHCP 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 56 44 IDEC HG G SERIES SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE ENG JPN Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness Maintenance Adjust B...

Page 1575: ...ust Touch Panel setting Press Yes then the Touch Panel Adjust screen appears 3 Press the center of the X mark then the position of the mark changes one after another Press five marks sequentially 4 When normally recognized the confirmation screen of 2 is restored At procedure 3 when pressing a point away from the center of the X mark a recognition error will result Then the X mark returns to the i...

Page 1576: ...ttached to the HG4G 3G HG2G 5F USB Cable Lock Pin USB Clamp Band Screw lock bracket Metric Screw Thread M2 6 x 0 45 x 1 x 1 x 4 x 4 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 2 x 2 LCD size AUDIO IN VIDEO IN Bezel color Type No 12 1 inch Without Dark gray HG4G CJT22TF B With Dark gray HG4G CJT22MF B 10 4 inch Without Light gray HG3G AJT22TF W Dark gray HG3G AJT22TF B With Light gray HG3G AJT22MF W Dark gray HG3G A...

Page 1577: ...3 2 HG4G 3G HG2G 5F 35 MICRO I Specifications 2 3 Part Names HG4G 12 1inch HG3G A 10 4inch HG3G 8 8 4inch 2 3 1 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 15 1 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 15 2 3 1 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 15 2 3 ...

Page 1578: ...erface LAN IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Connector RJ 45 With Auto MDI MDI X function 9 USB Interface USB1 USB2 0 Device Connector Mini B 10 USB Interface USB2 USB2 0 Host Connector Type A Output current 5V 500mA 11 Memory Card Interface SD For SD memory card 12 SD Memory Card Access Lamp 13 Expansion Module Interface EXT For IDEC MICROSmart Expansion Modules 14 Battery Cover 15 Terminating Resis...

Page 1579: ...ult in failure of the HG4G 3G HG2G 5F Wire only the interface used Interface Specification RS232C RS422 485 Connector D sub 9 pin Plug Screw lock bracket Inch Screw Thread 4 40 UNC No Name I O Function Communication type 1 4W RDA 2W A IN INOUT Receive Data 4W Send and Receive Data 2W RS422 485 2 RD IN Receive Data RS232C 3 SD OUT Send Data RS232C 4 4W SDA OUT Send Data 4W RS422 485 5 SG Signal Gro...

Page 1580: ...cable Expansion Modules on page 30 2 for the number the types and the combination of the expansion modules that can be installed Interface Specification RS232C RS422 485 Connector Detachable Terminal Block 9 pin Applicable cable AWG20 to AWG22 Recommended Pressure Terminal AI 0 34 8 TQ AI 0 5 8 WH AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH Phoenix Contact Tightening Torque 0 22 to 0 25 N m No Name I O Function Communic...

Page 1581: ...Temperature 0 to 50 C Operating Humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Storage Temperature 20 to 60 C Storage Humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Altitude 0 to 2000m Pollution Degree 2 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Type No HG4G HG3G A HG3G 8 HG2G 5F Rated Voltage 24V DC Power Consumption 27W maximum 25W maximum 19W maximum When not using USB Interface USB2 and Expansion Module Interf...

Page 1582: ...D only 550 cd m2 700 cd m2 600 cd m2 800 cd m2 Brightness Adjustment 48 levels Backlight LED Backlight Life 3 Approx 100 000 hours Approx 50 000 hours Touch Panel Switch Type Analog Resistive Film Operating Force 3N maximum 0 55 to 2 3 N 3N maximum Multiple Operations Impossible Life 1 000 000 operations User Memory Approx 12 MB Backup Battery Coin type lithium manganese dioxide battery CR2032 Gua...

Page 1583: ...to the expansion module installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 32 3 44 4 54 1 48 1 227 0 240 0 11 4 37 9 6 0 314 0 301 0 10 301 0 227 0 55 50 30 ...

Page 1584: ...dule installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 30 9 44 4 52 7 46 7 199 5 212 0 11 4 36 5 6 0 270 0 257 5 10 257 5 199 5 55 50 30 ...

Page 1585: ...nsion module installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 32 6 15 2 54 4 48 4 163 5 176 0 11 4 38 2 6 0 231 0 218 5 20 40 30 35 218 5 163 5 55 50 30 ...

Page 1586: ...n module installation side Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 33 6 120 0 134 7 54 4 5 0 167 2 152 5 55 40 40 49 4 35 152 5 40 120 0 50 ...

Page 1587: ...ing is provided If you install it using any other orientation use forced air cooling or lower the ambient operating temperature HG4G 3G HG2G 5F Installation Make a panel cut out on the panel with the dimensions shown below Use the attached mounting clips to tighten the screws evenly to mount panel screws must be applied on total of four places on top and bottom with the specified torque Mounting c...

Page 1588: ...emperature is 0 to 45 C Orientation Operating Temperature w o expansion modules w expansion modules Vertical Landscape HG4G 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C HG3G 0 to 45 C HG2G 5F 0 to 40 C 1 Portrait Clockwise HG4G 0 to 50 C unavailable HG3G HG2G 5F Portrait Counter Clockwise HG4G 0 to 50 C 0 to 45 C HG3G 0 to 45 C 0 to 40 C 1 HG2G 5F 0 to 35 C Horizontal HG4G 0 to 50 C unavailable HG3G 0 to 45 C HG2G 5F When...

Page 1589: ...g on the conditions of the personal computer Make sure of the following cautions in order to prevent an accident If the personal computer has a 3 pin power plug or power plug with a ground lead type make sure to use a plug socket including a ground input electrode or ground the earth lead respectively If the personal computer has a 2 pin power plug without ground lead follow the procedure below wh...

Page 1590: ...e into the USB2 port 2 Strain the Edge part of the USB Cable Lock Pin and insert the Edge part to the 2 holes upper the USB2 port 3 Fasten the USB Clamp Band around the USB cable and the Clamp part secure them tightly Clamp part Edge part HG4G 3G HG2G 5F Upper Holes Upper Holes HG4G 3G HG2G 5F Fasten the USB Clamp Band without the space between the Clamp part and it and the inclination OK NG NG Wi...

Page 1591: ...y replacement is displayed Display Wipe any stain of the display using a soft cloth slightly dampened with neutral detergent or alcoholic solvent Do not use solvents such as thinner ammonia strong acid and strong alkaline Terminals Connectors Check the terminals and connectors to make sure of no loose screws incomplete insertion or disconnected lines Mounting Clips Make sure that all mounting clip...

Page 1592: ...ulators correctly in accordance with each country or local regulation Maintenance Screen Turn on the power to the HG4G 3G HG2G 5F then press and hold the touch panel on the upper left corner of the screen for three seconds or longer The Maintenance Screen appears on the screen Permission to show the Maintenance Screen can be set using the configuration software Refer to Chapter 4 3 1 System Tab on...

Page 1593: ...creen appears 2 Press the and at the bottom the Adjust Brightness Screen to adjust the contrast to the optimal setting 3 Press the X to close the Adjust Brightness Screen Run Offline Main Menu BRIGHTNESS 31 MAC Address 00 03 7B F0 12 A8 IP Address 192 168 0 1 DHCP 2010 OCT 14 THU 14 56 44 IDEC HG G SERIES SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE ENG JPN Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness Mainten...

Page 1594: ...el setting Press Yes then the Touch Panel Adjust screen appears 3 Press the center of the X mark then the position of the mark changes one after another Press five marks sequentially 4 When normally recognized the confirmation screen of 2 is restored At procedure 3 when pressing a point away from the center of the X mark a recognition error will result Then the X mark returns to the initial positi...

Page 1595: ...G HG2G 5T HG1G Unit Instruction Sheet Japanese English Simplified Chinese x 1 x 1 Mounting clips Communication plug for external devices Attached to the HG2G 5T HG1G USB Cable Lock Pin USB Clamp Band x 1 x 1 x 4 x 2 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 2 x 1 x 2 LCD size Bezel color Type No 5 7 inch TFT Monochrome LCD Light gray HG2G 5TN22TF W Dark gray HG2G 5TN22TF B Silver HG2G 5TN22TF S 5 7 inch TFT Color LCD Light g...

Page 1596: ...erface SERIAL1 RS232C RS422 485 Connector Terminal Block 9 pin 6 Ethernet Interface LAN IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Connector RJ 45 With Auto MDI MDI X function 7 Battery Cover 8 Terminating Resistor Selector Switch For RS422 485 interface 9 Mounting Clip Position 10 USB Interface USB USB2 0 Device Connector Mini B 11 USB Interface USB2 USB2 0 Host Connector Type A Output current 5V 500mA 2 3 7...

Page 1597: ...ay 2 Touch Panel 3 Power Supply Terminal 4 Serial Interface COM RS232C RS422 485 Connector Terminal Block 9 pin 5 Ethernet Interface LAN IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Connector RJ 45 With Auto MDI MDI X function 6 Battery Cover 7 Mounting Clip Position 8 USB Interface USB1 USB2 0 Device Connector Mini B 9 USB Interface USB2 USB2 0 Host Connector Type A Output current 5V 500mA 1 1 2 3 7 6 8 9 5 4 ...

Page 1598: ...inal number 8 RDA and terminal number 9 RDB if necessary CAUTION Make sure to turn off the power to the HG2G 5T HG1G before wiring each interface or switching the terminating resistor selector switch Interface Specification RS232C RS422 485 Connector Detachable Terminal Block 9 pin Applicable cable AWG20 to AWG22 Recommended Pressure Terminal AI 0 34 8 TQ AI 0 5 8 WH AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH Phoenix C...

Page 1599: ... 90 RH no condensation Storage Temperature 20 to 70 C Storage Humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Altitude 0 to 2000m Pollution Degree 2 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Rated Voltage 12V DC 24V DC Power Consumption 8W maximum When not using USB Interface USB2 4W maximum Power Voltage Range 10 2V DC to 28 8V DC Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 ms maximum Power supply 20 4V DC...

Page 1600: ...dots 480 272 dots View angle Left Right 65 Top 80 Bottom 60 Left Right 80 Top 80 Bottom 80 Left Right 70 Top 60 Bottom 65 Brightness of LCD only 1100 cd m2 500 cd m2 800 cd m2 Brightness Adjustment 32 levels Backlight LED Backlight Life 4 Approx 100 000 hours Approx 70 000 hours Touch Panel Switch Type Analog Resistive Film Operating Force 3N maximum Multiple Operations Impossible Life 1 000 000 o...

Page 1601: ... and communication cables Recommended ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 manufactured by TDK Corporation Power supply section FE Communication section External device MICRO I DC power supply Attach the ferrite core near the power supply section of the power cables connected to the MICRO I unit Attach the ferrite cores according to the usage conditions of the external devices surrounding environment and th...

Page 1602: ...able Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 120 0 134 7 43 6 35 9 5 0 167 2 152 5 89 81 152 5 120 0 50 Panel surface 53 5 45 0 ...

Page 1603: ... Unit mm Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are representative values and are intended for reference only 91 0 102 0 34 5 27 8 4 0 128 0 117 0 71 80 50 117 0 91 0 Panel surface ...

Page 1604: ...air conditioner to keep the ambient temperature within the rated temperature range HG2G 5T HG1G Installation Make a panel cut out on the panel with the dimensions shown below Use the attached mounting clips to tighten the screws evenly to mount panel screws must be applied on total of four places on top and bottom with the specified torque Mounting clips can be attached to the left and right sides...

Page 1605: ...out ground lead follow the procedure below when connect the HG2G 5T HG1G to the personal computer 1 Pull out the power plug of the personal computer from the AC outlet 2 Connect the HG2G 5T HG1G to the personal computer 3 Insert the power plug of the personal computer into the AC outlet 1 HG2G 5T only CAUTION Turn off the power supply before wiring Make the wiring as short as possible and run all ...

Page 1606: ...USB2 port 2 Strain the Edge part of the USB Cable Lock Pin and insert the Edge part to the 2 holes lower the USB2 port 3 Fasten the USB Clamp Band around the USB cable and the Clamp part secure them tightly 1 Only USB2 for HG2G 5T Clamp part Edge part Lower holes Lower holes HG2G 5T HG1G HG2G 5T HG1G Fasten the USB Clamp Band without the space between the Clamp part and it and the inclination OK N...

Page 1607: ... strong alkaline Terminals Connectors Check the terminals and connectors to make sure of no loose screws incomplete insertion or disconnected lines Mounting Clips Make sure that all mounting clips and screws are tightened sufficiently If the mounting clips are loose tighten the screw to the recommended tightening torque Backlight The HG2G 5T HG1G s backlight cannot be replaced by the customer When...

Page 1608: ...symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration This will be indicated as follows Hg mercury 0 0005 Cd cadmium 0 002 Pd lead 0 004 In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators Please dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly in accor...

Page 1609: ...he Top Page Screen appears Initial Setting Self Diagnosis and Initialization of the data etc can be executed in the System Mode Adjusting the Brightness The brightness of the HG2G 5T HG1G display can be adjusted on the Adjust Brightness Screen 1 Press the Adjust Brightness at the bottom of the Maintenance Screen The Adjust Brightness Screen appears 2 Press the and at the bottom of the Adjust Brigh...

Page 1610: ...the X mark then the position of the mark changes one after another Press five marks sequentially 4 When normally recognized the confirmation screen of 2 is restored At procedure 3 when pressing a point away from the center of the X mark a recognition error will result Then the X mark returns to the initial position then repeat the procedure of 3 again To adjust the brightness in the System Mode us...

Page 1611: ... model you have received is what you actually ordered and no parts are damaged to accidents during shipping 4 2 Part Numbers 4 HG1P Name HG1P HG1P Unit Instruction Sheet Japanese English x1 Instruction Sheet Chinese x1 1 Communication Interface Part No Serial Interface RS422 485 HG1P ST32YBFH B0 Ethernet Interface HG1P ST32ZBFH B0 ...

Page 1612: ...Operation Power is on Not lit Power is off 7 Connector Removable 19 pin Female Connector 8 Mounting Hole For Wall Mounted Hook Wall mounted hook screw mounting part 2 9 Nameplate Label printed with Part number Serial Number and Consumption Current 10 Enabling Switch 1 external wiring 11 Hand Strap Mounting Part 12 USB Port Cover 13 USB Port Cover Mounting Part USB port cover screw mounting part 1 ...

Page 1613: ...r Switch Contact 1 NC 2 C_NO1 Selector Switch Contact 1 NO 3 B_C1 Enabling Switch Contact 1 COM 4 B_C2 Enabling Switch Contact 2 COM 5 B_NO2 Enabling Switch Contact 2 NO 6 FG Frame Ground 7 RDA TPI Receive Data 8 RDB TPI Receive Data 9 SDB TPO Send Data 10 A_NC21 Emergency Stop Switch Contact 2 NC 11 A_NC22 Emergency Stop Switch Contact 2 NC 12 DC24V HG1P 24V DC Power Supply 13 C_C1 Selector Switc...

Page 1614: ...Pressure Up to 2000m RUN 750 to 1060hPa Pollution Degree 2 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Rated Voltage 24V DC Power Consumption 3W maximum When not using USB Interface USB2 2W maximum Power Voltage Range 20 4 to 28 8V DC Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 ms maximum Inrush Current 20A maximum Dielectric Withstand Voltage AC500V 10mA 1 minute between power and ground terminals...

Page 1615: ... angle Left Right 80 Top 65 Bottom 55 Brightness of LCD only 400 cd m2 Brightness Adjustment 32 levels Backlight White LED It cannot be replaced Backlight Life 1 Approx 30 000 hours Touch Panel Switch Type Analog Resistive Film Operating Force 3N maximum Multiple Operations Impossible Life 1 000 000 operations User Memory 12MB Clock Function 2 Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of week 90 secon...

Page 1616: ...uasi peak 88M to 216MHz 46 4dBμV m quasi peak 216M to 960MHz 49 5dBμV m quasi peak 960M to 1GHz Electrostatic Discharge Contact 4kV Air 8kV Electromagnetic Field 10V m 80 to 1000 MHz 3V m 1 4 to 2 0 GHz 1V m 2 0 to 2 7 GHz 80 AM 1kHz Fast Transient Burst Power 2kV Communication cable 1kV Surge Immunity 500V 24V and 0V 1kV 24V and FE 0V and FE Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity 3V Power Communicati...

Page 1617: ...2 Contact Normally open contact Damage Limits 500 000 operations minimum Internal Devices Device Name HMI Expansion Input Bit Symbol LI R W R R W is an abbreviation of Read Write R W indicate that both reading and writing are possible while R indicates that only reading is possible No Name HMI Expansion Input Bit Assignment 1 F1 LI0 2 F2 LI1 3 F3 LI2 4 F4 LI3 5 F5 LI4 6 F6 LI5 7 F7 LI6 8 F8 LI7 9 ...

Page 1618: ...ch OFF ON ON OFF Maximum 41 ms 20 ms ON 20ms OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON State of the function key Reading the state of the function key Read result of the function key While executing transmitting and receiving processing for user communications the time required for the HG1P to process the read result and make an ON judgment will increase because the read processing for function keys is executed after...

Page 1619: ...ntacts to two inputs so that they are monitored mutually design the sequence control to take into consideration this time difference Part Number Manufacturer HE6B M200Y IDEC Number Mounted 1 Contact 2 contacts external wiring Contact Rating 0 7A DC30V Monitoring Contact None Damage Limits Mechanical Position 1 2 1 1 000 000 operations minimum Position 1 2 3 1 100 000 operations minimum Electrical ...

Page 1620: ...gh the HG1P optional cable as a control signal for external devices Part Number Manufacturer LB6S 2T1 IDEC Number Mounted 1 Contact SPDT external wiring Contact Rating 0 1A DC30V resistance load LED Non Illuminated Damage Limits Mechanical 250 000 operations minimum Electrical 100 000 operations minimum Switching detent 90 2 positions Specification Stops at all positions manual 1 C_NC1 2 C_NO1 13 ...

Page 1621: ...WindO I NV4 User s Manual 35 67 4 HG1P 35 MICRO I Specifications 4 6 Dimensions Unit mm Cable Dimensions 191 0 168 9 56 0 70 6 51 0 55 7 ...

Page 1622: ...rate a lot of heat Such as a boiler Use the wall mounted hook optional item for wall mounting HG1P Installation Attaching the Optional Cable HG9Z XCP13 XCP15 XCP17 to the HG1P 1 Turn the connector cap 2 Pull off the connector cap 3 Turn the connector at the end of the HG1P optional cable to align the open text with the logo 4 Align the connector at the end of the HG1P optional cable with the matin...

Page 1623: ...tor After locking the connector The connector will stop turning at 90 Do not try to turn it past 90 CAUTION When attaching the cover tighten the screw to the recommended tightening torque 0 6 N m When installing the HG1P make sure that the gasket is not twisted Because any twisting in the gasket will impair the waterproof characteristics Phillips Screwdriver USB Port Cover Screw USB Port Cover Onl...

Page 1624: ...ng Hook HG9Z PK3 1 Fit the indented surface of the wall mounted hook into the HG1P 2 Use the wall mounted hook screws M3 10 and tighten in two locations to the recommended tightening torque 0 6 N m Hand Strap Hand Strap Hole The End of the Strap The Loop of the Strap Be careful when pulling the strap tight because the strap may be damaged if excessive force is used Wall Mounted Hook Screw Wall Mou...

Page 1625: ...e External Devices D sub 25 pin Male Connector Jackscrew M2 6 Length 3m 5m 7m Cable Length 3m 5m 7m 1 13 25 14 Connector for the External Devices View of mating surface of the removable connector No Name Function No Name Function 1 FG Frame Ground 14 NC 2 RDB TPI Receive Data 15 NC 3 RDA TPI Receive Data 16 NC 4 SDB TPO Send Data 17 NC 5 SDA TPO Send Data 18 C_NC1 Selector Switch Contact 1 NC 6 SG...

Page 1626: ...h Outer Diameter 7 0 mm Cable Length 2m Stripped Wires Shield White Black Black Red Green Orange Blue Brown Yellow Shield Sheath Wire pair 2 Single wire 1 Single wire 5 Single wire 4 Single wire 3 Single wire 2 Wire pair 1 No Name Function Cable Color 1 RDA TPI Receive Data Wire pair 1 Black 2 RDB TPI Receive Data Wire pair 1 Red 3 SDA TPO Send Data Wire pair 2 Black 4 SDB TPO Send Data Wire pair ...

Page 1627: ...mode Maintenance and Inspection Parts Description Display Wipe any stain of the display using a soft cloth slightly dampened with neutral detergent or alcoholic solvent Do not use solvents such as thinner ammonia strong acid and strong alkaline Removable Connector Check the terminals and connectors to make sure of incomplete insertion or disconnected lines USB Port Cover Make sure of no loose scre...

Page 1628: ... the and at the bottom the Adjust Brightness Screen to adjust the brightness to the optimal setting 3 Press the X to close the Adjust Brightness Screen Maintenance System Mode Device Monitor Adjust Brightness Maintenance Adjust Brightness To adjust the brightness in the System Mode use the and buttons located at the bottom of the Top Page Run Offline Main Menu SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE 2010 OCT 14 THU 14...

Page 1629: ...s Adjust Touch Panel setting Press Yes then the Touch Panel Adjust screen appears 3 Press the center of the X mark then the position of the mark changes one after another Press five marks sequentially 4 When recognized confirmation screen 2 is restored At procedure 3 when pressing a point away from the center the X mark a recognition error will result Then the X mark returns to the initial positio...

Page 1630: ...YES YES YES YES HG9Z XC275 For IDEC FC4A 5A MICROSmart Length 5m Connector MICRO I Parted Wire Host Mini DIN 8 pin YES YES YES YES HG9Z XC295 For IDEC FC4A 5A MICROSmart Communication Mode RS232C Length 5m Connector MICRO I D sub 9 pin Host Mini DIN 8 pin YES YES YES YES FC6A KC1C For IDEC FC6A MICROSmart FC6A C E only Length 5m Connector MICRO I Parted Wire Host RJ45 YES YES YES YES FC6A KC2C For...

Page 1631: ...e back of the MICRO I Long 5 pcs pack For total width 47 0 to 69 4 mm YES YES YES YES HG9Z XJ5PN05 For installing the expansion modules on the back of the MICRO I Extra Long 5 pcs pack For total width 70 5 to 93 0 mm YES YES YES NO Name Type No Description HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V Name Type No Description HG4G HG3G HG2G 5F HG2G 5T HG1G Maintenance Cable HG9Z XCM42 USB cable to connect to a comp...

Page 1632: ...rect connection Communication Mode RS422 Length 5m Connector MICRO I D sub 9 pin Host Mini DIN 8 pin YES YES YES NO NO HG9Z XC315 For Mitsubishi Q series direct connection Communication Mode RS232C Length 5m Connector MICRO I D sub 9 pin Host Mini DIN 6 pin YES YES YES NO NO Connector Conversion Cable HG9Z XCT11 To convert from D sub 25 pin to 9 pin used when replacing from HG4F 3F 2F to HG4G 3G H...

Page 1633: ... 2 pcs pack YES YES YES NO NO HG9Z PMT11LPN02 For MicroSmart I O Module 11 pole 2 pcs pack YES YES YES NO NO Name Type No Description Maintenance Cable HG9Z XCM42 USB cable to connect to a computer Length 2m Connector HG1P USB Mini B Computer USB Type A HG1P Optional Cable HG9Z XCP13 Communication Mode RS422 485 or Ethernet Length 3m Connector HG1P CA 19S1N128007S Host D sub 25 pin Male Connector ...

Page 1634: ...ons 35 80 WindO I NV4 User s Manual External Dimensions Hand Strap HG9Z PS4 Unit mm Wall Mounted Hook HG9Z PK3 Unit mm Length Adjuster Black 50 0 205 0 1 5 9 0 16 0 54 5 39 6 44 1 21 0 68 0 6 5 1 2 35 0 48 0 ...

Page 1635: ...YES YES YES Communication Plug for external devices HG9Z XT09 Right angle type YES YES YES NO HG9Z XT09V Vertical type NO NO NO YES USB Cable Lock Pin HG9Z XU1PN05 For USB2 Type A port 5 pcs pack YES YES YES YES Name Type No Description HG4G HG3G HG2G 5F HG2G 5T HG1G Mounting Clip HG9Z 4KPN04 For HG4G 3G HG1G 4 pcs pack YES YES NO NO YES SLD K02PN10 For HG2G 5F 5T 10 pcs pack NO NO YES YES NO Repl...

Page 1636: ...f the Products arise from the cause other than the Products or 3 The Products are improved modified or altered by the party other than IDEC or 4 The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the usage of the Product in the way that is not intended or 5 The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the cause beyond IDEC s control including but not limited to fire ear...

Page 1637: ...he USB flash drive is broken Please use a new recommended USB flash drive SD memory card Access Error When the unit attempted to access the SD memory card The SD memory card did not have enough free space The SD memory card was removed partway through The SD memory card was broken Create some free space on the SD memory card or get a new one USB flash Drive Access Error When the unit attempted to ...

Page 1638: ...e the number of write operations to be performed at the same time Communication error READ Illegal reply from Ext device Confirm PLC Device Address The external device returned an error for a read request of a device address from the MICRO I Check the following The ID and name of the external device for which the communications error occurred will be displayed Check if an error has occurred on the...

Page 1639: ...ere is invalid clock data which is used in Calendar parts Check the calculation or settings Device range error The data is written to the device with the address out of the range The number of device addresses exceeds the limitation Check the device address settings Script error An error occurred for a process in execution of the script Check the value of HMI Special Data Registers LSD52 and LSD53...

Page 1640: ... battery error or Bit 13 Replace battery error of address number 2 in the System Area 2 is set and it is set whenever the MICRO I is powered on To display the warning message in the Project Settings dialog box on the System Settings tab select the Battery warning message check box Message Description Backup data lost Replace the battery The Log Data and Calendar Data are lost Set the clock again I...

Page 1641: ...fail to download the runtime program to MICRO I the backlight may turn to OFF and a beep may sound continuously every second even after the power has been turned off and on again Rectify the situation by downloading the project using WindO I NV4 via USB cable 2 3 Touch Panel Does Not Respond Correctly If the touch panel needs to be readjusted then go to the System Mode to readjust the touch panel ...

Page 1642: ...2 Handling Problems 36 6 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1643: ...098 0x62 139 0x8B 179 0xB3 220 0xDC 013 0x0D 058 0x3A 099 0x63 140 0x8C 180 0xB4 221 0xDD 014 0x0E 059 0x3B 100 0x64 141 0x8D 181 0xB5 223 0xDF 019 0x13 060 0x3C 102 0x66 142 0x8E 182 0xB6 224 0xE0 020 0x14 062 0x3E 103 0x67 143 0x8F 183 0xB7 225 0xE1 021 0x15 063 0x3F 104 0x68 144 0x90 184 0xB8 226 0xE2 022 0x16 064 0x40 105 0x69 145 0x91 185 0xB9 227 0xE3 023 0x17 065 0x41 106 0x6A 146 0x92 186 ...

Page 1644: ...300 142 99CC99 182 CC33CC 224 FF6633 020 FF0000 062 00FFCC 103 660000 143 99CCCC 183 CC3399 225 FF6666 021 888800 063 00FF99 104 660033 144 99CCFF 184 CC3366 226 FF6699 022 FFFF00 064 00FF66 105 660066 145 99FFFF 185 CC3333 227 FF66CC 023 008800 065 00FF33 106 660099 146 99FFCC 186 CC3300 228 FF66FF 024 00FF00 067 33CC00 107 6600CC 147 99FF99 187 CC6600 229 FF99FF 025 008888 068 33CC33 108 6600FF ...

Page 1645: ...he parts These graphics can be used as the outline of parts Example Bit Button Type Selects the category of graphics OFF ON Displays the graphic when OFF or ON Click ON or OFF to switch the graphics displayed on the list Picture List Displays the list of registered graphics Select the graphic to use as the outline of the part 2 View Browser HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V HG3G V HG2G V HG2G 5T HG4G HG1...

Page 1646: ...ly the basic colors assignable to the Color button Text Manager Color This feature allows use of the text color specified in the Text Manager Click here to use the text color specified in the Text Manager This option can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Transparent Color Converts the color in the imported picture to be transparent This option can only be selected when Pi...

Page 1647: ...objects are formed by foreground and background colors Pattern The selected pattern is applied to the foreground color The background color is visible through the unpainted parts of the foreground color Gradation The selected gradation is applied to the foreground color The background color is visible through the unpainted parts of the foreground color 4 Pattern Palette HG3G HG2G 5F HG5G V HG4G V ...

Page 1648: ...g any color at all Pattern name None 1 Foreground 100 Foreground 25 Foreground 50 Background 100 Pattern buttons Display sample Pattern name Horizontal lines Vertical lines Slant Upwards Slant Downwards Crosshatch Tint Pattern buttons Display sample Gradation name Diagonal up 1 Horizontal 1 Diagonal down 1 Vertical 1 Diagonal up 2 Horizontal 2 Gradation buttons Display sample Gradation name Diagon...

Page 1649: ...ter Left Align Text Vertical Top Center Center Top Bottom Left Aligns the text along the left edge Center Centers the text horizontally in the center Right Aligns the text along the right edge Center Left Centers the line containing the most number of characters and then aligns the other lines to the left end of that line Aligns along left edge Centers text in the middle Aligns along right edge Al...

Page 1650: ...Horizontal Align Text Vertical defaults to Top Top Aligns the text along the top edge Center Center Top Centers the text vertically in the center Bottom Aligns the text along the bottom edge Aligns text along top edge Centers text in the middle Aligns text along bottom edge Align Text Horizontal Left Center Right Align Text Vertical Top ...

Page 1651: ...e middle Aligns along right edge Vertical text cannot be set if Font is set to Stroke Take note of these points when the Vertical Writing check box is selected When there is a mixture of double byte and single byte characters the half width characters are leftaligned Dashes are displayed horizontally Symbols representing voiced and semi voiced sounds of single byte characters are shown as follows ...

Page 1652: ...5 Text Alignment A 10 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1653: ...tion Organizer Updater Dialog Box 2 39 Autoplay 10 85 Autorun Tab 4 62 AutoSave 2 63 Auto Setup Dialog Box Alarm Log Settings 13 18 Available Updates 2 39 B Background Colors A 5 Backlight 4 26 Backlight OFF 5 16 BACnet Communication 3 94 BACnet Device Foreign device function 3 103 Object and Device Binding Function 3 98 Read Property Function 3 99 Subscribed COV COV function 3 100 Unsubscribed CO...

Page 1654: ...mand 12 37 Selector Switch 8 159 Timer 12 64 Video Display 10 91 Word Button 8 38 Word Write Command 12 17 Communicate with 24 5 Communication 2 51 Communication Driver 2 57 Communication Driver Extension Settings Dialog Box 4 49 Communication Driver Information Dialog Box 24 34 Communication Driver Network Tab 4 50 Communication Driver Tab 4 45 Communication Interface Tab 4 35 Communication Setti...

Page 1655: ...nitor 25 21 Device Object Properties List 3 131 Digital I O Modules 30 12 Disable Switch 4 28 Display Block Number 10 163 Display images from the video input 10 84 Display the Order of Overlapping Screens 5 16 Display the Value of Device Address in Popup 25 18 Display with Arithmetic Operation 10 20 10 182 Div 8 21 8 24 8 115 12 10 12 13 12 43 DM Link 1 1 Communication 3 4 DM Link 1 N Communicatio...

Page 1656: ...Input 10 36 Message Display 10 103 Message Switching Display 10 125 Numerical Display 10 174 Numerical Input 10 11 Selector Switch 8 152 Formatting External Memory Device 31 17 External Memory Device Inserted in the MICRO I 24 29 FTP Client Function 28 22 28 23 FTP Server Function 28 18 28 21 FTP Server Manager 28 29 FTP Server Tab 4 66 Full Screen 10 85 Function 20 23 Function list 20 14 Function...

Page 1657: ...rowser 8 98 Alarm Display 8 99 Data Transfer 8 99 Keypad Half Width Character 8 98 Keypad Hiragana 8 98 Multimedia Function 8 100 Key Button 8 72 29 6 29 19 29 32 For Alarm Displays 8 96 For Data Transfer Keys 8 96 For Keypad Half Width Character 8 93 For Keypad Hiragana 8 95 For the Multimedia Function 8 97 Keypad 8 139 L Label of Recorded Data 15 12 Label Tab Bar Chart 11 13 Line 7 1 Line Chart ...

Page 1658: ...2 Alarm Log Settings 13 29 Bar Chart 11 17 Base Screen 5 15 Bit Button 8 15 Calendar 10 197 Character Input 10 43 Data Log Settings 14 31 Goto Screen Button 8 52 Key Button 8 89 Line Chart 11 48 Message Display 10 112 Message Switching Display 10 132 Meter 11 71 Multi Button 8 135 Multi State Lamp 9 29 Numerical Display 10 182 Numerical Input 10 20 Picture Display 10 72 Pie Chart 11 59 Pilot Lamp ...

Page 1659: ... 162 Print Button 8 58 Print Command 12 27 Print for Multi Functions 8 119 12 47 Rectangle 7 9 Script Command 12 34 Script for Multi Functions 8 127 12 55 Selector Switch 8 145 Text 7 27 Timer 12 61 Video Display 10 84 Word Button 8 23 Word Write Command 12 12 Word Write for Multi Functions 8 115 12 43 Protect 2 49 Protecting Data 23 3 Protecting Displays and Operations 23 8 Protecting the Display...

Page 1660: ... Type 5 14 5 20 Screens 2 46 2 52 5 1 Script 20 1 Script Coding Examples 20 30 Script Command 12 32 Script Debugger 26 15 Script Definition Method 20 21 Script Editor 20 12 Script Error 20 4 Script Function 20 1 Script ID 4 63 Script Manager 20 7 SD memory card 31 3 Security Dialog Box 23 37 Security Function 23 1 Security Group 23 6 23 9 31 36 Security Settings Dialog Box 23 41 Security Tab Alarm...

Page 1661: ...e 4 27 System Mode 1 4 34 3 File Copy Function 29 33 Formatting external memory device 31 18 PLC Program Transfer Function 29 21 Project Transfer Function 29 7 System Setup 2 49 System Tab 4 25 System Web Page 28 5 System_Status 3 147 T Tag Editor 2 68 Tag File 4 51 Target Information Dialog Box 24 32 Target IP Address 24 8 24 10 Target List 24 7 Temporary Device 20 29 Terminal Code 3 78 Text 6 2 ...

Page 1662: ...figuration 23 59 User Accounts 23 1 User Communication 3 8 User Communication Tab 4 54 Using the online function for Ethernet communication 24 7 Using the Simulator 26 3 V Verified FTP Client 28 19 Verified FTP Server 28 23 Verified SMTP Servers 28 41 Vertical Installation 5 27 Vertical Writing A 8 Video Display 10 81 Video Input Tab 22 15 View 2 51 Screens 2 52 Show Hide 2 51 Window 2 52 Workspac...

Page 1663: ...R 8 21 8 24 12 10 12 13 12 43 Y Y Axis Tab 11 35 Z ZLD Project File Creating ZLD Project File 29 18 Download 29 19 29 21 Upload 29 20 29 25 ZNV Project File Creating ZNV Project File 29 3 Download 29 6 29 7 Upload 29 6 29 11 Zoom 2 52 2 59 2 66 ...

Page 1664: ...Index 12 WindO I NV4 User s Manual ...

Page 1665: ... tw idec com Hong Kong IDEC Izumi H K Co Ltd Tel 852 2803 8989 info hk idec com China Shanghai IDEC Shanghai Corporation Tel 86 21 6135 1515 idec cn idec com China Shenzhen IDEC Shenzhen Corporation Tel 86 755 8356 2977 idec cn idec com China Beijing IDEC Beijing Corporation Tel 86 10 6581 6131 idec cn idec com Japan IDEC Corporation Tel 81 6 6398 2527 marketing idec co jp Specifications and other...

Reviews:

No comments